H01 001 **[265 TEXT H01**]
H01 002    |^*0For the last two years its {0GNP} has contracted by nearly 10
H01 003 percent. ^More than half the work force are unemployed or
H01 004 under-employed. ^Inflation in 1984 reached some 60 percent. ^Per
H01 005 capita income in real terms is now around the same level as in 1972.
H01 006    |^The Aquino Government has moved quickly to control public
H01 007 expenditure and to dismantle monopolies. ^It has made it clear that
H01 008 agricultural reform will have high priority. ^Recovery of the rural
H01 009 sector would significantly boost the whole economy. ^There are already
H01 010 some positive signs: inflation has fallen to under 20 percent;
H01 011 interest rates are also coming down; and the exchange rate has
H01 012 stabilised at about 20 pesos to the {0US} dollar. ^After two years of
H01 013 a declining {0GNP}, a positive but very modest rate of growth is
H01 014 expected this year.
H01 015    |^New Zealand's relations with the Philippines have historically
H01 016 been friendly but, until recently, not especially close. ^The Embassy
H01 017 in the Philippines was opened in 1975 *- the last of the five founding
H01 018 {0ASEAN} countries in which New Zealand established resident
H01 019 representation.
H01 020    |^This country's exports to the Philippines have declined in
H01 021 recent years because of the contraction in the Philippines economy,
H01 022 but with greater political stability and the likelihood of economic
H01 023 recovery, the prospects for renewed growth are good.
H01 024 **[PLATE**]
H01 025 *<*6SINGAPORE*>
H01 026    |^*0Singapore is a city state, a little smaller than Lake Taupo,
H01 027 but it is one of the economic powerhouses of Asia. ^It thrives on
H01 028 trade, commerce and financial dealings, and through a combination of
H01 029 hard work and astute government has become the most affluent country
H01 030 in Asia after Brunei and Japan. ^It has a population of some 2.5
H01 031 million, approximately three quarters of whom are Chinese.
H01 032    |^Singapore would probably have remained a quiet fishing village
H01 033 if Sir Stanford Raffles had not recognised in 1819 its potential as a
H01 034 port and administrative centre. ^Under the British it became a great
H01 035 trading port and a military and naval base. ^In 1959 Singapore became
H01 036 internally self-governing; in 1963 it joined Malaysia. ^Just two years
H01 037 later, however, it separated from Malaysia, because of a basic
H01 038 conflict of interests between *"Malaysia for the Malays**" and
H01 039 Singapore's predominantly Chinese population. ^Under the Prime
H01 040 Minister, Lee Kuan Yew, a newly independent Singapore used trade,
H01 041 tourism and industrialisation to make up for the loss of British
H01 042 bases.
H01 043 **[PLATE**]
H01 044    |^Recently the economy has come under some strain. ^A growth rate
H01 045 of 8.2 percent in 1984 was followed by a contraction of -1.7% in 1985,
H01 046 and the governing party, the People's Action Party ({0PAP}), has lost
H01 047 some of its overwhelming support. ^The Government has, however, moved
H01 048 quickly to implement measures designed to turn the economy around and,
H01 049 provided the international economy picks up, the current downturn is
H01 050 not likely to have serious long-term effects. ^The slowing down comes,
H01 051 however, at a delicate point in the process of transferring political
H01 052 power to the *'second generation**' of political leaders. ^Lee Kuan
H01 053 Yew still controls and guides Singapore's political and economic
H01 054 policies, but a younger cabinet team led by the First Deputy Prime
H01 055 Minister, Goh Chok Tong, is now handling the day-to-day business.
H01 056 ^Among the younger men taking a prominent part in running the country
H01 057 is Lee Kuan Yew's elder son, Brigadier-General (\0Res) Lee Hsien
H01 058 Loong, who is Acting Minister of Trade and Industry and Minister of
H01 059 State for Defence.
H01 060    |^The bilateral relationship with New Zealand has been close for
H01 061 many years. ^While Commonwealth ties and co-operation in defence and
H01 062 security matters formed the early links, the focus is now increasingly
H01 063 commercial. ^With over 40 New Zealand firms based in Singapore, this
H01 064 country's private sector presence is strong and growing. ^Singapore is
H01 065 used as the springboard for the operations of many New Zealand
H01 066 companies in South East Asia. ^New Zealand cabinet ministers, Members
H01 067 of Parliament, officials and businessmen visit Singapore frequently
H01 068 and their Singaporean counterparts also come to this country quite
H01 069 regularly. ^The New Zealand Force in South East Asia ({0NZFORSEA}) has
H01 070 been stationed in Singapore since 1971. ^There are also substantial
H01 071 links between the two countries in the fields of tourism, education
H01 072 and technological and scientific co-operation. ^The development
H01 073 assistance programme to Singapore has been reduced in recent years in
H01 074 line with Singapore's increasing affluence, and is now directed solely
H01 075 toward training.
H01 076 *<*6THAILAND*>
H01 077    |^*0Thailand's population of about 52 million lives on a land
H01 078 area just twice the size of New Zealand. ^Buddhism is the dominant
H01 079 religion. ^Thailand is a very fertile country and a major agricultural
H01 080 producer. ^Rice is the mainstay of the Thai economy and the country's
H01 081 major export. ^Tin mining and rubber production are also major export
H01 082 activities. ^Thailand is the only country in South East Asia never to
H01 083 have been colonised.
H01 084    |^Thailand is a constitutional monarchy. ^Under the terms of the
H01 085 1978 constitution, the King is Head of State and Commander in Chief of
H01 086 the Armed Forces. ^He appoints the Prime Minister on the advice of the
H01 087 National Assembly, and the Council of Ministers on the advice of the
H01 088 Prime Minister. ^Since the end of the absolute monarchy in 1932,
H01 089 effective power has been exercised by a group of political parties
H01 090 with the co-operation and support of the military. ^While periodic
H01 091 changes of government might convey an impression of political
H01 092 instability, the changes of leadership have not affected the basic
H01 093 thrust of Thailand's foreign and domestic policies. ^The interests
H01 094 held in common by competing e*?21ites have tended to outweigh any
H01 095 differences among them. ^The monarchy and the Buddhist religion are
H01 096 major unifying factors in Thailand.
H01 097    |^Recent government economic policy has been dominated by the
H01 098 need to come to grips with the imbalances in Thailand's national
H01 099 accounts, a continuing current account deficit and mounting foreign
H01 100 debt. ^Internally, a persistent budget deficit is a major problem.
H01 101 ^The Government has implemented tight fiscal and monetary policies
H01 102 since late 1984 to tackle these. ^A resolution of the problem remains
H01 103 elusive, however, mainly because of a sharp downturn in world market
H01 104 prices for Thailand's major agricultural commodities due to increasing
H01 105 access problems for its exports of light industrial products
H01 106 (textiles, clothing, footwear and electronic goods).
H01 107    |^In the medium and longer term, export prospects for the
H01 108 country's major commodities do not look buoyant. ^The {0US} Farm Act,
H01 109 for example, is likely to have an adverse effect on exports of rice,
H01 110 maize and sugar. ^Significant growth in the economy therefore appears
H01 111 to be dependent on Thailand successfully breaking into major new
H01 112 markets. ^To this end, greater attention is being focused on Eastern
H01 113 Europe and the Soviet Union.
H01 114    |^Thailand held a general election in July 1986. ^As expected, no
H01 115 single party gained a clear majority in the House of Representatives.
H01 116 ^The new coalition Government comprising Democrat, Chart Thai, Social
H01 117 Action and Ratsaden parties renominated General Prem Tinsulanonda as
H01 118 Prime Minister. ^Prem, who has been Prime Minister since 1980,
H01 119 maintains firm control over key Cabinet positions and enjoys the
H01 120 continued support of the monarchy, the key political parties and the
H01 121 military.
H01 122    |^New Zealand's relations with Thailand are friendly and date
H01 123 back to the 1950s and the formation of {0SEATO}. ^An indication of the
H01 124 warmth of the political relationship was the enthusiastic welcome
H01 125 given to the New Zealand Prime Minister during his official visit to
H01 126 Bangkok in June 1986. ^There is a wide range of bilateral contacts
H01 127 between officials, in particular through the bilateral aid programme
H01 128 ({0NZ}*+$1.5 million in 1985/ 86), the Mutual Assistance Programme in
H01 129 the defence field, and through the business community. ^Moreover, many
H01 130 key Thai officials have studied at school and university in New
H01 131 Zealand and now form an influential constituency.
H01 132 *<*6NEW ZEALAND AND {0ASEAN}*>
H01 133    |^*0New Zealand has strongly supported {0ASEAN} since its
H01 134 inception. ^This policy was based on the belief that the expansion and
H01 135 strengthening of closer political and economic relations among the
H01 136 countries would enhance political stability and promote economic
H01 137 development. ^Subsequent events have borne this out.
H01 138    |^New Zealand and the members of {0ASEAN} share common interests
H01 139 and aspirations in developing economic, social and cultural
H01 140 co-operation. ^The bilateral relationships are the main means for
H01 141 pursuing these. ^The day to day business between New Zealand and
H01 142 {0ASEAN} as an organisation is not as yet as substantial as the
H01 143 traffic with the {0ASEAN}s on a bilateral basis, but New Zealand's
H01 144 support for development in the region and on the Kampuchea issue has
H01 145 added substance to the relationship.
H01 146    |^Since 1975, the {0ASEAN}/ New Zealand relationship has been
H01 147 institutionalised in a regular *"dialogue**". ^This takes place in two
H01 148 main forums: annual meetings of the Foreign Ministers of {0ASEAN} and
H01 149 its Dialogue partners; and consultations at officials' level every two
H01 150 years or so. ^The most recent of the series of officials'
H01 151 consultations was held in Brunei in December, 1985, while the Prime
H01 152 Minister led the New Zealand delegation to the {0ASEAN}
H01 153 ministerial-level consultations in Manila in June 1986. ^Participation
H01 154 in the Dialogue meetings reflects New Zealand's interest in the
H01 155 political and economic stability of South East Asia.
H01 156 **[PLATE**]
H01 157    |^This country also has an interest in encouraging {0ASEAN} to
H01 158 strengthen its relationships both with other developed countries and
H01 159 with the smaller developing countries of the Asian/ Pacific region.
H01 160 ^New Zealand therefore supported the institution in 1984 of an extra
H01 161 session at the annual meeting of the {0ASEAN} Foreign Ministers with
H01 162 their dialogue partners to discuss developments in the Pacific basin,
H01 163 including a programme of {0ASEAN}-Pacific co-operation in the field of
H01 164 human resources development. ^One of the principal attractions of this
H01 165 programme is that it will offer real opportunities for the Pacific
H01 166 island countries to tap into the {0ASEAN} development experience and
H01 167 for the two neighbouring groupings, {0ASEAN} and the South Pacific
H01 168 Forum, to work more closely together.
H01 169 *<*1Trade Between New Zealand and {0ASEAN}*>
H01 170    |^*0Total trade between the {0ASEAN} region and New Zealand has
H01 171 increased steadily, rising to *+$1,314 million in 1985. ^The two-way
H01 172 trade is dominated by dairy products from New Zealand and oil from the
H01 173 {0ASEAN} countries. ^In recent years the balance has consistently been
H01 174 in {0ASEAN}'s favour. ^Imports from {0ASEAN} accounted for 6.7 percent
H01 175 of New
H01 176 **[GRAPH**]
H01 177 Zealand's total imports in value terms in 1985. ^New Zealand's exports
H01 178 to {0ASEAN} as a percentage of total exports are continuing to
H01 179 decline, however. ^From nearly 7 percent in 1980/ 81 they now
H01 180 represent just 4.5 percent. ^The main reasons for this decline are the
H01 181 contraction of the Philippines market and a fall-off in dairy exports
H01 182 to Indonesia.
H01 183    |^Following the first official New Zealand/ {0ASEAN} Dialogue
H01 184 meeting in 1975, a Joint Trade Study Group ({0JTSG}) was set up under
H01 185 the umbrella of the dialogue. ^The {0JTSG} normally meets every two
H01 186 years or so, the most recent meeting being in Bandar Seri Begawan in
H01 187 December 1985. ^The {0JTSG} has been the forum for the discussion of
H01 188 access questions of concern to the {0ASEAN} countries and of trade
H01 189 promotion assistance. ^Discussions are under way about the possibility
H01 190 of New Zealand representatives meeting the {0ASEAN} Committee on Trade
H01 191 and Tourism to discuss a wide range of multilateral issues including
H01 192 the new {0GATT} round, regional trade initiatives, bilateral trade
H01 193 issues, tourism and transport questions.
H01 194    |^The inaugural meeting of the {0ASEAN}-New Zealand Business
H01 195 Council and the {0ASEAN} Chambers of Commerce and Industry was held in
H01 196 Jakarta in July 1986. ^This marked the beginning of a regular private
H01 197 sector dialogue between {0ASEAN} and New Zealand.
H01 198 *<*1Development Assistance to the Region*>
H01 199    |^The main {0ASEAN} recipients of New Zealand development
H01 200 assistance on a *1bilateral *0basis are Indonesia, the Philippines and
H01 201 Thailand. ^The emphasis of New Zealand's
H01 202 **[PLATE**]
H01 203 **[GRAPH**]
H01 204 activities in these three countries is to identify projects which
H01 205 encourage technology transfer and enhance economic development.
H01 206 ^Scholarships, education and training are major elements of all
H01 207 {0ASEAN} country programmes.
H01 208    |^In addition to these bilateral allocations, New Zealand
H01 209 operates a *1regional *0programme for {0ASEAN} of about *+$1.1\0m.
H01 210 ^The largest project under this heading is the {0ASEAN}/ New Zealand
H01 211 Afforestation Project ({0ANZAP}) in the Philippines. ^Human Resource
H01 212 Development ({0HRD}) activities are, in the main, also funded from the
H01 213 regional programme. ^Proposals currently under consideration include
H01 214 training attachments and exchange visits in the field of social
H01 215 welfare, and training in film production and the teaching of English
H01 216 as a foreign language (with particular reference to business and
H01 217 technology needs).
H01 218 *#
H02 001 **[266 TEXT H02**]
H02 002 |*0152.
H02 003 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 004 ^Government has rejected the group's request for an allocation of
H02 005 deepwater fish resources, claiming that it does not want to set a
H02 006 precedent which would result in having to consider allocating
H02 007 resources to other applicants. ^{0MAF} also made it clear that it
H02 008 intends to put out to tender any deepwater fish resources which might
H02 009 become available to the catching sector. ^Gifting quotas to a Chatham
H02 010 Islands group would set an undesirable precedent. ^Further, the
H02 011 Chathams {0M.P.} could provide little support because another
H02 012 application lodged by the Chatham Islands Packing Company (Salmond
H02 013 Industries) served as a distraction and made choosing to support one
H02 014 or other of the applications difficult. ^Yet another distraction was a
H02 015 late indication on the part of the Chatham Islands County Council that
H02 016 it wanted a deepwater fish quota. ^This was subsequently withdrawn.
H02 017 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 018 |153.
H02 019 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 020 ^In a visit to the Islands in early December, \0Dr. Habib familiarised
H02 021 himself with the proposal and saw that it was a sound one in most
H02 022 respects. ^He suggested ways in which progress could be made including
H02 023 getting the Packing Company to provide the community with the details
H02 024 of its proposal, a step already taken by the Chatham Islands Resource
H02 025 Developments group. ^The community could then decide which application
H02 026 would best suit its needs or perhaps decide on combining the two
H02 027 proposals. ^The result would be one fully supported Chatham Islands
H02 028 proposal which would be best submitted on Council letterhead. ^The
H02 029 Chatham Islands community has called on the Packing Company to state
H02 030 its plans and a meeting was scheduled for mid-December for
H02 031 discussions.
H02 032 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 033 *<*2F. *3THE FUTURE AND RECOMMENDATIONS*>
H02 034 |*0154.
H02 035 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 036 ^In the event that a single cohesive Chatham Islands fisheries
H02 037 development proposal is drawn up, the recommendation would be that
H02 038 {0MEDC} support that proposal in the following ways:
H02 039 _|(a) by providing expert advice on the contents of the proposal, and
H02 040 on possible rearrangements, additions and alterations;
H02 041 |(b) by advising on the timing and manner in which the proposal should
H02 042 be put to the various Government Departments, {0e.g.}, {0MAF}, Maori
H02 043 Affairs, Internal Affairs, Trade and Industry and {0M.P}'s ({0i.e.}
H02 044 \0Mrs. Hercus, \0Mr. Lange, \0Mr. Wetere, \0Mr. Tapsell, \0Mr. Moore
H02 045 and \0Mr. Moyle);
H02 046 |(c) by providing expert assistance during submission of the proposal;
H02 047 |(d) by lending particular support to the proposal on the grounds that
H02 048 it would affect a large Maori community in a most positive way by
H02 049 assisting it into a major sector of the fishing industry, enhance
H02 050 present fishing activities, and, in fact, be a boon to the whole
H02 051 Chatham Islands community, Maori and non-Maori.
H02 052 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 053 |155.
H02 054 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 055 ^If a deepwater quota is granted, a further recommendation would be
H02 056 that {0MEDC} support the resulting development project by:
H02 057 _|(a) Defining and assisting with the feasibility studies required
H02 058 covering the fields of fish resources, catching and fisheries
H02 059 management, fish processing and marketing, economic analyses,
H02 060 infrastructure and manpower requirements, integration of the project
H02 061 into the Chatham Islands economy, and all interplays with the mainland
H02 062 economy;
H02 063 |(b) Assisting with subsequent company management and other expert
H02 064 manpower requirements;
H02 065 |(c) Assisting with location of funds to support the feasibility
H02 066 studies and with the subsequent loan/ grant requirements necessary to
H02 067 implement the project.
H02 068 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 069 *<*2G. *3CONCLUSIONS*>
H02 070 |*0156.
H02 071 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 072 ^This project, if implemented, would pay handsome dividends for a
H02 073 sizeable Maori community which is largely dependent on fishing. ^The
H02 074 scale of operation possible with a totally integrated fisheries
H02 075 development would be far greater than exists at present and would
H02 076 affect the entire Chatham Islands community. ^Although the definitive
H02 077 studies have yet to be done, there is little doubt that the venture
H02 078 would prosper. ^With close access to grounds harbouring the largest
H02 079 prime orange roughy and lobster concentrations in the country, a
H02 080 Chathams venture would have every chance of achieving an acceptable
H02 081 financial return despite distance from markets. ^Inexperience could be
H02 082 overcome by employment of suitable imported expertise on time
H02 083 contracts. ^A development on this scale would be sufficient to provide
H02 084 employment for much of the Islands' population and attract home others
H02 085 who had left for lack of such an opportunity. ^The Maori component in
H02 086 all of this would be at least 50 percent of the Chathams population,
H02 087 perhaps more after in migration and family returns from the mainland.
H02 088 ^Jobs would be available in all sectors of the fishing project
H02 089 depending on skills, aptitude and aspirations. ^In addition, the
H02 090 project would very likely be formulated on the basis of widespread
H02 091 community ownership in a fisheries cooperative type of company.
H02 092 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 093 |157.
H02 094 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 095 ^This is one of the major projects identified in this study and
H02 096 deserves every support. ^Although it could be described as a community
H02 097 development project, it would in fact impinge on the lives of the
H02 098 whole Maori community on the Chathams. ^The Islands deserve access to
H02 099 the prime fisheries resources which exist close to their shores. ^Any
H02 100 support which the {0MEDC} can lend would be most appreciated, and,
H02 101 since there is such a large Maori component, the {0MEDC} could well
H02 102 sway {0MAF} towards granting the Chathams a deepwater fish quota.
H02 103 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 104 *<*=VI. *3EAST COAST SOUTH ISLAND FISHERIES MANAGEMENT AREA*>
H02 105 *<*2A. *3GENERAL*>
H02 106 |*0158.
H02 107 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 108 ^Fishing vessel and shore fishing permits held or previously held in
H02 109 this management area by people of Maori descent are listed in
H02 110 Appendices 12 and 13. ^The numbers are relatively small, reflecting,
H02 111 as much as anything, the low numbers of Maoris living in the area.
H02 112 ^Most of the vessels are small, concentrating on set netting, potting
H02 113 and lining. ^These would appear to be activities most suited to Maori
H02 114 people with the more industrial activities like trawling being
H02 115 conducted by others. ^One factor which might be limiting Maoris to
H02 116 small vessel operations is that less finance is required in that area
H02 117 compared with trawling. ^If this is the case, then trawling will
H02 118 remain the preserve of the Pakeha since that method is today very
H02 119 expensive to apply.
H02 120 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 121 |159.
H02 122 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 123 ^Shore fishing permits are few. ^Most involve handgathering or diving
H02 124 for species such as kina, paua and seaweed.
H02 125 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 126 |160.
H02 127 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 128 ^Little time was spent in this very large area. ^Therefore, it was not
H02 129 possible to assess the wellbeing of the Maori fisherman or determine
H02 130 areas where he could benefit from financial or any other type of
H02 131 assistance. ^This would need to be an exercise for the future.
H02 132 ^Particular communities should be visited including Kaikoura, Moeraki,
H02 133 Lake Forsyth and Papanui and Waitati Inlets in Otago.
H02 134 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 135 |161.
H02 136 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 137 ^Karengo harvesting is a controversial issue at Kaikoura. ^The local
H02 138 Maori community has serious objections to the practice. ^{0MAF}
H02 139 conducted surveys in the area of commercial harvesting in 1980 and
H02 140 estimated a Karengo standing stock of about 11 tonnes. ^A similar
H02 141 survey in 1984 showed a resource size some 50-100 times the 1980
H02 142 level. ^The differences in the quantity of Karengo between the two
H02 143 years was attributed to natural fluctuations resulting from good and
H02 144 bad weather and sea conditions at critical times in the plant's life
H02 145 cycle. ^Five Karengo harvesting permits were held in 1984, all
H02 146 apparently by Pakehas. ^Their permits were being reviewed for 1985.
H02 147 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 148 |162.
H02 149 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 150 ^There has been considerable interest in the past in harvesting the
H02 151 kelp weeds *1\6Durvillaea *0and *1\6Macrocystis. ^*0Some 10,000 \0t of
H02 152 Durvillaea was harvested from the Kaikoura coast at one stage. ^The
H02 153 major commercial interest in these seaweeds is as sources of algin.
H02 154 ^Algin products are used in a wide range of manufactured goods *- as
H02 155 binders, stabilisers, emulsifiers, and moulding materials, in the
H02 156 pharmaceutical industry, in dental and food technology, in the
H02 157 processing of meat and fish, and in a wide range of industrial
H02 158 products including dyes, paints and textiles. ^There is a development
H02 159 opportunity in kelp harvesting although limited in {0MAF}'s view. ^It
H02 160 is worth considering and should perhaps be discussed with certain of
H02 161 the southern Maori coastal communities.
H02 162 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 163 |163.
H02 164 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 165 ^There has been recent commercial interest in harvesting the cockle
H02 166 beds in Waitati and Papanui Inlets on Otago Peninsula. ^A 1984 {0MAF}
H02 167 survey showed Papanui Inlet carries a cockle population of around
H02 168 6,000 \0t, and Waitati Inlet about 12,000 \0t. ^During that year, two
H02 169 permit holders had permission to harvest 52 \0t of cockles each.
H02 170 ^Concern was expressed by the local Maori people and others over the
H02 171 commercialisation of the cockle beds. ^{0MAF} considered the
H02 172 objections and carried out some studies, both in Otago and on the
H02 173 exploited beds in Northland. ^They found that if havesting does not
H02 174 remove all cockles from an area and if harvesting is excluded from
H02 175 high tidal areas during periods of larval settlement, the removal of
H02 176 commercial size cockles results in increased growth rates in the
H02 177 remaining individuals and also in lower cockle mortality.
H02 178 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 179 |164.
H02 180 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 181 ^Therefore, as in many other situations, the answer is not to leave
H02 182 the beds alone completely. ^There is, on the Otago beds, room for some
H02 183 commercial exploitation. ^{0MAF}'s job is to manage the beds, taking
H02 184 into account the traditional Maori community requirements,
H02 185 recreational needs, and of course the biological factors which
H02 186 determine a sustainable level of harvest. ^Rather than the Maori
H02 187 community simply objecting to any harvesting, there would appear to be
H02 188 an opportunity for them to use the beds for all purposes. ^{0MAF}
H02 189 would likely be supportive of any such initiative. ^This is an issue
H02 190 which should be discussed in any subsequent visit to the south.
H02 191 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 192 *<*=VII. *3CHALLENGER FISHERIES MANAGEMENT AREA*>
H02 193 *<*2A. *3GENERAL*>
H02 194 |*0165.
H02 195 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 196 ^The Challenger area was another in which little time could be spent.
H02 197 ^It is also an area where Maori vessel owners are poorly represented.
H02 198 ^The area is dominated by the large Nelson fishing companies which
H02 199 simply employ crews to run their vessels. ^This is very much like
H02 200 Auckland and Whangarei where many company boats are based.
H02 201 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 202 |166.
H02 203 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 204 ^The Maori people holding fishing vessel permits are listed in
H02 205 Appendix 14. ^As in other areas most permit holders operate small
H02 206 vessels and work less complex gear like lines.
H02 207 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 208 |167.
H02 209 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 210 ^Undoubtedly, the area also has Maoris who hold shore fishing permits
H02 211 although none was identified during this study.
H02 212 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 213 |168.
H02 214 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 215 ^A major shore fishing activity in the area is mussel farming.
H02 216 ^Farming began in the Marlborough Sounds in 1970 with the siting of
H02 217 three rafts in Kenepuru Sound. ^In the first seven years of
H02 218 development, almost as much money and effort was expended by mussel
H02 219 farmers in establishing a legitimate claim for their industry to use
H02 220 some of the waters of the Marlborough Sounds as was spent on
H02 221 developing efficient mussel farming techniques. ^Since 1977 the
H02 222 industry has seen rapid expansion in production which resulted from
H02 223 the introduction of a longline culture system, the fast growth rate of
H02 224 the green-lipped mussel, and the major efforts of individuals and
H02 225 groups within the industry to establish export markets for mussels.
H02 226 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 227 |169.
H02 228 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 229 ^Whether there is still room in the Marlborough Sounds or in other
H02 230 embayments for Maori participation in marine farming should be
H02 231 investigated. ^At present, such involvement is minimal (see Appendix
H02 232 6). ^This is yet another area of opportunity which has passed the
H02 233 Maori community by.
H02 234 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 235 |170.
H02 236 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 237 |^Salmon is another fish species with a fine financial future. ^It is
H02 238 8 years since the initial work on Salmon farming began in New Zealand.
H02 239 ^In that time the industry has shown it can produce and sell in both
H02 240 domestic and export markets. ^It now strives to do this at a profit.
H02 241 ^In this area, Salmon farms exist in Takaka and Hokitika. ^A small
H02 242 operation on Pupu Springs describes attractive returns on investment.
H02 243 ^Certainly, if Maori people are looking at the fishing industry,
H02 244 Salmon farming is worth considerable thought. ^Maori groups often have
H02 245 all the interest in the world but lack the application to follow
H02 246 through in time to catch the new developments during the boom phases.
H02 247 ^Mussel farming is a prime example of this and Salmon farming is
H02 248 likely to be another. ^Organisations like {0MEDC} could well play a
H02 249 facilitative role, bringing Maori people alongside the development
H02 250 opportunities and assisting with subsequent developments.
H02 251 **[END INDENTATION**]
H02 252 |171.
H02 253 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H02 254 |^A further opportunity which is being tested in this area is scallop
H02 255 raising. ^{0MAF} has carried out a major programme of re-seeding the
H02 256 Nelson Bay scallop beds. ^Results have yet to come to hand.
H02 257 *#
H03 001 **[267 TEXT H03**]
H03 002    |^*0Second, it includes cost and price influences. ^Third, it
H03 003 provides some sectoral information. ^Fourth, it models the economy
H03 004 through a manageable set of parameters.
H03 005    |^The weaknesses of {0LENZ} are to some extent the mirror image
H03 006 of its virtues. ^Its limitations are that it produces highly
H03 007 aggregated results; it does not generate physical energy information;
H03 008 and it gives equilibrium results even though the world is never in
H03 009 equilibrium.
H03 010    |^The second model was an interactive *"spread-sheet**" model
H03 011 called {0INNOFLEX}, Boshier {0et al.} [15]. ^It gives a more refined
H03 012 description of economic activity and detailed energy data. ^It
H03 013 generates an economic input-output table and a physical energy
H03 014 balance. ^{0INNOFLEX} is based on the inter-industry transactions of
H03 015 1981. ^Inputs include a range of economic variables provided by
H03 016 {0LENZ}, and information on technology change, prices, trade, and
H03 017 consumption patterns.
H03 018    |^{0INNOFLEX} models the economy in 23 sectors. ^These cover
H03 019 agriculture, forestry, food manufacturing, wood processing, basic
H03 020 metals, transport, and each of the energy industries. ^Unlike
H03 021 conventional input-output tables, energy is modelled in terms of the
H03 022 use to which the fuel is put. ^Coal, for instance, is not *"sold**"
H03 023 direct from the producer to the consumer. ^Instead, it is *"sold**"
H03 024 for electricity generation or to a *"dummy energy services**" which
H03 025 represents its end use. ^The end uses specified in {0INNOFLEX} are:
H03 026 feedstocks, motive power, high temperature heat, low temperature heat,
H03 027 and general electrical uses (lights and motors).
H03 028    |^{0INNOFLEX} has five major strengths. ^First, it splits up the
H03 029 economy into clearly identified industries. ^Second, it handles each
H03 030 fuel separately. ^Third, its *"dummy energy services**" aid the
H03 031 modelling of interfuel substitution. ^Fourth, it models energy flows
H03 032 in Joules, and meshes these into the economic model. ^Fifth, it is
H03 033 extremely flexible, the operator being able to define every number
H03 034 within specified constraints.
H03 035    |^The main weaknesses of {0INNOFLEX} arise from its complexity.
H03 036 ^This means that it is very time consuming to run, which limits
H03 037 interaction with the research team and leaves many choices to the
H03 038 operator's judgement. ^It also requires a large number of (sometimes
H03 039 *"snap**") decisions reconciling conflicts in input values which only
H03 040 become apparent during the run.
H03 041 *<*5Procedure*>
H03 042    |^*0The first step in developing the account of New Zealand's
H03 043 development path in each of the four world futures was to specify
H03 044 change in terms of the six principal dimensions. ^The prescriptions
H03 045 for each scenario were chosen to cover a range of combinations of
H03 046 these six dimensions. ^Clearly there are many such combinations open
H03 047 to analysis. ^Judgements were made on the feasibility of possible
H03 048 combinations, their consistency with the world theme, and their value
H03 049 in terms of the energy-related objectives of the research.
H03 050    |^Significant changes on these dimensions were also specified
H03 051 within scenarios to reflect social and economic development. ^The
H03 052 starting point was the situation in 1981, with changes relative to
H03 053 1981 specified for the whole scenario period. ^Scenario *=I, for
H03 054 instance, begins with open trade, is then autarkic for two decades,
H03 055 and then gradually opens up again the latter stages of the scenario.
H03 056    |^Once this framework was sketched, scenario development began.
H03 057 ^The process is illustrated in Figure 3.1. ^To start with, an initial
H03 058 narrative was prepared. ^This took the form of a brief history as if
H03 059 written by someone looking back from 2031. ^It described in detail
H03 060 changes in society, politics, the economy, resources, and the
H03 061 environment on the world scene and in New Zealand. ^It cited events,
H03 062 places, products, and occasionally personalities. ^These were largely
H03 063 based on events and observed trends in New Zealand and overseas.
H03 064 **[FIGURE**]
H03 065    |^The main input values for {0LENZ} for the full scenario period
H03 066 were then prepared by team members working as a group. ^After the
H03 067 model runs the output was evaluated by the team to assess the degree
H03 068 to which it faithfully reflected the scenario prescription and the
H03 069 narrative. ^New runs were undertaken when inconsistencies were found
H03 070 and the narrative was developed to incorporate the information
H03 071 generated by both {0LENZ} and the team members.
H03 072    |^The final {0LENZ} outputs provided some of the data which were
H03 073 used by the team in preparing inputs for the {0INNOFLEX} model. ^The
H03 074 narrative was further developed at this stage. ^When the {0INNOFLEX}
H03 075 runs were complete, a second round of reconciliations was made. ^This
H03 076 time it was a three-way check with a comparison of the {0LENZ} and
H03 077 {0INNOFLEX} outputs, and the expanded narrative. ^Model reruns were
H03 078 made where necessary. ^A final check of the {0INNOFLEX} output graphs
H03 079 with the narrative was made and inconsistencies eliminated before the
H03 080 scenario was finalised.
H03 081    |^The completed scenario presents an account of social and
H03 082 economic development which weaves together: persistent trends on the
H03 083 world scale, such as the momentum of population growth; interactions
H03 084 between events and attitudes; evolving economic structure; evolving
H03 085 social structure; environmental change; and development in the energy
H03 086 sector.
H03 087    |^As a set the scenarios explore the relationships between energy
H03 088 in New Zealand and: geopolitics; the national economy; the economics
H03 089 of sectors and businesses; population growth and structural change;
H03 090 the structure of decision-making and social institutions; attitudes to
H03 091 change; world energy prices; technology changes in supply and demand;
H03 092 and consumer behaviour and lifestyles, over the 50 year period.
H03 093 ^During the process they track change in a wide range of aspects of
H03 094 socio-economic development including the Gross Domestic Product,
H03 095 sectoral shares of production, imports, exports, tariffs, taxes,
H03 096 employment, capital investment and consumption patterns.
H03 097 *<*5The (Art of Drawing) Conclusions*>
H03 098    |^*0The scenarios are products of a creative process which
H03 099 developed four world futures and four New Zealand futures without any
H03 100 particular outcomes in mind. ^The project brief required the study
H03 101 team to present conclusions and recommendations. ^This inevitably
H03 102 raises the question of how these were derived from the scenarios.
H03 103    |^A formal procedure was used in drawing the conclusions. ^The
H03 104 procedure distinguished between two sets of conclusions:
H03 105 _| *- first, descriptive conclusions. ^These relate strongly to the
H03 106 detail of the scenarios and are basically of the type, *"if this then
H03 107 that**"; and
H03 108 | *- second, interpretative conclusions. ^These largely go beyond the
H03 109 detail of the scenarios to explore the implications of social,
H03 110 economic and technological change for the energy system.
H03 111    |^Descriptive conclusions were drawn for each scenario under the
H03 112 following headings: patterns and diversity of energy sources; energy
H03 113 resource depletion; energy self sufficiency and foreign supply; energy
H03 114 and economy interactions; energy and environment interactions;
H03 115 significant demand sectors; significant energy supply facilities;
H03 116 resource use in the energy industries; and leading indicators of
H03 117 change. ^Following this, descriptive conclusions across all four
H03 118 scenarios were derived providing one of the bases for Chapter Four of
H03 119 this report.
H03 120    |^The interpretative conclusions were similarly drawn first for
H03 121 each scenario and then collectively for the set. ^They were considered
H03 122 under four separate headings: energy supply, energy consumption,
H03 123 energy markets and national priorities. ^The conclusions on energy
H03 124 supply cover a wide range of themes from infrastructure and the human
H03 125 resource in the supply industry to resource depletion and inventory
H03 126 assessment. ^The conclusions on energy consumption focus strongly on
H03 127 technological change, but include issues such as consumer preferences
H03 128 and demand management. ^Investment criteria, the role of government,
H03 129 the commercialisation of energy sectors, and other areas concerned
H03 130 with pricing policy and regulation are among the themes dealt with in
H03 131 the conclusions on energy markets. ^The conclusions on national
H03 132 priorities cover broad issues including the strategic choices which
H03 133 members of society need to make about energy.
H03 134    |^Clearly, for some of the conclusions of the project it is
H03 135 possible to refer to numerical results for substantiation. ^In other
H03 136 cases the conclusions depend on the background and experience of the
H03 137 scenario team. ^In essence, the discussion of philosophy, strategy and
H03 138 tactics presented in chapters five, seven and eight reflects the
H03 139 considered judgements of the research team of five senior energy
H03 140 analysts after working through the four futures.
H03 141 *<*5Principles*>
H03 142    |^*0Scenario development involves an enormous number of
H03 143 judgements by the researchers. ^There is an important interplay of
H03 144 experience and imagination in the process. ^The principles which
H03 145 guided the study team in the course of this project were that:
H03 146 _| *- the futures expressed in the scenarios should be plausible
H03 147 although some of the events portrayed may appear improbable to some
H03 148 people;
H03 149 | *- no preference should be expressed or implied for any one of the
H03 150 futures; and
H03 151 | *- global catastrophes would be specifically excluded.
H03 152    |^The development of four scenarios from the infinite number of
H03 153 possibilities clearly involves many selections by the researchers. ^In
H03 154 presenting the four scenarios the team notes that:
H03 155 _| *- it is impossible to include all eventualities and that the
H03 156 analysts must exercise judgement in which elements to portray, and the
H03 157 way they interact;
H03 158 | *- the social and economic focus of the work limits the opportunity
H03 159 to specifically address other topics such as the physical environment;
H03 160 | *- there is a random element in invention and technology development
H03 161 and adoption which presents the analyst with arbitrary choices; and
H03 162 | *- the probability of fulfilment of any particular scenario is zero.
H03 163    |^The intention of the team throughout the project was to develop
H03 164 scenarios which were internally consistent. ^By preparing scenarios
H03 165 which were individually credible yet significantly different, the team
H03 166 sought to develop a wide range of socio-economic futures against which
H03 167 to test the implications for the energy sector.
H03 168 *<*7SCENARIO OUTLINES*>
H03 169    |^*0Four scenarios were developed during the course of this
H03 170 project. ^They are simply identified as *=I, *=II, *=III, and *=IV to
H03 171 avoid the judgements that may be inferred from names. ^These scenarios
H03 172 are outlined in the following sections. ^These outlines illustrate
H03 173 some of the colour and detail of the narratives. ^The dates used are
H03 174 not predictions, but are part of scenario development process.
H03 175 *<*5Scenario *=I*>
H03 176    |^*0Scenario *=I is set in a *"Politics of Scarcity**" world with
H03 177 a pessimistic outcome. ^The basic prescription for socio-economic
H03 178 development in New Zealand was for an aging, kin-based population,
H03 179 which was resistant to change; income retentive; with decentralised
H03 180 institutions; and autarky. ^The scenario explores the implications of
H03 181 a major *"paradigm shift**" in New Zealand social values and a
H03 182 significant restructuring of the economy. ^Relatively limited
H03 183 technological development is assumed in the scenario. ^There are no
H03 184 major additions to the country's energy resources beyond those
H03 185 currently defined.
H03 186    |^The scenario opened with significant attempts being made to
H03 187 solve global problems engendered by population pressure, North-South
H03 188 tensions, resource depletion, and environmental pollution. ^These
H03 189 efforts never adequately came to grips with the full scale of the
H03 190 problems, though there were a number of partial successes.
H03 191    |^A general tightening of trading conditions and the loss of
H03 192 markets for traditional export products led to worsening terms of
H03 193 trade for New Zealand in the 1980's and early 1990's. ^Increasing
H03 194 protectionism in the industrialised nations slowed the growth of world
H03 195 trade. ^It also encouraged a larger and larger share of New Zealand's
H03 196 exports to be directed to the Middle East. ^When {0OPEC} and the price
H03 197 of oil collapsed in 1995, New Zealand's dependence on the Middle
H03 198 Eastern market meant that it was harder hit than many other countries.
H03 199    |^There followed a period in which the government attempted to
H03 200 insulate the New Zealand economy from the marked drop in export income
H03 201 after the {0OPEC} collapse in 1995 and the de facto default on foreign
H03 202 debts in 1998. ^The policies which were adopted prompted growing
H03 203 popular resistance. ^This led to the fall of the central government in
H03 204 2002.
H03 205    |^Out of the social and political turmoil emerged a co-operative
H03 206 social philosophy. ^A new emphasis developed on extended social groups
H03 207 and community with less concern for material consumption. ^What had
H03 208 been termed the *"informal**" economy of the 1980's became the
H03 209 dominant ethos in the 2000's and 2010's. ^Many central functions were
H03 210 replaced by local initiatives, including worker control of
H03 211 enterprises. ^Political control was exercised at the local level.
H03 212 ^Co-ordination between the communities was achieved through regional
H03 213 and national councils of delegates. ^Social cohesion was enhanced by
H03 214 the ease of access to people and information through the extensive use
H03 215 of telecommunications.
H03 216    |^The middle years of the scenario saw considerable and sometimes
H03 217 painful adjustments. ^The country's population peaked at 3.5 million
H03 218 between 2001 and 2011 and began to fall with the halting of
H03 219 immigration and the decline in birth rates. ^There was a severe drop in
H03 220 the material standard of living, a rise in unemployment, and large
H03 221 scale underemployment.
H03 222 *#
H04 001 **[268 TEXT H04**]
H04 002    |^*0Transport issues related to energy developments in the lower
H04 003 Waikato have been considered and potentially discordant impacts on the
H04 004 region's transport infrastructure identified. ^The study highlights
H04 005 the need for coordinated transport planning in the area to avoid the
H04 006 making of piecemeal decisions based largely on the availability and
H04 007 capacity of existing facilities. ^The significant issues are
H04 008 summarised in the following section together with a summary of link
H04 009 options to minimise potential impacts.
H04 010 *<10.2 *3PROBLEM AREAS*>
H04 011    |^*0The most significant problem area in the region is in Huntly
H04 012 township. ^The development of Huntly has historically been confined by
H04 013 the Waikato River and {0SH}1, with the result that:
H04 014 _| *- the {0CBA} has developed ribbon wise, one block deep along
H04 015 either side of Main Street and the western side of {0SH}1;
H04 016 | *- there is no land available to cater for the larger commercial
H04 017 enterprises within the immediate precincts of the {0CBA};
H04 018 | *- considerable pressure exists for the establishment of commercial
H04 019 enterprises alongside {0SH}1 to the north and south of the {0CBA}.
H04 020 |^These difficulties will be exacerbated with the estimated 50%
H04 021 increase in population in Huntly by the turn of the century.
H04 022    |^The Rotowaro branch railway level crossing also contributes to
H04 023 problems in Huntly as it adds to delays to {0SH}1 traffic at the
H04 024 Raynors Road intersection. ^Although the present number of train
H04 025 movements is relatively low (about six shunting services per week day
H04 026 Monday to Friday) the crossing creates delays of four to six minutes
H04 027 each train movement.
H04 028    |^The branch line creates further problems with its dissecting
H04 029 effect on the Huntly west residential area. ^It passes very close to
H04 030 the local shopping centre and divides housing areas requiring a large
H04 031 number of pedestrians to use the railway reserves for access to homes,
H04 032 schools, shops and recreation reserves. ^Increased use of the line
H04 033 will therefore affect public safety as well as compound the problem of
H04 034 delays to road users.
H04 035    |^Another potential problem in the region concerns a possible new
H04 036 coal haulage route from Maramarua mine to the proposed North Island
H04 037 Thermal 1 power station at Clune Road. ^A previous study on the
H04 038 transport of coal to Clune Road (reference 2) identifies road and rail
H04 039 haulage as being the most economic transport option for this situation
H04 040 with conveyor and aerial ropeway systems being closely competitive.
H04 041 ^The most direct haulage route from the mine to the power station site
H04 042 passes very close to Meremere but has the potential to create
H04 043 environmental and social problems in the township. ^An alternative
H04 044 route 3 to 4 \0km to the south would be less disruptive but may
H04 045 involve a larger capital outlay depending on the transport mode. ^If
H04 046 rail transport is adopted, the additional haulage distance in a route
H04 047 south of Meremere would be bridged by the existing {0NIMT} line and
H04 048 would involve similar capital commitment as the more direct route.
H04 049 ^Road haulage on the other hand would require the construction of an
H04 050 additional 3 to 5 \0km length of road to accommodate the detour.
H04 051 ^Operating costs from Maramarua mine to Clune Road would be larger in
H04 052 both cases. ^In the case of a portion of the coal requirement being
H04 053 supplied by the Huntly coalfield, some of the increase in operating
H04 054 cost would be returned by a reduction in operating cost from Huntly.
H04 055    |^There is a general difficulty with increasing numbers of coal
H04 056 trucks using public roads in the area. ^These create increased delays
H04 057 and travel times, greater potential for accidents and greater effects
H04 058 on the environment.
H04 059 *<10.3 *3ADDITIONAL DEMANDS*>
H04 060    |^*0The study indicates that the most significant additional
H04 061 demands likely to be placed on the transport infrastructure in the
H04 062 lower Waikato region will be brought about by coal movements as
H04 063 follows:
H04 064 _| *- ^Coal production from the Rotowaro mines and transported north
H04 065 by rail is expected to increase seven-fold by 1991/ 92. ^Delays to
H04 066 {0SH}1 users in Huntly at the Rotowaro branch level crossing are
H04 067 expected to increase in duration and their frequency is expected to
H04 068 double.
H04 069 | *- ^New coal washing and preparation plants in the area complicate
H04 070 the prediction of points of impact caused by coal transport, as the
H04 071 location of such plants is not yet finalised. ^It is clear that a
H04 072 large centralised plant would place significant demands on the
H04 073 transport system as the plant would also act as a coal distribution
H04 074 centre and would require high capacity transport links to and from
H04 075 mining developments and the {0NIMT} line. ^A series of small mine
H04 076 dedicated plants would have a lesser effect.
H04 077 | *- ^Coal from a new Maramarua mine to supply the proposed 500 \0MW
H04 078 North Island Thermal 1 power station will require a new coal transport
H04 079 link from Maramarua to Clune Road to transport the necessary 920 000
H04 080 {0tpa}.
H04 081 | *- ^Approximately 300 000 {0tpa} may require transport from
H04 082 Maramarua, crossing the Waikato River, to the Huntly power station
H04 083 from 1989, but is dependent on the success of the bid by Electricity
H04 084 Division to increase its current gas take.
H04 085 | *- ^Approximately 500 000 {0tpa} will require transport across the
H04 086 Waikato River from the proposed Huntly West 2 mine around the turn of
H04 087 the century.
H04 088 |^Other coal production in the Waikato is not expected to inflict any
H04 089 significant problems on the existing transport infrastructure although
H04 090 some new or upgraded links to the {0NIMT} line or {0SH}1 may be
H04 091 required.
H04 092    |^The construction of the proposed 500 \0MW North Island Thermal
H04 093 1 power station will place additional demands on the existing
H04 094 transport infrastructure through the movements of construction
H04 095 materials and workforce. ^The main impacts will be at the intersection
H04 096 of {0SH}1 and the access road to the development, and on the access
H04 097 road itself. ^Provision of a class *=I sealed road from {0SH}1 to the
H04 098 development and a suitable intersection with {0SH}1 would minimise any
H04 099 detrimental affects to road users. ^Other impacts are expected to be
H04 100 similar to those associated with normal industrial enterprises and can
H04 101 be catered for within the existing infrastructure.
H04 102 *<10.4 *3FLEXIBILITY*>
H04 103    |^*0The coal transport system to serve the Lower Waikato region
H04 104 must be highly flexible to cater for changes in the planned coal
H04 105 demand and coal source. ^Such variations are evident when viewing
H04 106 changes in the planned coal supply to New Zealand Steel, as shown in
H04 107 table 18 and documented in previous energy plans.
H04 108 **[TABLE**]
H04 109    |^Factors which may influence the actual coal allocation in the
H04 110 future to that planned include:
H04 111 _| *- the success of longwall mining;
H04 112 | *- further delays at the East and West 1 mines;
H04 113 | *- short term fluctuations in mine output from individual mines
H04 114 because of unforeseen mining difficulties;
H04 115 | *- the success of the proposed West 2 and Ohinewai mines;
H04 116 | *- the possible expansion of the proposed North Island Thermal 1
H04 117 power station to 1000 \0MW;
H04 118 | *- the possibility of Electricity Division increasing its current
H04 119 gas take;
H04 120 | *- the occurrence of a dry year when it may be necessary to
H04 121 significantly increase production at the Maramarua and Rotowaro mines
H04 122 to meet the additional demand for thermal electricity generation over
H04 123 hydro generation.
H04 124 *<10.5 *3PREFERRED TRANSPORT MODES*>
H04 125    |^*0Existing coal transport by road on {0SH}1 is not in itself a
H04 126 problem. ^There are problem areas however which would be exacerbated
H04 127 by a significant increase in coal haulage by road. ^These problems
H04 128 include the effects on:
H04 129 _| *- other public road users, including delays or an increase in
H04 130 travel time, a level of frustration or inconvenience from reduced
H04 131 overtaking opportunities, reduced visibility and safety with a
H04 132 potential increase in the accident rate;
H04 133 | *- townships such as Huntly where traffic congestion is already a
H04 134 problem and improvements are difficult;
H04 135 | *- county road intersections;
H04 136 | *- land uses adjacent to highways with operational effects of noise,
H04 137 vibration, dust and fumes.
H04 138 |^Generally the operation of the {0NIMT} line causes few problems and
H04 139 an increase in coal transport on the line would have limited adverse
H04 140 effect.
H04 141    |^Conveyor and aerial ropeway transport modes generally have a
H04 142 lesser effect on the environment than road or rail but have a
H04 143 considerable disadvantage over these in that they are not nearly as
H04 144 flexible to cater for inevitable changes in the planned coal supply
H04 145 and demand.
H04 146    |^These points suggest that the existing rail system through the
H04 147 region should form the backbone of the coal transport infrastructure
H04 148 in the lower Waikato. ^Transport links to and from the {0NIMT} line
H04 149 may be either private roads or rail for flexibility, or perhaps
H04 150 conveyor where the barrier effect and operating effects of road or
H04 151 rail warrant an alternative, if more costly, system.
H04 152 *<10.6 *3OPTIONS FOR LINKS*>
H04 153    |^*0Options for transport links from energy developments to the
H04 154 {0NIMT} line are discussed in section 9 of this report. ^A decision to
H04 155 provide a new or upgraded link is generally dependent on the potential
H04 156 transport cost benefits to be obtained from the link. ^The two most
H04 157 important options in the region are the Maramarua mine-{0NIMT}
H04 158 line-Clune Road link and the Rotowaro mines-West 1 mine to the {0NIMT}
H04 159 line link.
H04 160    |^The Maramarua mine-Clune Road link is essential with the
H04 161 construction of the North Island Thermal 1 power station. ^Both road
H04 162 and rail transport modes are feasible with each having particular
H04 163 advantages over the other in different circumstances. ^For example,
H04 164 road is more flexible than rail and is more suited for ash transport
H04 165 if required. ^Road from the mine has the additional advantage over
H04 166 rail of being more suited for use by private coal mining companies as
H04 167 the tonnage of coal supplied to any one customer is usually small. ^On
H04 168 the other hand, rail has the advantage of lesser environmental and
H04 169 operating effects since coal units are larger and hence less frequent.
H04 170 ^The use of a combined mode system incorporating a conveyor
H04 171 constructed below ground in environmentally sensitive areas should not
H04 172 be ruled out of consideration.
H04 173    |^The other option incorporating a bridge north of Huntly is not
H04 174 essential in terms of transport cost considerations at this time and
H04 175 is likely to result only as a consequence of significant energy
H04 176 developments in the area. ^It would, however, have considerable
H04 177 advantages for the region at any time, particularly in Huntly
H04 178 township. ^In this regard it is appropriate to consider the
H04 179 significant impact energy developments have on the region and the
H04 180 resulting obligation developers have to the community to consider
H04 181 social and environmental issues and political sensitivity as well as
H04 182 strict economic criteria in assessing peripheral activities such as
H04 183 coal distribution. ^It is recommended that, if constructed, the bridge
H04 184 be used to complete a rail link from the Rotowaro and West 1 mines to
H04 185 the {0NIMT} line. ^It may, as well, be feasible to construct the
H04 186 bridge to a sufficient width to allow also the passage of overloads
H04 187 associated with mining development by road.
H04 188    |^In assessing the costs of a bridge to the north further
H04 189 consideration should be given to the option of replacing the existing
H04 190 construction bridge as a number of measures will need to be taken to
H04 191 upgrade it to the standard of a permanent bridge.
H04 192 _|(a) ^Both the western and eastern bridge approaches would have to be
H04 193 realigned and upgraded.
H04 194 |(b) ^The bridge itself needs to be raised to comply with navigational
H04 195 clearance restrictions.
H04 196 |(c) ^The bridge deck may need to be widened so that two lanes of
H04 197 trucks can pass without delays.
H04 198 |(d) ^The longitudinal seismic restraint should be improved by
H04 199 incorporating lead/ rubber dissipators at the piers or by attaching a
H04 200 friction slab at one end of the bridge.
H04 201    |^The benefits accruing from the construction of a bridge north
H04 202 of Huntly can be costed and compared to the cost of either upgrading
H04 203 the existing construction bridge or constructing an entirely new
H04 204 bridge. ^Such benefits include the following:
H04 205 _| *- ^The need to transport coal through Huntly township by rail
H04 206 would be removed.
H04 207 | *- ^Delays and accidents in Huntly would be reduced.
H04 208 | *- ^The barrier effect of the railway in the Huntly West residential
H04 209 areas could be removed.
H04 210 | *- ^A reduction in congestion towards the southern end of the {0CBA}
H04 211 would provide some room for {0CBA} development.
H04 212 | *- ^All mines, with the possible exception of the Maramarua mine,
H04 213 would be linked by rail which means a drop in supply from one mine can
H04 214 readily be compensated for by an increase in supply from other mines.
H04 215 *#
H05 001 **[269 TEXT H05**]
H05 002    |^*0The establishment of a framework for closer and more regular
H05 003 South Pacific cooperation on wider trade policy issues should enable
H05 004 New Zealand, and the other South Pacific countries, to participate
H05 005 more effectively in organisations and groupings established to
H05 006 encourage economic and trade expansion in the Pacific Basin at large.
H05 007    |^As a region, the Pacific Basin has shown remarkable economic
H05 008 vitality and confidence in an era characterised by uncertainty and
H05 009 slow growth through much of the industrialised world. ^The contrast
H05 010 has prompted some commentators to declare that the twenty-first
H05 011 century will be dominated by the economies of the Pacific Basin. ^The
H05 012 performance already achieved and the sense of expectation created has
H05 013 produced an awareness of common economic interests *- though this is
H05 014 by no means unqualified or all-embracing *- and a number of
H05 015 organisations and initiatives have emerged aimed at promoting
H05 016 cooperation and economic prosperity in the region.
H05 017    |^It is not intended here to discuss regionally defined groupings
H05 018 within the wider Pacific Basin *- such as the Association of South
H05 019 East Asian Nations ({0ASEAN}) or the Latin American Integration
H05 020 Association ({0LAIA}) *- beyond noting the benefits they can have in
H05 021 promoting a community of interest and encouraging competitiveness,
H05 022 economic cooperation and trade. ^Nor do we discuss {0ESCAP} (Economic
H05 023 and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific), the {0UN} regional
H05 024 organisation, whose membership extends far beyond the Pacific rim to
H05 025 include the whole of Asia. ^Recent years have seen the emergence of a
H05 026 number of groupings that are less geographically specific whose
H05 027 membership, constitution and precise orientation vary, but which share
H05 028 the general objective of advancing the economic welfare of the Pacific
H05 029 Basin region. ^The following are particularly worthy of note.
H05 030 *<*4Pacific Basin Economic Council ({0PBEC})*>
H05 031    |^*0{0PBEC} is an international organisation of private sector
H05 032 representatives in the Pacific Basin. ^It originated in 1967 with
H05 033 representation from Australia, Canada, Japan and the United States, as
H05 034 well as New Zealand. ^Participation has since extended to include
H05 035 Korea, Taiwan, Hong Kong, the {0ASEAN} region and South America.
H05 036 ^While operating under private auspices, {0PBEC} maintains liaison
H05 037 with governments and international agencies.
H05 038    |^{0PBEC}'s basic purpose is to foster mutually beneficial
H05 039 economic cooperation and social progress throughout the Pacific
H05 040 Region. ^It strives to improve the business environment, strengthen
H05 041 business enterprise, create new business relationships and
H05 042 opportunities, and increase trade and investment in the Pacific Basin.
H05 043 ^It pursues these objectives by exchange of views among business
H05 044 people; it provides advice to governments and international agencies
H05 045 on basic economic and business matters affecting the Pacific Basin;
H05 046 and it provides private sector input into other organisations
H05 047 concerned with Pacific development and cooperation.
H05 048    |^The value of {0PBEC} derives largely from its success in
H05 049 attracting the active participation of persons of high standing in
H05 050 manufacturing, agriculture, banking, insurance, shipping and other
H05 051 industries. ^Its papers and reports thus encompass a wide range of
H05 052 business activity. ^Its importance can only increase with the growing
H05 053 participation of representatives of the developing countries of the
H05 054 region.
H05 055 *<*4Pacific Economic Cooperation Conference {0PEC(C)}*>
H05 056    |^*0The distinctive characteristic of {0PEC} is that it operates
H05 057 on tripartite basis with participants including academics, officials
H05 058 participating as individuals rather than delegates of their
H05 059 governments, and private sector representatives. ^In some countries
H05 060 elected parliamentarians also participate. ^The {0PEC} process (it is
H05 061 not an organisation as such) was launched in Canberra in 1980 and has
H05 062 gained strength and momentum since with subsequent conferences at
H05 063 Bangkok, Bali and Seoul (in 1985).
H05 064    |^The pattern of representation at {0PEC} meetings is widening to
H05 065 include countries in most parts of the Pacific Basin. ^There is no
H05 066 permanent secretariat but there is an international standing committee
H05 067 on which New Zealand is represented by the {0Rt Hon} Brian Talboys.
H05 068 ^Participating countries also have their own national committees which
H05 069 are representative of all participating sectors. ^Five task forces
H05 070 have been set up to undertake work relevant to the region in:
H05 071 _| *?31 Agriculture and renewable resources;
H05 072 | *?31 Minerals and energy;
H05 073 | *?31 Manufactured goods and international trade negotiations;
H05 074 | *?31 Investment and technology transfer; and
H05 075 | *?31 Capital flows.
H05 076    |^These task forces have set in train their own research projects
H05 077 and meetings. ^New Zealand has participated most actively (but not
H05 078 exclusively) in the Agriculture/ Renewable Resources and the
H05 079 Manufactured Goods/ Trade Negotiations task forces. ^Under the former,
H05 080 New Zealand is taking the lead on a comparative study project on
H05 081 livestock industries in the participating countries; under the latter
H05 082 New Zealand has been active in encouraging work on developing mutual
H05 083 understanding on priorities for negotiation in a New Round of {0MTN}s,
H05 084 emphasising the need that these deal effectively with agricultural
H05 085 trade. ^That was clearly registered at the first Pacific Trade Policy
H05 086 Forum, convened by the {0PEC} in San Francisco in March 1986.
H05 087    |^That the {0PEC} process has, in so short a time, succeeded in
H05 088 focusing high-level concerted regional attention on some key issues in
H05 089 economic development and trade policy is due largely to the tripartite
H05 090 formula that brings together the research capability of academia with
H05 091 the business expertise of the private sector and the economic and
H05 092 trade policy experience of officials.
H05 093 *<*4Regional Meeting of Senior Trade Officials (*"Hawke
H05 094 Initiative**")*>
H05 095    |^*0Commencing in Denpasar, Indonesia, early in 1984, a series of
H05 096 meetings of senior trade officials of a number of countries of the
H05 097 Western Pacific region have been held to explore the scope for
H05 098 cooperation on multilateral trade issues. ^The process was prompted by
H05 099 the Australian Prime Minister in a speech he delivered in Thailand in
H05 100 1983. ^In it he foreshadowed the possible need, should attempts to
H05 101 secure major international trade reforms through joint action of
H05 102 {0GATT} Contracting Parties fail, for countries of the region to
H05 103 establish a programme of liberalisation designed particularly to
H05 104 benefit the countries of the region (though liberalisation would be
H05 105 applied to all trading partners on an {0MFN} basis). ^As a prior step,
H05 106 however, \0Mr Hawke suggested that regional trade officials seek to
H05 107 reach agreement on the priorities for a New {0GATT} Round and work
H05 108 together for its success.
H05 109    |^In addition to Australia and New Zealand, the {0ASEAN}
H05 110 countries, Japan and Korea have participated in the meetings held to
H05 111 date. ^Even this short list of participants includes countries that
H05 112 are very diverse in their stages of economic development and their
H05 113 major international trade interests. ^The earliest meetings served to
H05 114 accustom the participants to discussing the scope for cooperation and
H05 115 to highlight the range of their priorities, although some participants
H05 116 were still somewhat hesitant about the benefit of a New {0GATT} Round.
H05 117 ^By the third meeting, held late in 1985 in Seoul, there was a
H05 118 consensus on the principle of mutual support and informal agreement
H05 119 that Geneva representatives of the participants would meet
H05 120 periodically to discuss their approach to the proposed New Round. ^At
H05 121 the latest meeting in Manila in September 1986, the countries affirmed
H05 122 their interest in the New Round and pledged to continue their
H05 123 consultations as it progressed.
H05 124 *<*4{0ASEAN} Dialogue*>
H05 125    |^*0While {0ASEAN}'s membership is limited to six south-east Asian
H05 126 nations it has established a valuable dialogue with the developed
H05 127 countries of the Pacific Basin (and also with the European Community).
H05 128 ^This dialogue involves periodic meetings between {0ASEAN}
H05 129 representatives and individual dialogue partners (including New
H05 130 Zealand). ^But in addition, following an annual meeting of {0ASEAN}
H05 131 foreign ministers, they hold a *"Post Ministerial Conference**" with
H05 132 ministerial delegations from all the dialogue partners. ^There is a
H05 133 joint session, with all the delegations attending, and individual
H05 134 sessions with each partner. ^The dialogue encompasses political and
H05 135 broad economic issues as well as trade. ^Like the other groupings
H05 136 mentioned above, it encourages the participants to identify common
H05 137 interests and to view issues from a regional standpoint.
H05 138 *<*4The Commonwealth Dimension*>
H05 139    |^*0Membership of the Commonwealth, shared by a number of
H05 140 countries in the Asia Pacific region, adds a further strand to the
H05 141 fabric of mutual understanding and also provides a link between the
H05 142 region and the countries of South Asia. ^It has helped encourage the
H05 143 Commonwealth as a whole to focus on the development and economic needs
H05 144 of the region and, with the cooperation of the Commonwealth
H05 145 Secretariat, a Commonwealth Regional Consultative Group on Trade
H05 146 ({0CRCGT}) has met on a number of occasions to consider regional trade
H05 147 issues and projects that could assist countries in the region.
H05 148 *<*4Business Councils*>
H05 149    |^*0Finally, reference should be made to business councils which
H05 150 bring New Zealand private sector representatives together with their
H05 151 counterparts in several individual countries in the region and which
H05 152 may consider specific possibilities for developing bilateral trade as
H05 153 well as more general issues. ^These usefully complement
H05 154 intergovernmental meetings and the participants are frequently able to
H05 155 provide valuable briefing and advice to their Governments.
H05 156 *<*4Promoting Mutual Support*>
H05 157    |^*0The dialogue and consultation that has developed in the region
H05 158 has undoubtedly increased mutual understanding among those
H05 159 participating. ^By promoting an awareness of shared interests it
H05 160 contributes to regional security. ^As mutual understanding grows so
H05 161 does an acceptance of the principle of mutual support in wider issues
H05 162 (as mentioned above in the discussion of the Hawke initiative).
H05 163    |^Increased mutual understanding should encourage individual
H05 164 countries in the region to consider the interests of regional partners
H05 165 in the process of economic policy-making. ^It is, of course, a long
H05 166 way from the level of dialogue and consultation existing today to
H05 167 substantial economic integration of the kind seen, for instance, in
H05 168 the European Common Market. ^That stage is not even reached within the
H05 169 limited membership of {0ASEAN} or {0CER}. ^But we should be reaching
H05 170 the stage where a country in the region, before taking some major
H05 171 economic decision, would ask itself if that decision would be harmful
H05 172 to a regional neighbour. ^If the answer was affirmative, the next
H05 173 questions would be whether that decision was really in the country's
H05 174 own long-term interest; and whether there was not an alternative that
H05 175 made better use of the economic resources of the region without
H05 176 disadvantaging itself or its regional neighbours.
H05 177    |^An example will illustrate the point. ^Successive New Zealand
H05 178 Governments have received proposals from groups wishing to establish
H05 179 beet-sugar industries. ^The proponents have sought the assurance
H05 180 either that a certain proportion of the New Zealand sugar market would
H05 181 be reserved for domestic production or that some form of frontier
H05 182 protection would be provided so that local production would not have
H05 183 to compete with imports below a certain price level. ^There are,
H05 184 however, many efficient cane sugar producers in the region, including
H05 185 Australia and Fiji. ^Accordingly, successive New Zealand Governments
H05 186 have always declined to promise such protection. ^New Zealand's total
H05 187 sugar requirement continues to be imported, to the benefit of our
H05 188 Pacific regional partners, while resources in New Zealand are not
H05 189 invested in a crop in which we would not enjoy comparative advantage.
H05 190    |^For the same reason New Zealand does not appear likely to become
H05 191 a significant producer of tea or rice although there is nothing to
H05 192 inhibit this other than the test of international competitiveness and
H05 193 commercial judgement. ^New Zealand considers the region would benefit
H05 194 if other countries were to adopt the same criteria of optimising
H05 195 resource utilisation, and regard for interests of regional neighbours
H05 196 will influence decisions of other Pacific Basin countries when they
H05 197 consider agricultural and other economic development policies.
H05 198    |^The trend to consultation and cooperation on trade matters in
H05 199 the Pacific Basin is beneficial and should be encouraged. ^In time it
H05 200 might lead to new formal links or institutions. ^But this prospect has
H05 201 to be approached with caution. ^It is complicated by the great
H05 202 diversity of Pacific Basin countries. ^Existing participation in the
H05 203 different regional groupings varies. ^Some countries may choose not to
H05 204 attend because of different priorities. ^Others, for instance some of
H05 205 the Pacific Island states, simply do not have the resources to
H05 206 participate actively in wider Pacific Basin activities.
H05 207    |^Some members of existing groupings are apprehensive about
H05 208 extending membership to certain other Pacific Basin countries whether
H05 209 because of major differences in their political or economic systems,
H05 210 or because of a concern that the economic strength of some would
H05 211 result in their dominating or changing the balance of the grouping.
H05 212    |^In promoting Pacific Basin trade and economic cooperation New
H05 213 Zealand has to recognise and respect the different views and
H05 214 perspectives of its various partners. ^Progress is occurring, but it
H05 215 requires patience and realism.
H05 216 *#
H06 001 **[270 TEXT H06**]
H06 002 |7.1.5
H06 003 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 004 ^*0Complainants and witnesses need to wade their way through masses of
H06 005 defendants and their associates in witness rooms and corridors in the
H06 006 court building. ^The complainant or witnesses are subjected to
H06 007 antagonistic glances, gestures, aggressive stances and salutes. ^This
H06 008 is particularly so when gang members are defendants. ^It seems a
H06 009 tradition that as many gang members as possible crowd the court to
H06 010 lend support or encouragement to the defendant. ^Complainants and
H06 011 witnesses should not be subjected to this type of behaviour. ^Separate
H06 012 facilities must be provided for complainants and witnesses, away from
H06 013 defendants and associates, and we so recommend.
H06 014 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 015 |7.1.6
H06 016 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 017 ^Gangs use intimidation as a means of preventing justice from taking
H06 018 its course and are able to achieve this with relative ease. ^Their
H06 019 strength lies in their numbers and the collective power that such
H06 020 numbers can generate. ^It is now almost inevitable that when a crime
H06 021 is committed by a gang member and an arrest follows then there is
H06 022 great difficulty in obtaining the co-operation and evidence from
H06 023 witnesses. ^They fear retribution and this is becoming commonplace.
H06 024 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 025 |7.1.7
H06 026 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 027 ^It has become increasingly necessary to give witnesses protection to
H06 028 ensure their safety and welfare in order that they can give evidence
H06 029 at a Court hearing. ^Police protection is necessary to counter the
H06 030 endeavours of the criminal fraternity to thwart the legitimate means
H06 031 of introducing that witness's evidence.
H06 032 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 033 |7.1.8
H06 034 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 035 ^The criminal fraternity has the influence, power, capability and
H06 036 resources to intimidate, coerce or prevent witnesses either from
H06 037 coming forward or actually giving evidence.
H06 038 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 039 |7.1.9
H06 040 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 041 ^This trend has surfaced over the last ten years and especially over
H06 042 the last five *- so much so that a special confidential Police policy
H06 043 has been designed and put in place to deal with a whole host of
H06 044 complex issues that arise when a witness has to be protected. ^It is
H06 045 absolutely clear that when witnesses are in actual or potential danger
H06 046 or members of their family are in actual or potential danger, it is
H06 047 incumbent on the Police to provide them with some form of protection.
H06 048 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 049 |7.1.10
H06 050 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 051 ^There are new types of criminals in New Zealand. ^They have access to
H06 052 money and means, and because they are professional criminals with a
H06 053 good rapport with other like-minded individuals, they have the ability
H06 054 to commit actual violence, intimidation and even murder *- that is the
H06 055 reality of the day.
H06 056 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 057 |7.1.11
H06 058 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 059 ^There have been cases within the last five years where witness
H06 060 protection has been mounted on the basis that the potential witness is
H06 061 not being protected from intimidation but from death.
H06 062 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 063 |7.1.12
H06 064 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 065 ^In the last three years the police have continually had witnesses
H06 066 under protection. ^These operations can last from a few days prior to
H06 067 a court hearing or go on for a number of years for more major
H06 068 operations. ^The operation doesn't start and end with a court hearing.
H06 069 ^It can start at the early stages of an initial investigation of a
H06 070 crime through the trials, appeals and then the relocation of the
H06 071 witness at the conclusion of the judicial process. ^The smallness of
H06 072 New Zealand compels witnesses to be protected in outside districts and
H06 073 in some cases outside of the country *- at great cost.
H06 074 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 075 |7.1.13
H06 076 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 077 ^One recent witness protection operation ran for over two years,
H06 078 requiring an input of some 8022 man hours (the equivalent of one man
H06 079 continually employed for 3.9 years) at a cost of *+$37,000 (this cost
H06 080 is exclusive of Police salaries). ^Witness protection operations are
H06 081 extremely complex, demanding on resources both in time and manpower
H06 082 and require an enormous financial input.
H06 083 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 084 |7.1.14
H06 085 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 086 ^Witness protection operations are now a significant aspect of police
H06 087 work which was not planned for or envisaged years ago. ^The present
H06 088 forecast is that the requirement for witness protection operations
H06 089 will significantly increase.
H06 090 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 091 |7.1.15
H06 092 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 093 ^A new trend has emerged which is a follow-on from witness protection.
H06 094 ^It is the need to protect juries. ^This is not uncommon overseas but
H06 095 was necessary for the first time in New Zealand in Auckland during
H06 096 this year. ^Because of threats made to the jury, a Police operation
H06 097 was mounted to provide security and protection for the jury. ^It is
H06 098 anticipated that the next development will be operations to protect
H06 099 the judiciary.
H06 100 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 101 |7.1.16
H06 102 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 103 ^Attached as Appendix *'D**' are incidents of intimidation from a
H06 104 random survey of the Northland area. ^Appendix *'D1**' is a further
H06 105 example of serious intimidation which occurred in a recent homicide
H06 106 case.
H06 107 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 108 *<*7CHAPTER EIGHT*>
H06 109 *<*08 *7OTHER MAJOR PROBLEMS FACING SOCIETY*>
H06 110 *<*08.1 *6THE YOUTH OF TODAY*>
H06 111 |*08.1.1
H06 112 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 113 ^It is a fact that our offenders are not only getting younger but they
H06 114 are increasing in number and their behaviour is also more violent.
H06 115 ^Society must address the problem.
H06 116 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 117 |8.1.2
H06 118 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 119 ^The Children and Young Persons Act *- except in cases of murder and
H06 120 manslaughter ensures that nothing in the way of punishment or
H06 121 *'jolt**' happens to a young offender before he or she is 14 years of
H06 122 age and even then such *'penalty**' is hardly preventive.
H06 123 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 124 |8.1.3
H06 125 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 126 ^Even if the under 14 year old is caught while offending, or shortly
H06 127 afterwards, he soon realises that nothing will happen to him because
H06 128 the *'system**' ensures it, and again as any parent would realise,
H06 129 even very young children can reason. ^These offenders now boast to
H06 130 police, even in the cells for detoxification, that police can do
H06 131 nothing with them. ^This is most demoralising to Police staff who
H06 132 endeavour to protect society from these young offenders.
H06 133 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 134 *<8.2 *6UNSUPERVISED YOUNG PEOPLE*>
H06 135 |*08.2.1
H06 136 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 137 ^Hand in hand with the phenomenon of juvenile offending is the problem
H06 138 of unsupervised young people, namely street kids. ^These are children
H06 139 who for various reasons opt not to stay at home but instead gather in
H06 140 groups, sleep out, avoid school and generally roam the locality
H06 141 committing crime to sustain themselves. ^Within the group situation
H06 142 they become brazen and despite their youth will often violently attack
H06 143 persons to steal or to protect each other from apprehension.
H06 144 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 145 |8.2.2
H06 146 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 147 ^The appearance of *'street kids**' is more prevalent over the summer
H06 148 months. ^There is a strong feeling among police staff that firmer
H06 149 action should be taken to remove such children from that environment
H06 150 if their parents are unable or unwilling to control them at home. ^It
H06 151 is evident that social welfare officers are reluctant to deprive
H06 152 parents of their children, but it is felt that it is in the interests
H06 153 of the community as a whole that children who run wild should be
H06 154 placed in situations where controls can be imposed upon them and their
H06 155 educational needs satisfied.
H06 156 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 157 *<8.3 *6STREET OFFENCES*>
H06 158 |*08.3.1
H06 159 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 160 ^In recent years there has been increasing calls for the removal of
H06 161 some minor street offences from the statute books. ^These calls must
H06 162 be resisted. ^In dealing with street incidents police are increasingly
H06 163 confronted with situations which if allowed to continue would result
H06 164 in violence. ^It is a fact that this type of conduct is often the
H06 165 catalyst sparking off violent incidents. ^However by the early
H06 166 intervention and removal of participants from the street, the danger
H06 167 is eliminated.
H06 168 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 169 *<8.4 *6HOME ENVIRONMENT*>
H06 170 |*08.4.1
H06 171 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 172 ^The home environment is the place where any child is first exposed to
H06 173 the influences which will govern his or her future behaviour and
H06 174 tendencies towards violence. ^This affects their ability to cope with
H06 175 society as a whole. ^Some of the factors which will have influence on
H06 176 the child are:
H06 177 _|(a)Parents' acceptance of the child at birth.
H06 178 |(b)Lack of parental affection.
H06 179 |(c)Lack of parental training or skills in dealing with infants.
H06 180 |(d)Stress within the family resulting from:
H06 181 **[BEGIN INDENTATION TWO**]
H06 182 _| *- indadequate housing;
H06 183 | *- lack of finance;
H06 184 | *- unemployment;
H06 185 | *- necessity for both parents to work.
H06 186 **[END INDENTATION TWO**]
H06 187 |(e)Alcoholic condition of parent(s).
H06 188 |(f)Violence or conflict between parents.
H06 189 |(g)Violence between parent and child.
H06 190 |(h)No clear guidelines laid down for child.
H06 191 |(i)Parental attitude towards authority and law breaking.
H06 192 |(j)Broken marriages and single parenting.
H06 193 |(k)Multiple relationships by parent having custody of child.
H06 194 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 195 |8.4.2
H06 196 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 197 ^These factors will manifest themselves in the child by the time he or
H06 198 she reaches school age. ^This may result in children who have:
H06 199 _|(a)Aggressive attitudes towards teachers and fellow pupils.
H06 200 |(b)Disruptive, attention-seeking behaviour.
H06 201 |(c)Inability to relate to others.
H06 202 |(d)Lack of self discipline.
H06 203 |(e)Lack of respect for persons or property.
H06 204 |(f)Lack of respect for authority.
H06 205 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 206 |8.4.3
H06 207 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 208 ^If the home environment has been inadequate, it is now the teachers
H06 209 who must face up to the problem which confronts them. ^If they fail to
H06 210 redirect and properly influence the child, his or her behaviour
H06 211 pattern will be set for the future and it is highly unlikely that he
H06 212 or she will respond to future authority or guidance, especially once
H06 213 adolescence is reached. ^Early influences will dictate the propensity
H06 214 for the child to use violence or take part in anti-social behaviour.
H06 215 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 216 |8.4.4
H06 217 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 218 ^The discipline taught in school has a very important part to play in
H06 219 the life of a child who has not received correct parental guidance at
H06 220 an earlier stage. ^Children (and in fact everyone) should be taught to
H06 221 accept responsibility for their own actions.
H06 222 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 223 |8.4.5
H06 224 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 225 ^Emphasis must be placed on and allowances made for the slow, the
H06 226 backward, the late developer, the child at risk, and the non-achiever.
H06 227 ^This should not be to the detriment of the child who is able to cope.
H06 228 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 229 *<8.5 *6DOMESTIC VIOLENCE*>
H06 230 |*08.5.1
H06 231 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 232 ^The 1985 Crime Statistics show a 3.2% rise in the number of reported
H06 233 domestic disputes attended by police. ^In 1985, police were called to
H06 234 18221 such incidents compared with 17647 in 1984.
H06 235 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 236 |8.5.2
H06 237 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 238 ^Violent domestic disputes most often occur between family members and
H06 239 most of the domestic disputes attended by the Police involve violence
H06 240 or threats of violence. ^In 1985 reported serious domestic assaults
H06 241 under the Crimes Act numbered 218 (1984 *- 192) although minor
H06 242 domestic assaults were down from 1725 in 1984 to 1527 for 1985. ^As
H06 243 stated in Chapter One, it is estimated that fewer than 3% of all
H06 244 domestic assaults are actually reported to the police.
H06 245 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 246 |8.5.3
H06 247 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 248 ^Most women reporting domestic violence are living in an unstable
H06 249 relationship; have dependant children; are in the lower socio-economic
H06 250 groups and don't have support from outside the home. ^Their spouse or
H06 251 partners are in low status jobs or are unemployed and consume alcohol
H06 252 on a regular basis.
H06 253 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 254 |8.5.4
H06 255 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 256 ^Ethnic differences can also conceal violence when custom dictates
H06 257 that an outside authority is not called on to mediate even when there
H06 258 is considerable violence involved.
H06 259 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 260 |8.5.5
H06 261 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 262 ^It is evident that domestic violence is on the increase. ^Many of the
H06 263 large number of homicides arise out of domestic situations. ^In 1985
H06 264 there were 25 homicides involving domestic violence. ^Section 5 of the
H06 265 Evidence Act 1908 relating to competency and compellability of a wife
H06 266 against her husband (or vice versa) needs amending to allow the
H06 267 husband or wife to be competent and compellable for the prosecution in
H06 268 cases of murder and manslaughter. ^A number of cases can be quoted
H06 269 when a wife has been an eye witness to a murder (in two cases, of her
H06 270 children and in another of a person she was having a relationship
H06 271 with), yet she has not been able to give evidence of the event,
H06 272 leaving a totally unrealistic case to present to the Jury. ^Invariably
H06 273 the only version the Jury hears is the accused's and this is usually
H06 274 exculpatory or self-serving and mostly appears a distortion of the
H06 275 truth. ^Hence, many such cases return a manslaughter verdict whereas
H06 276 the actual evidence available clearly justifies a verdict of murder.
H06 277 **[END INDENTATION**]
H06 278 |8.5.6
H06 279 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H06 280 ^The two major ingredients of domestic disputes are alcohol and
H06 281 jealousy. ^These situations will continue to get worse with the large
H06 282 number of broken marriages, an increase in de facto relationships and
H06 283 a more relaxed moral code.
H06 284 *#
H07 001 **[271 TEXT H07**]
H07 002    |*062 ^The Maori community had serious criticisms of the
H07 003 Department and its ability to deliver services which met their needs
H07 004 as consumers. ^While criticism varied from district to district, and
H07 005 some districts had made conspicuous efforts to meet the needs of Maori
H07 006 clients, problems were aired in almost every district we visited.
H07 007 **[BEGIN BOX**]
H07 008    |*"...*1when people come into the department we've already taken
H07 009 away a lot of their respect**".
H07 010    |*"...Social Welfare offices when we enter makes us feel as
H07 011 through we're criminals. ^That's for sure. ^The ones we've got behind
H07 012 the counters one look at their faces tells you, dumb Maoris coming in.
H07 013 ^Don't know how to fill the forms**".
H07 014    |*"...it's a pakeha bureaucratic system. ^It drives the average
H07 015 pakeha woman up the wall, so God knows what it would do for a Maori
H07 016 person who doesn't know very much about the pakeha way of working**".
H07 017    |*"^The decision and policy making power and control is
H07 018 concentrated in the hands of a few who are mainly white, middleclass
H07 019 and male**".
H07 020 **[END BOX**]
H07 021 *<The Interface with the Client*>
H07 022    |*063 ^People felt the Department's offices were unwelcoming and
H07 023 impersonal, lacked privacy and adequate soundproofing. ^Counters were
H07 024 seen as creating barriers between *"them**" and *"us**" and children
H07 025 were not catered for in waiting rooms. ^It was obvious to us that
H07 026 offices appeared to work better and were closer to the people they
H07 027 served where there were fewer than about 150 staff employed.
H07 028    |64 ^We heard constantly that counter staff were too young,
H07 029 inexperienced, insensitive, poorly trained and judgmental. ^People
H07 030 were frustrated by having to deal with staff who did not know
H07 031 sufficient about entitlement conditions for the appropriate benefits,
H07 032 seemed unaware of the trauma some of the clients might be in, and were
H07 033 ignorant of Maori view points or values.
H07 034    |65 ^It was suggested that training programmes should be designed
H07 035 to raise the level of awareness of Maori culture and should also
H07 036 incorporate training in personal skills and some knowledge of New
H07 037 Zealand history. ^A compelling need was for front-line staff to be
H07 038 fully aware of the range of assistance available and to have the
H07 039 authority to make decisions and give authoritative advice.
H07 040    |66 ^One of the major criticisms of the Department concerned the
H07 041 numbers of Maori people employed. ^People believed that more Maori
H07 042 people, particularly mature people well grounded in both Maori and
H07 043 Pakeha lifestyles were needed in both the front line and as decision
H07 044 makers. ^Maori staff often complained that they were used as window
H07 045 dressing and expected to share the knowledge of their culture whenever
H07 046 required without having this knowledge recognised as a work-related
H07 047 skill.
H07 048    |67 ^Because of the insistence on academic qualifications for many
H07 049 positions in the Department, Maori people saw this as effectively
H07 050 locking the gate against Maori applicants. ^People asked for
H07 051 qualifications to be interpreted broadly. ^Life experience, fluency in
H07 052 Maori language and ability to relate to another cultural group should
H07 053 be qualifications for certain positions. ^These skills should be
H07 054 recognised in classification, salary and grading.
H07 055    |68 ^We were also told that there is a need for a substantial
H07 056 review to assess the relevance of the academic approach in social work
H07 057 to the needs of the Department's clients and that it should be aimed
H07 058 at making the academic environment more hospitable to the sorts of
H07 059 qualities we were advised as being desirable.
H07 060    |69 ^People asked for more information about entitlements and
H07 061 services, written in language easily understood. ^They also asked for
H07 062 more Maori speakers at the interface to explain services to them and
H07 063 for people to be employed to help with form filling and to put clients
H07 064 at ease in unfamiliar surroundings. ^It was pointed out by many that
H07 065 forms were too complicated and that it would be helpful if documents
H07 066 were also presented in Maori.
H07 067 *<*1Social Work*>
H07 068 **[BEGIN BOX**]
H07 069    |*"^The social work education system of residential child care
H07 070 work which was imposed on the Maori people was based on the arrogant
H07 071 assumption that the culture of the Pakeha coloniser was far superior
H07 072 and preferable to the Maori and other Polynesian life style.**"
H07 073 **[END BOX**]
H07 074    |*070 ^In the area of social work, there were many calls for Maori
H07 075 people to do the work of the *"professional**" workers. ^Whereas
H07 076 community workers saw themselves as being on call 24 hours a day,
H07 077 social workers were seen by some to work for only the prescribed
H07 078 hours. ^The complaint was strong that valuable skills were often used
H07 079 but not paid for when volunteers or community workers were used as a
H07 080 cultural resource for dealing with Maori people.
H07 081    |71 ^The emphasis on the professionalism of social workers and
H07 082 their academic training was seen as discriminating against Maori
H07 083 people who were often qualified by life and culture to do the work
H07 084 more effectively.
H07 085    |72 ^Maori people complained that social work practices in regard
H07 086 to court procedures, adoption and family case work contributed to the
H07 087 breaking down of the whanau system and the traditional tribal
H07 088 responsibilities of the Maori lifestyle.
H07 089    |73 ^Departmental foster care was frequently seen as insisting on
H07 090 unrealistically high standards. ^This often resulted in children
H07 091 becoming dissatisfied with their own homes which could not provide the
H07 092 material and recreational standards to which they had become
H07 093 accustomed.
H07 094    |74 ^The area of fostering and adoption and the practice of
H07 095 confidentiality caused considerable concern. ^This not only denied the
H07 096 extended family its traditional rights but often resulted in a child
H07 097 being placed without any information about tribal identity being
H07 098 available for proper consideration. ^It was also stated that adoptive
H07 099 and foster parents were selected on the Pakeha basis of material
H07 100 values, while the ability of Maori applicants to bring up a child in
H07 101 its own whanau, surrounded by tribal aroha, was ignored.
H07 102    |75 ^The Maatua Whangai programme received a great deal of
H07 103 attention. ^The claims were that the programme is under-resourced. ^We
H07 104 deal with Maatua Whangai later on, but simply record the fact that
H07 105 great things are expected of the programme by the Maori people.
H07 106 *<*1Rural Services*>
H07 107 **[BEGIN BOX**]
H07 108    |*"^That's all I have stood up to say *- what is happening out in
H07 109 the rural areas. ^I'll put it to you, that there should be some
H07 110 changes there, to take into consideration what difficulties people in
H07 111 rural areas are going through. ^Especially when they have to report
H07 112 in. ^The distance involved in travelling to sort out these matters
H07 113 before they are able to get any money to get groceries and things that
H07 114 are necessary to live.**"
H07 115 **[END BOX**]
H07 116    |*076 ^In small areas, for example Ruatoria, Te Kaha, Kaitaia and
H07 117 the West Coast (South Island), people spoke of the costs of travelling
H07 118 and making telephone calls to apply for benefits or to make inquiries.
H07 119 ^In some cases, the cost of travel could almost equal the payment
H07 120 received. ^The requests were for more regular servicing visits, or for
H07 121 local agents to be appointed. ^The services most required locally were
H07 122 the payment of benefits and pensions, and social workers. ^People also
H07 123 asked for free toll calls to inquire about benefits and pensions to
H07 124 prevent the high charges incurred while Department staff located files
H07 125 and obtained decisions. ^Generally, rural clients felt they were
H07 126 disadvantaged compared with urban people.
H07 127 *<*6PART *=III *- OUR CONCLUSIONS*>
H07 128    |*077 ^A principal consumer of the Department of Social Welfare is
H07 129 Maori**[SIC**]; not on basis of population but on the basis that the
H07 130 operation of history has made Maori people dependent on the welfare
H07 131 system. ^The Committee views this as a negative achievement. ^Its
H07 132 recommendations therefore will deal with proposals for positive
H07 133 achievement, both in short-term initiatives and long-term strategy for
H07 134 re-building the basis of independent Maori society.
H07 135    |78 ^As we travelled around the country, the most consistent call
H07 136 we heard was for Maori people to be given the resources to control
H07 137 their own programmes. ^We have responded to this in ways that do not
H07 138 discriminate against people of any culture while enabling Maori people
H07 139 to share and to control where applicable the allocation of resources
H07 140 in communities.
H07 141    |79 ^We believe that, in reporting on a Maori perspective for the
H07 142 Department of Social Welfare, we are in fact reporting on needs which
H07 143 impact on all Government departments. ^A main thrust of our report is
H07 144 therefore to do with co-ordination of resources among departments and
H07 145 the transference of authority over the use of those resources closer
H07 146 to the consumer.
H07 147    |80 ^Our recommendations are based on the expectation that Maori
H07 148 people will respond by participating in the strengthening of their
H07 149 tribal networks. ^We believe that our recommendations will assist and
H07 150 encourage the re-emergence of Maori management systems with their
H07 151 special blending of spiritual and pragmatic values. ^We also believe
H07 152 the co-ordination of Maori and non-Maori systems offers an opportunity
H07 153 for this country to develop a unique social service delivery.
H07 154    |81 ^It is our view that the presence of racism in the Department
H07 155 is a reflection of racism which exists generally within the community.
H07 156 ^Institutional racism exists within the Department as it does
H07 157 generally through our national institutional structures. ^Its effects
H07 158 in this case are monocultural laws and administration in child and
H07 159 family welfare, social security or other departmental
H07 160 responsibilities. ^Whether or not intended, it gives rise to practices
H07 161 which are discriminatory against Maori people.
H07 162 *<*6CAPABILITY OF DEPARTMENT*>
H07 163 **[BEGIN BOX**]
H07 164    |*"^*1I see it as a department speaking from a level above the
H07 165 people, not able to reach down to the grass roots, where the people
H07 166 are at. ^If you cannot come down to the people how can you help them.
H07 167 ^I would like to suggest that the department open up its corridors to
H07 168 the Maori people.**"
H07 169    |*"^This hui was to discuss a Maori perspective for Social
H07 170 Welfare. ^When we had the panui for this hui, got very cynical about
H07 171 it, got very hoha about it because it is filling our guts and telling
H07 172 our concerns to deaf ears. ^People don't listen. ^I sit in there with
H07 173 people and I'm telling them what it's like for a Maori kid, they don't
H07 174 understand, they don't believe me. ^That's institutionalised
H07 175 racialism. ^What is racism. ^It's prejudice, inaction.**"
H07 176 **[END BOX**]
H07 177    |*082 ^We were asked to assess the current capability of the
H07 178 Department in relation to the declared goal. ^Taking into account all
H07 179 that we heard and our own observations and impressions, the
H07 180 inescapable conclusion of the Committee is that the Department of
H07 181 Social Welfare is not capable of meeting the goal without major
H07 182 changes in its policy, planning and service delivery. ^We expect,
H07 183 however, that its capability to make the necessary changes will be
H07 184 greatly enhanced by the initiatives advanced in the recommendations of
H07 185 this Committee.
H07 186    |83 ^The Committee finds that the staff in general are dedicated
H07 187 people, committed to working for the welfare aims of the Department.
H07 188 ^However, they have lacked the leadership and understanding to relate
H07 189 sensitively to their Maori clients.
H07 190    |84 ^The Committee regards change within the Department as
H07 191 essential if the kinds of problems identified to us by Maori people
H07 192 are to be overcome and if the Department is to relate to their
H07 193 specific needs.
H07 194    |85 ^The Department is in the process of changes designed to bring
H07 195 decision making and supportive mechanisms closer to the people it
H07 196 serves. ^Our recommendations can therefore be accommodated more
H07 197 quickly than might otherwise have been possible.
H07 198 *<*6GUIDING PRINCIPLES AND OBJECTIVES*>
H07 199    |*086 ^The Department has developed a Management Plan which
H07 200 includes in its statement of goals the following: *-
H07 201    |*"^*1To meet the particular needs of Maori people in policy,
H07 202 planning and service delivery while giving due attention to the needs
H07 203 of other ethnic minority groups.**"
H07 204    |*087 ^The Committee endorses the above, as a start for the
H07 205 Department, as a bi-cultural approach in a way that does not offend
H07 206 other cultural groups.
H07 207    |88 ^But for clients and staff, the Department requires a
H07 208 statement of guiding principles and goals that specifically exclude
H07 209 any racist interpretation. ^The wording of the new objective below
H07 210 explains racism very clearly. ^We believe that by leaving it in no
H07 211 doubt what is meant by racism, the dangers of cultural and
H07 212 institutional racism occurring in the Department will be minimised.
H07 213    |89 ^During our deliberations, we thought much about racism as it
H07 214 affects New Zealand society.
H07 215 *#
H08 001 **[272 TEXT H08**]
H08 002 *0^It was noted in section 4 that, *1per charge, *0Maori offenders
H08 003 were less likely to receive financial penalties including reparation;
H08 004 8% of charges involving Maori offenders received reparation compared
H08 005 with 10% of charges involving non-Maori offenders. ^However a
H08 006 comparison of offender's ethnicity per case shows that Maori offenders
H08 007 were slightly more likely than non-Maori offenders to receive a
H08 008 sentence of reparation; 12% of cases involving Maori offenders
H08 009 included a sentence of reparation compared with 11% of cases involving
H08 010 non-Maori offenders. ^This discrepancy is explained by non-Maori
H08 011 offenders having on average more charges per case that resulted in a
H08 012 sentence of reparation than Maori offenders.
H08 013    |^Of all charges, 4,714 (6%) resulted in a sentence of reparation.
H08 014 ^The majority of these charges (92%) were for offences against
H08 015 property as expected from the definition of this sentence. ^Of all
H08 016 charges for offences against property, 17% received reparation. ^The
H08 017 proportion of property charges for which reparation was the only
H08 018 sentence ordered was 3.2%; 819 charges out of a total of 25,412.
H08 019 ^Reparation was ordered for 89 offences against the person including
H08 020 63 for assault. ^There were 264 other offences, not against persons or
H08 021 property, which incurred reparation. ^These included 69 disorderly
H08 022 behaviour and similar offences, 41 careless or reckless driving
H08 023 offences and 69 offences against the Social Security Act. (^It is
H08 024 doubtful whether offences against the Social Security Act {0ie},
H08 025 certain categories of fraud, misleading a social welfare officer and
H08 026 making false statements, properly constitute offences where property
H08 027 loss or damage has occurred.) ^Although a very small proportion of
H08 028 offences against the person resulted in a sentence of reparation, 7%
H08 029 of offenders receiving a sentence of reparation were convicted of at
H08 030 least one offence against the person.
H08 031    |^Reparation was the only sentence in 19% of charges that received
H08 032 reparation. ^The most common sentences used with reparation on a
H08 033 single charge were periodic detention (25% of charges receiving
H08 034 reparation), fines (31% of charges receiving reparation), and
H08 035 supervision (14% of charges receiving reparation).
H08 036 *<5.3 *1Supervision*>
H08 037    |^Supervision, which replaces the sentence of probation, was given
H08 038 in 2,182 cases (4.3%). ^In cases which received a sentence of
H08 039 supervision, 19% of the offenders involved were female and 80% were
H08 040 male (1% sex unknown, Table 14). ^Of all cases, those with a female
H08 041 offender were slightly more likely to be given a sentence of
H08 042 supervision than those with a male offender; 1 in 18 cases involving
H08 043 female offenders received supervision, 1 in 22 cases involving male
H08 044 offenders received supervision.
H08 045 **[TABLE**]
H08 046    |^The ethnicity of offenders in Police prosecuted cases resulting
H08 047 in a sentence of supervision did not differ from the ethnicity of
H08 048 offenders in all cases prosecuted by the Police. ^As shown in Table
H08 049 15, 61% of offenders in supervision cases were non-Maori and 39% were
H08 050 Maori. ^Both Maori and non-Maori offenders had the same probability of
H08 051 being involved in a case incurring a sentence of supervision (1 in
H08 052 14).
H08 053 **[TABLE**]
H08 054    |^Over 40% of the offenders in cases which resulted in a sentence
H08 055 of supervision were aged less than 20 years and 70% were under 25
H08 056 years of age (Table 16).
H08 057 **[TABLE**]
H08 058    |^Comparison with the ages of offenders in all cases showed that
H08 059 younger offenders were more likely to be involved in cases which
H08 060 resulted in at least one sentence of supervision. ^Of offenders aged
H08 061 under 20 years, 1 in 14 were involved in cases that were given
H08 062 supervision. ^The figures for older offenders were 1 in 22 for
H08 063 offenders aged between 20 and 29 and only 1 in 37 for offenders aged
H08 064 at least 30 years old (Table 17).
H08 065    |^The 2,182 cases which resulted in a sentence of supervision
H08 066 included 5,889 charges (7% of all charges). ^Most supervision
H08 067 sentences were for offences against property (71%). ^The only other
H08 068 categories of offence accounting for at least 5% of supervision
H08 069 sentences were offences against the person (8%), traffic offences (8%)
H08 070 and offences involving drugs (5%).
H08 071    |^For 44% of charges incurring supervision, this was the only
H08 072 sentence. ^Other sentences used with supervision included periodic
H08 073 detention (37% of charges receiving supervision), reparation (11% of
H08 074 charges receiving supervision), driving disqualification (11% of
H08 075 charges receiving supervision) and community service (1% of charges
H08 076 receiving supervision). ^As the Criminal Justice Act 1985 requires
H08 077 that supervision and community-based sentences should not be imposed
H08 078 concurrently, it is of interest that in 46 charges which resulted in a
H08 079 sentence of supervision, a sentence of community service was also
H08 080 ordered. ^The 46 charges for which both sentences were given included
H08 081 26 charges for one individual. ^While the data suggests that some
H08 082 sentencing has taken place which is contrary to the legislative
H08 083 requirements, no firm conclusions should be drawn until the data has
H08 084 been investigated.
H08 085 **[TABLE**]
H08 086    |^Supervision sentences were usually for between three and six
H08 087 months, inclusive of six, (33%) or for between nine and 12 months,
H08 088 inclusive of 12, (39%). ^6.5% were for up to three months, 12% were
H08 089 for between six and nine months, inclusive of nine, and 9.5% were for
H08 090 more than one and up to two years.
H08 091 *<6. *6CUSTODIAL SENTENCING*>
H08 092    |^*0Of the 50,980 cases in which offenders were convicted and
H08 093 sentenced in the six month period, 1.10.85 to 31.3.86, 2,646 (5.2%)
H08 094 received a custodial sentence. ^This is 729 cases less than in the
H08 095 previous period, October 1984 to March 1985, a drop of 1.4%; in that
H08 096 previous period there were 51,183 cases and of these 3,375 (6.6%)
H08 097 received at least one custodial sentence.
H08 098 *<6.1 *1Offender Characteristics*>
H08 099    |^*0Of the cases receiving custody in the first six months of the
H08 100 new Act, male offenders accounted for 94% and female offenders
H08 101 accounted for approximately 5% (Table 18). ^During that period cases
H08 102 involving males were almost four times more likely to result in a
H08 103 custodial sentence than cases involving females; 1 in 16 cases
H08 104 involving a male offender incurred a custodial sentence compared with
H08 105 1 in 60 for cases involving female offenders.
H08 106 **[TABLE**]
H08 107    |^Comparison with the sex of offenders sentenced to custody in the
H08 108 previous year shows little change in the proportions of female and
H08 109 male offenders.
H08 110    |^Maori and non-Maori offenders each accounted for approximately
H08 111 50% of those sentenced to custody in Police prosecuted cases in
H08 112 October 1985 to March 1986. ^These proportions are similar to those in
H08 113 the previous period (Table 19).
H08 114    |^The well established pattern that Maori offenders are more
H08 115 likely to incur a custodial sentence has continued since the
H08 116 implementation of the Criminal Justice Act 1985. ^In the first six
H08 117 months of the new Act cases involving a Maori offender were 1.7 times
H08 118 more likely to incur a custodial sentence than cases involving a
H08 119 non-Maori offender; 10.6% of all cases involving Maori offenders
H08 120 resulted in a sentence of custody, compared with 6.4% of all cases
H08 121 involving non-Maori offenders. ^However, comparison with the previous
H08 122 period shows that the likelihood of a custodial sentence has decreased
H08 123 for both Maori and non-Maori offenders and the decrease has been
H08 124 greater for Maori offenders; 13.4% of cases involving Maori offenders
H08 125 and 8.4% of cases involving non-Maori offenders resulted in at least
H08 126 one custodial sentence in the previous period, indicating a drop of
H08 127 2.8% for Maori offenders and 2% for non-Maori offenders.
H08 128 **[TABLE**]
H08 129    |^Under the new Act, 32% of offenders in cases which incurred a
H08 130 custodial sentence were aged 15 to 19 years and 34% were 20 to 24
H08 131 years of age (Table 20). ^In the previous period the proportion of
H08 132 cases resulting in custody which involved 15-19 year old offenders was
H08 133 33% and 35% involved 20-24 year old offenders. ^There was also little
H08 134 change in the proportions of offenders in the older age groups between
H08 135 the two periods.
H08 136    |^Under the new Act 6.8% of cases involving offenders aged less
H08 137 than 30 years, resulted in a custodial sentence. ^The likelihood of a
H08 138 custodial sentence being incurred in a case decreased when the
H08 139 offender involved was at least 30 years of age; 4.6% for offenders
H08 140 aged 30-39 years and 2.3% for offenders aged at least 40 years. ^The
H08 141 likelihood of a custodial sentence in cases under the new Act was less
H08 142 than in the previous period for offenders of all age groups. ^In the
H08 143 previous period 8.4% of offenders aged less than 30 years received
H08 144 custody as did 5.9% of offenders aged 30-39 years and 3.8% of
H08 145 offenders aged at least 40 years; indicating decreases of 1.6%, 1.3%
H08 146 and 1.5% respectively since the new Act.
H08 147 **[TABLE**]
H08 148    |^The 2,646 cases which resulted in a custodial sentence under the
H08 149 new Act included 9,889 charges, 12.2% of the total number of 80,901
H08 150 charges. ^In the previous period there were 81,372 charges and 12,425
H08 151 (15.3%) of these received a custodial sentence. ^Hence the actual
H08 152 number of charges receiving custody dropped by 2,536 and the
H08 153 proportion of charges receiving custody dropped by 3.1% in the first
H08 154 six months of the new Act.
H08 155 *<6.2 *1Sentence Type and Length*>
H08 156    |^*0In the following discussion of sentence types and lengths, the
H08 157 most severe sentence per case is used to represent the case. ^The
H08 158 types of custodial sentence, in descending order of severity, are life
H08 159 imprisonment, preventive detention, detention under \0s48A of the
H08 160 Criminal Justice Act, cumulative imprisonment, imprisonment
H08 161 (concurrent) and corrective training.
H08 162    |^Imprisonment, cumulative and concurrent, was the most frequent
H08 163 custodial sentence. ^It was given in 86% of cases which resulted in a
H08 164 custodial sentence (7.6% cumulative imprisonment). ^Corrective
H08 165 training was the most severe sentence in 14% of cases resulting in a
H08 166 custodial sentence. ^Offenders received life sentences in 14 cases (17
H08 167 charges received life sentences) and 1 offender was sentenced to
H08 168 preventive detention. ^A comparison of custodial sentence types per
H08 169 case in the previous period October 1984 to March 1985 showed that
H08 170 there has been little change in the proportions of each custodial
H08 171 sentence type.
H08 172    |^In the first six months under the new Act almost half of the
H08 173 most severe custodial sentences per case were the shorter sentences of
H08 174 three months or less and 22% were at least three months and no more
H08 175 than six months long.
H08 176    |^Comparison with the previous period shows the number of
H08 177 sentences decreased in all categories of sentence length (Table 21).
H08 178 ^The decrease was greatest for the shorter sentences, hence it appears
H08 179 that there may be a slight shift towards longer custodial sentences
H08 180 since the new Act but this is offset by a reduction in the overall
H08 181 numbers of custodial sentences. ^These findings will be more fully
H08 182 investigated in a further report.
H08 183 **[TABLE**]
H08 184 *<6.3 *1Offence Types*>
H08 185    |^*0The following discussion of offence types refers to the
H08 186 offence which received the most severe sentence in cases which
H08 187 resulted in at least one sentence of custody.
H08 188    |^The number and proportion of cases resulting in custody, which
H08 189 arose from each offence type is shown in Table 22. ^It is clear from
H08 190 Table 22 that property offenders are still the largest group receiving
H08 191 custodial sentences. ^In six months under the new Act there were 1,015
H08 192 cases arising from property offending which resulted in custodial
H08 193 sentence, 38.3% of all cases given a custodial sentence. ^The next
H08 194 biggest group given custodial sentences were the offences against the
H08 195 person; 675 cases arising from offending against the person resulted
H08 196 in a custodial sentence, 25.5% of all cases which incurred a custodial
H08 197 sentence. ^Traffic offences accounted for 15% of cases resulting in
H08 198 custody, almost 10% were for offences against justice and offences
H08 199 involving drugs accounted for 7% of these cases. ^There were no marked
H08 200 differences in these proportions between the two periods except for a
H08 201 4% rise in the proportion of offences against the person since the new
H08 202 Act. ^Because these proportions are influenced by the total number of
H08 203 cases in each period any change between the two periods is more
H08 204 usefully evaluated by comparing the likelihoods of cases ensuing from
H08 205 each offence type resulting in custody (Table 23).
H08 206 *#
H09 001 **[273 TEXT H09**]
H09 002    |^*0The Rural Adviser (Education Board) visits the Island
H09 003 teachers twice a year, but there are few visits from Department of
H09 004 Education specialist advisers ({0ie} Science, Music, or Art Advisers)
H09 005 *- this was noted as a definite requirement in the support system for
H09 006 these teachers. ^In such an isolated community where the educational
H09 007 system is entirely dependent on the calibre of the teaching staff,
H09 008 support, through visits from such specialist advisers is essential.
H09 009 ^However a Science Advisor will soon make a visit and specialist
H09 010 training of a Chathams teacher on the mainland was recently effected.
H09 011 *<2.1.3 *1Internal Affairs*>
H09 012    |^*0The department has had a long-standing administrative
H09 013 responsibility for the Chatham Islands, which it now wishes to
H09 014 relinquish. ^The department is the Airport licencee, owns the
H09 015 Meatworks (the management of which is contracted to Advanced Meats
H09 016 \0Ltd), owns the generators at the Meatworks which power the
H09 017 reticulated electricity supply (distributed by the Central Canterbury
H09 018 Electric Power Board) and arranged a contract with Union Maritime
H09 019 Company over the provision of the services of the Holmedale.
H09 020    |^The department has one position on the Island, that of Resident
H09 021 Agent. ^He represents most government departments with no staff on the
H09 022 Island, and also acts specifically as: Airport Manager, Superintendent
H09 023 of Mercantile Marine, Receiver of Wrecks and Overseer of Lighthouses.
H09 024 ^He also has responsibility for making arrangements and receiving on
H09 025 the Island visiting dignitaries and state servants and reports to the
H09 026 Executive Officer, Local Government Division at Head Office,
H09 027 Wellington.
H09 028    |^The role of the Resident Agent has come under some discussion
H09 029 by the Ministerial Review Team and warrants particular study.
H09 030    |^The agent represents Internal Affairs, Maori Affairs, Social
H09 031 Welfare, Rural Bank, Housing Corporation, Education, Health, Energy,
H09 032 Labour, Statistics, {0ACC}, Inland Revenue.
H09 033    |^On behalf of Internal Affairs this position also assumes the
H09 034 responsibilities of Airport Manager. ^This role is a time consuming
H09 035 one, in terms of time spent travelling to and from the Airport, and
H09 036 waiting for aeroplanes to arrive. ^The duties with which the Manager
H09 037 is charged are however very routine and could be assumed without
H09 038 difficulty by the Meteorological Service staff one of whom must be
H09 039 present at the Airport for all flights anyway.
H09 040    |^The role of Receiver of Wrecks and Superintendent of Mercantile
H09 041 Marine also seemed to sit rather incongruously on the Resident Agent
H09 042 and despite some opposition voiced by Police, it is felt that given
H09 043 the small volume of work involved the role would be more appropriately
H09 044 assumed by the Police Constable.
H09 045    |^The majority of the Resident Agent's time, however, is devoted
H09 046 to assisting the community as the representative of a range of
H09 047 government departments. ^In particular the present Agent estimated
H09 048 that approximately 60% of his time was spent on documentation and
H09 049 advisory work on behalf of the Departments of Maori Affairs and Social
H09 050 Welfare. ^He does the full range of benefits work for {0DSW} and has
H09 051 received good support by correspondence from the Christchurch office.
H09 052    |^However, it is only really since the Minister insisted on a
H09 053 woman Social Worker accompanying her to the Chathams in May and the
H09 054 bad storm which caused so much damage on the Chatham Islands in July
H09 055 1985, that {0DSW} have been jolted out of their lethargy and have sent
H09 056 a Social Worker on a visit to the community assisted by the Resident
H09 057 Agent. ^It is planned to send a visiting Social Worker on a more
H09 058 regular basis to help the Resident Agent in the delivery of better
H09 059 services to the community.
H09 060    |^The Resident Agent also receives good support from Maori
H09 061 Affairs, Christchurch Office, in the delivery of their range of
H09 062 services on the Island ({0eg} housing loans, trade training scheme,
H09 063 Land Court sittings), and departmental officers from Christchurch
H09 064 visit three or four times a year.
H09 065    |^The Resident Agent position is the only administrative public
H09 066 service position on the Island. ^Most rural communities have someone
H09 067 to whom they can go for advice \0etc on government matters and in the
H09 068 Chathams the Resident Agent fills that role. ^The position provides a
H09 069 vital liaison link for the community and for government departments,
H09 070 which could not be performed by any of the other existing State
H09 071 service positions on the Island ({0eg} the Postmaster is the obvious
H09 072 choice, but he carries a heavy workload and could not accept any
H09 073 additional responsibility). ^It is recommended that the position be
H09 074 retained until the present incumbent vacates, at which time it should
H09 075 be transferred from the Department of Internal Affairs to the
H09 076 Department of Social Welfare and continue operation as a government/
H09 077 community liaison officer at 007.104. ^The position would thus
H09 078 continue to be an administrative position, and it is envisaged that
H09 079 the new incumbent would have assistance from his department *-
H09 080 including periodic visits by a trained social worker.
H09 081 *<2.1.4 *1Lands and Survey*>
H09 082    |^*0Lands and Survey are in the Chathams to encourage both land
H09 083 development and conservation and have proposals to develop 11 sheep
H09 084 and cattle units and have 24 reserves, totalling approximately 4,000
H09 085 hectares, on four Islands. ^On the land development side they have a
H09 086 manager and two wage workers on the 4,450 hectare Wharekauri Station.
H09 087 ^Timber stands there will ultimately be brought in at the rate of 5
H09 088 hectares annually and the department is soon to establish a tree
H09 089 nursery at Te One. ^The County Council has been offered the use of it
H09 090 as a holding area. ^The Wellington Commissioner of Crown Lands is
H09 091 chairman of the Chatham Islands Land Settlement Committee which
H09 092 includes local farmers and is a committee of the New Zealand Land
H09 093 Settlement Board.
H09 094    |^As the Chathams are part of the Wellington Land District, the
H09 095 department's operations are handled from the Wellington Office. ^Their
H09 096 senior ranger visits the Islands periodically and they have a resident
H09 097 officer at Te One. ^For some reason this Parks Assistant is a wage
H09 098 worker but it is understood that the position will soon be permanently
H09 099 established. ^He manages all reserves (the largest of 1,000 hectares)
H09 100 on four islands on a very modest budget and the local response to his
H09 101 work is encouraging.
H09 102    |^Lands and Survey continue to have a significant impact on
H09 103 farming and land management on the Chathams, and after only 10 years
H09 104 their conservation work through reserves management is gaining
H09 105 increasing local recognition and support.
H09 106    |^Some criticism was voiced at Lands and Survey tendering for
H09 107 their shearing, invariably resulting in mainland gangs doing theirs
H09 108 and others' work when the Wool Board is promoting the training of local
H09 109 shearers who it is claimed could do the work *- if they had the extra
H09 110 shearing to improve their skills. ^The team is aware that Lands and
H09 111 Survey had had difficulties in the past in relying on local shearers
H09 112 but their use may be a social cost worth considering *- provided
H09 113 locals were given adequate advance notice of such a policy change. ^It
H09 114 was noted however that it was very difficult to get an Islander to
H09 115 organise such a gang and that certainly for the last 3 years
H09 116 crutching, lamb shearing and second shear were done by Islanders. ^The
H09 117 department employs only Island labour on Wharekauri and the new
H09 118 manager will also be an Islander. ^In addition they encourage a school
H09 119 leaver wage worker to work on the Island each year for 12 months prior
H09 120 to assisting their placement on a mainland farm.
H09 121 *<2.1.5 *1Meteorological Service ({0MOT})*>
H09 122    |^*0The Chatham Islands station is one of a series circling New
H09 123 Zealand including Raoul, Lord Howe, and Campbell Islands as well as
H09 124 coastal Australian stations. ^The department's presence there is
H09 125 essential as a data acquisition post to maintain both their New
H09 126 Zealand weather forecasting service and their global meteorological
H09 127 responsibilities. ^The service will be upgraded in line with the
H09 128 department's overall policies but this will not require more staff.
H09 129 ^At present an officer in charge and two technicians man the post and
H09 130 their service to the Chathams is an indirect one in the form of
H09 131 general, coastal and fishing and aviation forecasts. ^In addition to
H09 132 taking and recording weather observations, the station has a seismic
H09 133 recording device. ^The \0Met. Officer in Charge as {0MOT}'s senior
H09 134 officer on the Chathams has Airport and Crash/ Fire responsibilities
H09 135 and these are addressed in \0Sect. 5.1 of this report.
H09 136 *<2.1.6 *1Police*>
H09 137    |^*0The {0NZ} Police have one Constable based on the Chatham
H09 138 Islands who reports to the District Superintendent, Wellington. ^He
H09 139 also acts as: Court Registrar, Births, Deaths and Marriages Registrar,
H09 140 Marriage Celebrant, Clerk of Liquor Licencing Committee, Customs
H09 141 Officer and Probation Officer. ^This position by its very nature
H09 142 required the constable to work very closely with the community,
H09 143 government representatives and the County Council. ^The duties of
H09 144 Probation Officer at present are very light and may be more
H09 145 appropriately carried out by the *'Community Liaison**' Officer *-
H09 146 this matter would have to be confirmed by Justice Department.
H09 147    |^The policeman is also responsible for coordinating any Search
H09 148 and Rescue, and is Controller of Airport Emergencies. ^It is also
H09 149 suggested that the Policeman take over the role of Receiver of Wrecks
H09 150 and Superintendent of Mercantile Marine, however Police have expressed
H09 151 reluctance at adopting this role.
H09 152 *<2.1.7 *1Post Office*>
H09 153    |^*0The Post Office is the most visible of the state services on
H09 154 the Islands. ^It has a total of 22 resident staff to carry out its
H09 155 functions in communications and postal services and in addition relies
H09 156 on mainland staff to augment the locals as required for specific
H09 157 tasks. ^At present a team is on the Island installing reticulation for
H09 158 an improved telephone system.
H09 159    |^The new system, although still a manual one, will by means of
H09 160 improved lines, a central battery system and multi-access radio to
H09 161 replace difficult-to-maintain pole lines, allow all subscribers an
H09 162 individual service with good transmission by 1987. ^Until a satellite
H09 163 link is established *- the priority of which is at present the subject
H09 164 of a feasibility study *- improved communication to the mainland or
H09 165 prospects of {0TV} reception are not possible.
H09 166    |^Communications on the Chathams is at present by {0HF} radio
H09 167 circuits to provide telephone, telegraph and telex services and the
H09 168 Post Office maintains radio telephone links with the mainland. ^The
H09 169 present 2-line toll circuit is limiting for urgent calls and certainly
H09 170 would inhibit ready telephone access to departments. ^A 24-hour
H09 171 emergency service is available but normal telephone services close
H09 172 between midnight and 6.00 {0am}. ^Radio links to Pitt Island and more
H09 173 distant parts of Chatham Island are maintained. ^Normal inland (not
H09 174 overseas) charges are set for all services and in fact Chatham
H09 175 Islanders have a range of facilities not greatly different from those
H09 176 for any smaller community elsewhere in New Zealand.
H09 177    |^The staff comprises nine operators, two technicians and a
H09 178 linesman under a manager at the radio station and eight staff
H09 179 (including three part-timers) on postal services who are responsible
H09 180 to the Postmaster. ^There is a good class of accommodation at the
H09 181 radio station hostel to cater mainly for the six month tour duty
H09 182 operators and technicians and although not fully utilised it can also
H09 183 be used if required for visiting staff. ^Two cleaners, two cooks and a
H09 184 handyperson, all locals, operate as shift wage workers to service this
H09 185 facility.
H09 186    |^The Postmaster is agent for State Insurance and {0ACC} and is
H09 187 Chief Electoral Returning Officer. ^In addition he is involved in
H09 188 enquiries for other departments, and local people tend to approach him
H09 189 for information and advice in the absence of the Resident Agent. ^He
H09 190 is also available to take statutory declarations. ^The Post Office is
H09 191 the only banking agency on the Chathams. ^The Post Office works well
H09 192 with other departments and the Postmaster has close liaison with the
H09 193 policeman. ^{0MWD} is understaffed to handle all tasks and the Post
H09 194 Office is soon to bring in a maintenance team to upgrade the Post
H09 195 Office at Waitangi.
H09 196 *<2.1.8 *1Works and Development*>
H09 197    |^*0The {0MWD} has three officers on the Island: the Maintenance
H09 198 Officer, a carpenter and a painter and in addition use, on contract,
H09 199 about six local tradesmen. ^With this team they maintain 130 major
H09 200 buildings *- schools, offices, houses \0etc *- on Chatham and Pitt
H09 201 Islands.
H09 202 *#
H10 001 **[274 TEXT H10**]
H10 002 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H10 003    |^*0The value of a philosophy, and of goals and a set of
H10 004 objectives, is not always recognised, and there is a widespread lack
H10 005 of written statements of philosophy and objectives at hospital
H10 006 management level. ^They may appear to be a luxury if one is under
H10 007 intense pressure of work; yet they comprise vital elements in the
H10 008 planning process, inviting thought and discussion about current
H10 009 procedures and practices which as a result can be questioned and
H10 010 changed. ^Objectives also sharpen activities so that efficiency is
H10 011 enhanced and effectiveness measured.
H10 012    |^Some individual services and professional groups have developed
H10 013 excellent philosophies and objectives but these are not necessarily
H10 014 supported by the hospital administration. ^This results in a lack of
H10 015 coordination between services provided by various professional groups
H10 016 and contributes to poor staff morale and lack of job interest.
H10 017    |^Some senior management staff state that they have objectives
H10 018 but that they are not written down. ^They are, therefore, unlikely to
H10 019 be known by staff. ^Regular reviews are not undertaken to assess
H10 020 achievements and to produce current objectives. ^Opportunities are
H10 021 often lacking for personnel at the work-face to contribute to the
H10 022 formulation of philosophies and objectives, with consequent
H10 023 frustration and a sense of impotence.
H10 024 *<(b) *1Quality assurance*>
H10 025    |^*0Quality assurance is very poorly developed with a general
H10 026 lack of formal programmes. ^Some individual health professions are
H10 027 introducing quality assurance within their own departments, but there
H10 028 is a lack of coordination between disciplines. ^Overall there is a
H10 029 lack of informed leadership and direction from hospital management in
H10 030 this area. ^The development of appropriate measurement tools is
H10 031 hampered by the absence of objectives for the hospital and heavy
H10 032 clinical workloads, and a lack of appropriate experience.
H10 033 *<(c) *1Administration*>
H10 034    |^*0A feature of the hospital board service is the lack of
H10 035 interchange of senior administrative staff between general hospitals
H10 036 and psychiatric hospitals. ^An improved interchange of health
H10 037 professionals and administrators would do much to improve
H10 038 communications with the hospital board, lessen the effects of physical
H10 039 remoteness, increase the awareness of the substandard conditions
H10 040 existing in many psychiatric hospitals, and improve understanding of
H10 041 the function of psychiatric hospitals within the board and in other
H10 042 board institutions.
H10 043    |^It needs to be understood that the management of a psychiatric
H10 044 hospital is a complex matter, demanding the same levels of skill as
H10 045 the management of a general hospital. ^In fact, the level of resources
H10 046 made available by boards to psychiatric hospitals probably places
H10 047 greater demands to exercise managerial skills if these are to be
H10 048 successfully operated. ^The increasing emphasis on community care and
H10 049 the gradual reduction of inpatient numbers also call for skills in the
H10 050 management of change, for a more flexible approach to care.
H10 051    |^It could be that increased attention to training in modern
H10 052 management techniques would greatly benefit management practices in
H10 053 psychiatric hospitals.
H10 054 *<(d) *1Communication within the hospital*>
H10 055    |^*0The quality of communication within hospitals varies from one
H10 056 institution to another, and senior hospital management often appear
H10 057 isolated from staff. ^The level of communication is directly related
H10 058 to the standard of care since the implementation of new policies
H10 059 relies primarily on the dissemination of information. ^As with the
H10 060 development of a philosophy and objectives, the importance of formal
H10 061 consultation and involvement in the decision making process as well as
H10 062 written communication between all levels of management and staff is
H10 063 not recognised.
H10 064 *<(e) *1Official visitors and District Inspectors*>
H10 065    |^*0The procedure by which official visitors are appointed
H10 066 appears to be unsatisfactory because it is not widely known or
H10 067 understood. ^A further problem is a lack of understanding of the role
H10 068 of the official visitor both by the appointee and by hospital staff.
H10 069 ^The meeting of official visitors held in June 1985 appears to have
H10 070 gone some way towards overcoming these problems, and will have served
H10 071 to strengthen the positive contribution the official visitors can make
H10 072 to patient care. ^Official visitors are generally enthusiastic about
H10 073 their role and accept their responsibilities concerning the lay
H10 074 aspects of day-to-day patient care.
H10 075    |^The role of the District Inspectors, related as it is to their
H10 076 professional work, is more clearly understood. ^The official visitor
H10 077 and District Inspector form an important resource for both hospital
H10 078 staff and patients, and provide a vital link with the community.
H10 079 *<(f) *1Support Services*>
H10 080    |^*0Many boards have centralised support services, {0eg},
H10 081 laundry, maintenance, and transport, providing services for a group of
H10 082 hospitals.
H10 083    |^Few psychiatric hospitals are satisfied with such services.
H10 084 ^For example, in many hospitals the laundry services are seen as
H10 085 unsatisfactory. ^There is a widespread feeling that a centralised
H10 086 laundry service does not meet the particular needs of a psychiatric
H10 087 hospital. ^Patients in psychiatric hospitals are increasingly
H10 088 encouraged to wear personalised clothing and often such clothing is
H10 089 unsuitable for processing in large centralised laundries.
H10 090 ^Consequently clothing is washed in the wards, and nursing staff are
H10 091 assuming a very large non-nursing task indeed. ^Some hospitals also
H10 092 complain of the slow turn around in the laundry they do send to the
H10 093 centralised laundry. ^For example, at one psychopaedic hospital at
H10 094 times patients may have no underwear for several days.
H10 095    |^In some cases where there are centralised services, staff who
H10 096 were previously used to having control over their own services, make
H10 097 little attempt to cooperate with the centralised services. ^They are,
H10 098 however, remote from those providing the service and feel a sense of
H10 099 isolation.
H10 100    |^Hospital boards with centralised laundries need to examine just
H10 101 how appropriate are the systems for handling patient clothing from
H10 102 psychiatric hospitals. ^Questions need to be addressed such as whether
H10 103 separate handling of such clothing at the main laundry is possible, or
H10 104 whether more attention needs to be paid to more effectively laundering
H10 105 clothing on the wards.
H10 106 **[END INDENTATION**]
H10 107 *<(4) *3HOSPITAL FACILITIES*>
H10 108 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H10 109 *<*0(a) *1Design and Evaluation Unit Report*>
H10 110    |^*0During 1984 the department's Design and Evaluation Unit
H10 111 surveyed all psychiatric hospitals and hospitals for the
H10 112 intellectually handicapped to give a general assessment of present
H10 113 buildings.
H10 114    |^This *"screening evaluation**" is intended to give a general
H10 115 appreciation of the situation. ^It must be stressed that the condition
H10 116 of individual buildings should not be taken out of context and that if
H10 117 there are proposals for the development of particular buildings,
H10 118 further detailed evaluation is necessary to determine the most
H10 119 appropriate course of action.
H10 120    |^The assessments are based on standard preliminary evaluation
H10 121 procedures used by the unit which categorise buildings into four
H10 122 groups:
H10 123 _|*1Category A *- *0Providing very good standards of accommodation for
H10 124 the function for which it is used, whether it is purpose built or
H10 125 upgraded.
H10 126 |*1Category B *- *0Providing adequate facilities and standards of
H10 127 accommodation for the purposes for which it is used.
H10 128 |*1Category C *- *0Requiring adaptation, replacement or essential
H10 129 additional facilities to provide adequate accommodation.
H10 130 |*1Category D *- *0As for *'C**' with conditions so bad that the unit
H10 131 will cease to function if steps are not taken in the near future.
H10 132 |^As all buildings do not fall neatly into one of these four
H10 133 categories, further simple sub-division of this classification has
H10 134 been used where appropriate.
H10 135    |^Of the total of 244 inpatient units, 54% are classified *'A**'
H10 136 to *'B**' inclusive and provide adequate to very good standards of
H10 137 accommodation; 33.7% are *'B-C**' to *'C**' inclusive and provide
H10 138 accommodation which will require adaptation, some replacement or
H10 139 additional facilities at some time in the future; 12.3% are *'C-D**'
H10 140 to *'D**' inclusive suggesting that their future useful life is very
H10 141 limited.
H10 142    |^There are approximately 311 other buildings or complexes of
H10 143 different types and function within the estate of these hospitals. ^Of
H10 144 these 76.9% are classififed *'A**' to *'B**' inclusive. ^These are in
H10 145 very good condition and suitable for the purposes for which they are
H10 146 being used. ^The remaining buildings or complexes in this group are
H10 147 not in a satisfactory condition and will require some upgrading,
H10 148 alteration or replacement if they are to continue to be used.
H10 149    |^The Design and Evaluation Unit gained the impression that since
H10 150 the previous survey in 1978, there has been a significant amount of
H10 151 upgrading undertaken. ^However, a considerable amount of work of this
H10 152 type remains to be done as there are still important functional and
H10 153 environmental deficiencies. ^There are no grounds for complacency,
H10 154 particularly when the basic facilities are compared with those
H10 155 available in general hospitals.
H10 156    |^The unit also noted the changing emphasis in psychiatric
H10 157 hospitals with a tendency towards community care with a consequent
H10 158 reduction in inpatient numbers. ^The dependency of those remaining in
H10 159 hospital is tending to be higher and increasing, reinforcing the need
H10 160 to plan for changing requirements.
H10 161 *<(b) *1Review team comment*>
H10 162    |^*0While accepting in general the structural and functional
H10 163 suitability report of the Design and Evaluation Unit and acknowledging
H10 164 the adequacy of the grading criteria used, the review team was
H10 165 sufficiently concerned about the standard of facilities, to comment on
H10 166 a number of matters.
H10 167    |^Overall many wards are bare, unattractive and depressing.
H10 168 ^Although many of the buildings are old this should not necessarily
H10 169 account for their appearance. ^For example, some wards in old
H10 170 buildings had been imaginatively decorated to create a bright,
H10 171 home-like environment. ^It is also of concern that although it is
H10 172 possible to build well-designed facilities, too often the design of
H10 173 new or renovated facilities perpetuate the problems of those they are
H10 174 replacing.
H10 175    |^For example, with regard to individual privacy and dignity,
H10 176 there is often a lack of cubicles and curtaining in dormitories, and,
H10 177 for longer stay patients, some toilets and bathrooms have no doors
H10 178 either through lack of maintenance or so the few nursing staff can
H10 179 more closely supervise patients. ^In some wards for intellectually
H10 180 handicapped residents, there are toilets of a bench type in open
H10 181 corridors and communal showers. ^These conditions were seen in
H10 182 recently upgraded facilities. ^In other wards toilet and bathroom
H10 183 facilities are inadequate in number and design. ^In many wards there
H10 184 is little space for personal possessions. ^Facilities such as these
H10 185 have an impact on staff attitudes, behaviour and expectations, and
H10 186 ultimately affect the quality of patient care.
H10 187    |^The size of the wards is also a matter of major concern. ^Units
H10 188 containing more than 40 beds are common. ^The review team is strongly
H10 189 of the view that for personalised care and rehabilitation, admission
H10 190 wards should have no more than 15 patients and no ward should exceed
H10 191 20. ^Most long stay wards should be small enough and designed in such
H10 192 a way as to provide a home-like environment.
H10 193    |^It is a disturbing irony that the mental health service
H10 194 actively creates mental health behavioural problems, through
H10 195 institutionalisation in large wards. ^The present size of wards plus
H10 196 the rostering system mean that in many instances staff do not know
H10 197 patients, their backgrounds or current problems.
H10 198 **[END INDENTATION**]
H10 199 *<(5) *3COMMUNICATION WITH HOSPITAL BOARDS*>
H10 200 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H10 201    |^*0Communication between individual psychiatric hospitals and
H10 202 hospitals for the intellectually handicapped, and hospital boards is
H10 203 often seen as satisfactory from the board's perspective while almost
H10 204 everywhere it is seen as unsatisfactory from the hospital's point of
H10 205 view.
H10 206    |^We believe this comes about because senior board management may
H10 207 not always have a clear understanding of the work of psychiatric
H10 208 hospitals, and input on matters seen by the hospital as critical to
H10 209 its day-to-day management is often not solicited by hospital boards.
H10 210 ^There is a widespread belief among hospital staff that the needs of
H10 211 the psychiatric hospital receive a low priority at board level. ^The
H10 212 geographic isolation of some hospitals hinders communication.
H10 213    |^It is also true that the management groups at psychiatric
H10 214 hospitals do at times fail to draw to the attention of senior board
H10 215 management deficiencies and problems with which they require
H10 216 assistance.
H10 217    |^Few hospital boards have a service plan for psychiatric
H10 218 services as a whole. ^Where plans are being developed, hospital staff
H10 219 are often unaware that such exercises are being undertaken. ^Hospital
H10 220 staff at various levels are given little encouragement to contribute,
H10 221 and when they do, feedback from the board is limited.
H10 222    |^A consequence of poor communication is uncertainty about the
H10 223 future role of the hospital contributing to low staff morale.
H10 224    |^Any apparent lack of understanding by hospital boards may
H10 225 reflect a lack of personal experience in a psychiatric setting and
H10 226 thus less than full appreciation of the special functions and needs of
H10 227 psychiatric hospitals and of what can and should be achieved by a
H10 228 modern psychiatric service.
H10 229 *#
H11 001 **[275 TEXT H11**]
H11 002    |^*0There is also a need for qualified nurses to accept the
H11 003 responsibility that goes along with professional status and staffing
H11 004 by a qualified workforce. ^This includes accepting responsibility for
H11 005 the need to staff hospitals on a 24-hour basis.
H11 006 *<*4A2:14 Culture and nursing*>
H11 007    |^*0Bicultural and multi-ethnic issues are not treated separately
H11 008 but are addressed throughout the report, in keeping with the bicutural
H11 009 stance taken by the workshop.
H11 010 *<*4A2:15 The preparation and employment of enrolled nurses*>
H11 011    |^*0A cost-effective national system for the preparation of
H11 012 enrolled nurses is essential and there is a need to balance regional
H11 013 resources with the multiplicity of programmes offered. ^The
H11 014 availability of educational resources also influences whether training
H11 015 becomes incorporated into inservice education departments, a trend
H11 016 already apparent in some smaller training hospitals. ^The programme
H11 017 for enrolment should remain within the hospital setting as it is
H11 018 essential that it be undertaken on-the-job. ^Entry to programmes
H11 019 should be determined by guidelines set by each board, taking into
H11 020 account academic preparation, expectations, availability of recruits
H11 021 and other factors.
H11 022    |^A review of the practice parameters of the enrolled nurse must
H11 023 be undertaken before a case can be made for altering either the length
H11 024 or structure of the current programme.
H11 025    |^The enrolled nurse (who functions under the supervision of a
H11 026 registered nurse or medical practitioner) cares for patients whose
H11 027 needs are predictable. ^Despite this, there is no clearly identified
H11 028 role or place for the enrolled nurse within the health care system.
H11 029 ^This adds weight to the need to review not only the preparation of
H11 030 enrolled nurses but also how they are used in the system.
H11 031    |^The role of the enrolled nurse is an important one and cannot be
H11 032 seen in isolation from other nursing roles.
H11 033 *<*4A2:16 The preparation of midwives*>
H11 034    |^*0The preparation of midwives within the Advanced Diploma in
H11 035 Nursing course is a key issue and the current national review of the
H11 036 Advanced Diploma in Nursing courses will address this.
H11 037    |^Any comment on this issue would pre-empt the outcome of that
H11 038 review.
H11 039 *<*6PART B PRIORITIES*>
H11 040    |^*0After discussion of the issues and acceptance of working group
H11 041 reports, all groups were asked to identify and then rank priority
H11 042 areas for further consideration. ^There was considerable overlap in
H11 043 the lists from the four groups, and from their combined reports
H11 044 sixteen priority issues were identified. ^Within the constraints of
H11 045 the time available it was not possible to address every identifiable
H11 046 issue. ^Some, such as the preparation of midwives and the matter of
H11 047 *"bridging**" courses, although recognised as important, were not
H11 048 dealt with in detail as it was known that both were currently under
H11 049 detailed investigation elsewhere. ^Others could be addressed more
H11 050 effectively at regional rather than at national level.
H11 051    |^The sixteen priority issues were:
H11 052 **[LIST**]
H11 053    |^It was recognised that underpinning the recommendations arising
H11 054 from these issues three conditions must exist:
H11 055 _| *- the development of a national health policy to provide an
H11 056 informed base for determining/ defining the nursing component within
H11 057 the health system. ^A bicultural approach with multicultural
H11 058 sensitivity is an essential and integral part of such a policy. ^The
H11 059 policy would determine the emphasis to be placed on the preventive,
H11 060 health promotive and health maintenance services and the caring,
H11 061 curative sectors of the health services and give direction for the
H11 062 preparation of an appropriately prepared nursing workforce,
H11 063 | *- a spirit of co-operation and goodwill by all parties in the
H11 064 endeavour to provide a health service that meets the needs of our
H11 065 society,
H11 066 | *- recognition that action on the recommendations will require
H11 067 allocation or re-allocation of financial resources to underpin all
H11 068 activities within the education and nursing services and that this
H11 069 condition be drawn to the attention of the relevant authorities.
H11 070 *<*6PART C*>
H11 071 *<C1:O RECOMMENDATIONS AND PROPOSALS FOR ACTION*>
H11 072    |^*0The sixteen priority issues were divided among the working
H11 073 groups and each group was asked to bring to plenary session
H11 074 recommendations for dealing with the issues allocated to them. ^The
H11 075 range of recommendations was scrutinised in plenary for possible gaps
H11 076 or duplication. ^While the explanatory comment and proposals for
H11 077 specific action and monitoring were developed in small groups, the
H11 078 groups and the workshop in plenary reached consensus on the content.
H11 079 ^The presentation of Part C to some extent reflects the process of
H11 080 developing the content within separate groups. ^The recommendations
H11 081 express principles, and the proposals give guidelines for action. ^It
H11 082 was expected that different individuals, groups and organisations
H11 083 would use these to develop the specific details relevant to them, and
H11 084 that such detail could not be appropriately developed by this
H11 085 workshop. ^This would continue the review as an ongoing process, and
H11 086 not one which concluded with the publication of the report.
H11 087    |^In keeping with the bicultural stance taken by the workshop,
H11 088 cultural matters are integrated throughout the recommendations.
H11 089 *<*6C1:1 DEVELOPMENT OF CO-ORDINATED NATIONAL HEALTH AND NURSING
H11 090 WORKFORCE POLICY AND ASSOCIATED PLANNING*>
H11 091 *<*0Recommendation 1  National health policy*>
H11 092 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 093 |^That the Government develop a national health policy to provide
H11 094 direction for the development of health services and that a bicultural
H11 095 approach with multicultural sensitivity be an integral part of such a
H11 096 health policy.
H11 097 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 098    |^To provide an organised, equitable and effective health service
H11 099 which reflects the changing needs of New Zealanders, a co-ordinated
H11 100 national health policy is necessary. ^This policy will provide a basis
H11 101 for workforce planning and other economic measures and will help to
H11 102 allay some of the concerns experienced by consumers of health care
H11 103 services.
H11 104    |^In the absence of a national policy, planning will continue to
H11 105 be based on assumptions and an incomplete and inadequate data base.
H11 106 *<Recommendation 2  National health workforce plan*>
H11 107 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 108 |^That the Department of Health be asked to develop a national health
H11 109 workforce plan.
H11 110 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 111    |^Upon publication of the national health policy the Department of
H11 112 Health should establish a mechanism for developing a health workforce
H11 113 plan.
H11 114 *<Recommendation 3  Nursing workforce plan*>
H11 115 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 116 |^That the nursing workforce plan be reviewed in the light of the
H11 117 outcome of Recommendations 1 and 2.
H11 118 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 119    |^There is an urgent need for a coordinated nursing workforce plan
H11 120 to determine projected needs for nursing within acceptable limits and
H11 121 to meet identified needs in specific areas (for example psychiatric,
H11 122 psychopaedic, gerontological).
H11 123    |^In view of weighty concerns expressed in the submissions which
H11 124 highlight inadequate and deteriorating staffing levels, particularly
H11 125 in psychiatric, psychopaedic and geriatric areas, it is apparent that
H11 126 there is an urgent need for this to be addressed.
H11 127 *<*6C1:2 DEFINITION OF THE SCOPE AND PRACTICE OF NURSING AND THE
H11 128 RELATIVE ROLE AND FUNCTION OF FIRST AND SECOND LEVEL NURSES*>
H11 129 *<*0Recommendation 4  The scope and function of nursing*>
H11 130 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 131 |^That the scope and function of nursing be redefined in the context
H11 132 of a changing New Zealand society.
H11 133 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 134    |^The current pattern of nursing care has been established for
H11 135 generations. ^Little coordinated effort has been made to relate this
H11 136 to changing social, cultural, economic and demographic conditions.
H11 137    |^The submissions to this review have highlighted differing
H11 138 expectations of the role of the nurse between consumers and
H11 139 practitioners in both hospitals and the community. ^Alongside this,
H11 140 significant technological advances have increased demands on the
H11 141 education and training of professional staff.
H11 142    |^The introduction of comprehensive nursing courses has been in
H11 143 part an attempt to meet this challenge. ^Further revisions are
H11 144 necessary and desirable to ensure that professional nursing care
H11 145 relates to an ongoing series of demands for nursing expertise/ skills.
H11 146    |^Proposals for action include that:
H11 147 _|(**=i) a jointly funded exercise be undertaken immediately by the
H11 148 Department of Health and the nursing profession, through its
H11 149 representative organisations, to identify the scope and function of
H11 150 the registered nurse. ^The outcome of this exercise could then be
H11 151 presented for discussion at a national forum.
H11 152 |^This exercise will enable clarification of the scope and function of
H11 153 the enrolled nurse. (^It will also facilitate effective use of
H11 154 resources and it will provide a data base to determine an appropriate
H11 155 ratio of registered and enrolled nurses addressed in Recommendation
H11 156 5,)
H11 157 |(**=ii) active consideration be given to the following points:
H11 158 **[LIST**]
H11 159 *<Recommendation 5  The nature and organisation of nursing practice*>
H11 160 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 161 |^That the nursing profession initiate a review of the nature and
H11 162 organisation of nursing practice.
H11 163 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 164    |^Recommendation 4 addressed the redefinition of the scope and
H11 165 function of nursing, which is necessary before the nature and
H11 166 organisation of nursing practice can be reviewed. ^These two issues
H11 167 are closely related. ^The organisation of nursing practice includes
H11 168 matters such as the ratio of registered and enrolled nurses and
H11 169 appropriate career structures for nurses.
H11 170    |^People have the right to expect that professional nursing
H11 171 services are provided by a qualified nursing workforce. ^This has
H11 172 implications for workforce planning, including the recruitment,
H11 173 selection, employment and retention of nurses.
H11 174    |^Proposals for action include that:
H11 175 _|(**=i) the New Zealand Nurses' Association approach the Department
H11 176 of Health to initiate task forces to review the nature and
H11 177 organisation of nursing practice. ^These task forces should be jointly
H11 178 funded by the New Zealand Nurses' Association, the Department of
H11 179 Health, employer representatives and other groups where applicable,
H11 180 |(**=ii) these task forces include nurses from the workforce, nurse
H11 181 managers, and educators and actively seek the views of involved and
H11 182 interested professional and lay groups through innovative means and
H11 183 culturally appropriate methods,
H11 184 |(**=iii) the outcomes of this review of nursing practice should be
H11 185 accepted in principle by all parties before dissemination to practice
H11 186 settings in the form of guidelines.
H11 187 *<*6C1:3 PROVISION OF EQUITABLE ACCESS TO NURSING COURSES THROUGH
H11 188 AFFIRMATIVE ACTION FOR TARGETED GROUPS (IN PARTICULAR MAORI AND
H11 189 PACIFIC ISLAND PEOPLE)*>
H11 190 *<*0Recommendation 6  Equal opportunities/ affirmative action*>
H11 191 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 192 |^That mechanisms be put in place to ensure that there are equal
H11 193 opportunities for all.
H11 194 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 195    |^Proposals for action include that:
H11 196 _|(**=i) the Departments of Health and Education
H11 197 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 198 _|(a) review recruiting campaigns in order to attract to the
H11 199 profession such under-represented groups as men and Maori and Pacific
H11 200 Island people.
H11 201 |(b) set up a national programme to promote nursing as a profession to
H11 202 potential recruits. ^This process includes consulting with technical
H11 203 institutes, employing agencies and key people in the community.
H11 204 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 205 |(**=ii) the National Council of Maori Nurses and local Maori groups
H11 206 be involved in the recruitment and selection of Maori applicants,
H11 207 |(**=iii) in addition to academic requirements the criteria for
H11 208 selection to nursing courses and programmes take cognisance of
H11 209 differing cultures, attributes and aptitudes of applicants,
H11 210 |(**=iv) technical institutes establish active mechanisms to encourage
H11 211 the inclusion and promotion of opportunities for groups which are
H11 212 currently under-represented in the nursing workforce,
H11 213 |(**=v) men be encouraged to undertake nursing as a career, whilst at
H11 214 the same time career opportunities for women in nursing are maintained
H11 215 and promoted.
H11 216 *<*6C1:4 PROMOTION AND MARKETING OF NURSING*>
H11 217 *<*0Recommendation 7  Promoting entry into the nursing profession*>
H11 218 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H11 219 |^That the Workforce Development Group of the Department of Health
H11 220 prepare a brief to facilitate joint involvement of the department, New
H11 221 Zealand Nurses' Association, employer and employee organisations in
H11 222 the development of programmes promoting entry into the nursing
H11 223 profession, including mechanisms for widespread dissemination of
H11 224 information.
H11 225 **[END INDENTATION**]
H11 226    |^The co-ordinated nursing and health workforce plan will
H11 227 determine the mix of the future nursing workforce and thus identify
H11 228 the specific areas for targeting and other special promotion
H11 229 strategies.
H11 230    |^A positive image of nursing needs to be portrayed.
H11 231    |^There is an uneven distribution of ethnic minorities and men in
H11 232 nursing courses throughout the country. ^This is due in part to the
H11 233 location of the various technical institutes/ community colleges which
H11 234 offer nursing courses and to the size of intakes.
H11 235    |^The imbalance in ethnic groupings entering the nursing
H11 236 profession needs to be redressed. ^Account needs to be taken of the
H11 237 particular ethnic mix in the geographical area.
H11 238    |^There is a need to increase the proportion of males entering
H11 239 nursing courses.
H11 240    |^There is a need to recruit nursing students from a diminishing
H11 241 pool of appropriately educated school leavers at a time when a wider
H11 242 choice of career options is being encouraged *- particularly via the
H11 243 *"Girls Can Do Anything**" campaign.
H11 244    |^There is a need for appropriate career counselling for school
H11 245 pupils.
H11 246    |^There is a need for students in areas without technical
H11 247 institute nursing courses to have access to nearby institutes with
H11 248 nursing courses.
H11 249    |^Proposals for action include that:
H11 250 _|(**=i) professional public relations consultants be employed to
H11 251 assist in the development of promotional material to ensure a positive
H11 252 image of nursing is portrayed.
H11 253 *#
H12 001 **[276 TEXT H12**]
H12 002 ^*0Scheme D is a more recent addition to the original list of
H12 003 possible schemes for development. ^The station characteristics
H12 004 are a revision of those included in the previous document.
H12 005    |^The maximum control levels quoted in table 14 represent
H12 006 the maximum lake elevations that would occur at each dam site
H12 007 during normal operation. ^All stations incorporate adequate
H12 008 generating capacity to pass 850 \0m*:3**:/\0sec (the full load
H12 009 discharge of Clyde power station) and any excess flows, which
H12 010 could not be stored within the 2 \0m operating range, would be
H12 011 discharged via spillway and/or sluice facilities. ^Each dam
H12 012 incorporates a 1 \0m flood range for the controlled passage of
H12 013 a 1:500 year flood event and all dams would have adequate
H12 014 discharge facilities to pass the Probable Maximum Flood. ^The
H12 015 total amount of storage available in the proposed reservoirs is
H12 016 small and no significant reductions in flood sizes below
H12 017 Tuapeka Mouth would be possible.
H12 018    |^The Otago Catchment Board has carried out a number of
H12 019 studies to assess the effects of hydro-electric generation at
H12 020 Roxburgh power station on channel erosion, river mouth
H12 021 instability and gravity drainage from the lower Clutha delta.
H12 022 ^The results of their investigation are discussed in their
H12 023 publications *"Clutha Catchment Water Allocation Plan *- a Land
H12 024 and Water Resource Inventory of the Clutha Catchment**"
H12 025 (reference \0No 32), and *"Water Resource Inventory Review
H12 026 (1985)**" (reference \0No 33). ^It is considered that some
H12 027 improvement in river stability and drainage could be achieved
H12 028 by minimising daily discharge variations from the lowest dam
H12 029 and achieving some reregulation in the river flow downstream of
H12 030 Tuapeka Mouth.
H12 031    |^Various possible operation strategies for Clyde,
H12 032 Roxburgh and a series of lower Clutha stations are discussed in
H12 033 reference \0No 30. ^The full operating range of Roxburgh could
H12 034 be used to absorb the large discharge variations from Clyde in
H12 035 an attempt to reregulate flows and minimise discharge
H12 036 variations from Roxburgh. ^Although a considerable amount of
H12 037 reregulation by Roxburgh appears possible, system demand and
H12 038 river flow variations would probably render complete
H12 039 reregulation impractical. ^The development of additional power
H12 040 stations on the river downstream of Roxburgh, could provide
H12 041 further opportunities for achieving reregulation on the river
H12 042 below Tuapeka Mouth.
H12 043    |^The adoption of an operation strategy which virtually
H12 044 eliminated variations in discharge below Tuapeka Mouth could be
H12 045 considered to be a worthwhile goal. ^However, preliminary
H12 046 studies indicate that reregulation of the river could
H12 047 effectively reduce the peak generating capability of a Clyde to
H12 048 Tuapeka Mouth hydro-electric development by up to 15 percent
H12 049 and cause significant reservoir level fluctuations. ^Daily
H12 050 reservoir level fluctuations would vary over a distribution of
H12 051 values, depending on the amount of river inflow and the
H12 052 generation pattern adopted. ^Preliminary studies indicate that
H12 053 reregulation of the river from scheme A would necessitate a
H12 054 daily lake level fluctuation of 1 \0m, upstream of a dam at
H12 055 Tuapeka Mouth, for a fully developed Clutha system operating in
H12 056 a peak loading mode during mean river inflows. ^For scheme D,
H12 057 operating under similar conditions, daily lake level
H12 058 fluctuations in excess of 1 \0m would be necessary upstream of
H12 059 dams at Tuapeka Mouth and Birch Island.
H12 060    |^The operation rules finally adopted for a particular
H12 061 hydro-electric scheme on the lower Clutha could have
H12 062 significant upstream and downstream implications on both the
H12 063 water resource and its various uses. ^Studies completed to date
H12 064 have provided an indication of the likely effects that could
H12 065 accompany each scheme generating under a series of alternative
H12 066 operation strategies, ranging from existing Roxburgh discharge
H12 067 patterns to reregulation of river flows downstream of Tuapeka
H12 068 Mouth. ^At a later investigation stage ({0eg}, the preparation
H12 069 of an environmental impact report on a particular
H12 070 hydro-electric scheme for development on the lower Clutha) it
H12 071 will be necessary to carry out additional studies to determine
H12 072 a preferred operation strategy for the Clutha system. ^All of
H12 073 the schemes included in this report are capable of being
H12 074 operated in a manner which achieves reregulation of the river
H12 075 below Tuapeka Mouth.
H12 076    |^All four schemes include a Dumbarton Rock component
H12 077 which could comprise a dam at Dumbarton Rock, a canal across
H12 078 the Teviot Flat and a powerhouse on the left bank of the river
H12 079 opposite Marsh Road. ^The quantity of water available for
H12 080 electricity generation from such an arrangement would be
H12 081 affected by any minimum residual flow requirement in the
H12 082 existing river channel downstream of Dumbarton Rock. ^In
H12 083 general terms, an increase in minimum residual flow from 25
H12 084 \0m*:3**:/\0sec to 75 \0m*:3**:/\0sec (5 to 15 percent of mean
H12 085 river flow) would reduce annual generation by some 10 percent
H12 086 (460 \0GWh to 410 \0GWh). ^For the purposes of this report it
H12 087 has been assumed that a minimum residual flow of 50
H12 088 \0m*:3**:/\0sec would be required in the existing riverbed
H12 089 downstream of Dumbarton Rock.
H12 090    |^Alternatively, the same hydraulic head could be developed
H12 091 at Dumbarton Rock by deepening the river channel upstream of
H12 092 Marsh Road and constructing a dam/ powerhouse complex at the
H12 093 proposed dam site. ^With such an arrangement there would be no
H12 094 requirement for a residual river flow and the properties on
H12 095 Teviot Flat would remain essentially unaffected by development.
H12 096 ^Installed capacity and annual generation at Dumbarton Rock
H12 097 would increase to 110 \0MW and 480 \0GWh/annum respectively
H12 098 (see table 14).
H12 099    |^Any later decision to further investigate the merits of
H12 100 a Dumbarton Rock development would have to consider the
H12 101 relative advantages and disadvantages of each possible
H12 102 alternative. ^Such an investigation would have to include a
H12 103 residual flow study to more adequately determine an acceptable
H12 104 minimum residual flow for the river. ^Minimum residual flows in
H12 105 the river would be increased during the passage of floodwaters
H12 106 and other flows surplus to generation requirements. ^A
H12 107 Dumbarton Rock dam/ canal/ powerhouse scheme component would be
H12 108 operated in a manner which ensured that the rates of change of
H12 109 flow in the residual river would be kept within reasonable
H12 110 limits.
H12 111 *<*43.3.3 Dumbarton Rock*>
H12 112    |^*0As mentioned above a Dumbarton Rock power station is a
H12 113 common component of all schemes included in this report.
H12 114    |^An integrated dam/ powerhouse development at Dumbarton
H12 115 Rock would operate under a gross hydraulic head of about 11 \0m
H12 116 at mean river inflow conditions. ^Such a complex would produce
H12 117 relatively expensive power and the economics of development
H12 118 could be significantly improved by either:
H12 119 _|(a) constructing a canal across Teviot Flat and a powerhouse
H12 120 on the left bank of the river downstream of Marsh Road to
H12 121 increase the gross hydraulic head to some 16 \0m; or
H12 122 |(b) deepening the river channel upstream of Marsh Road to
H12 123 increase the hydraulic head to some 16 \0m at a Dumbarton Rock
H12 124 integrated dam/ powerhouse.
H12 125    |^Both alternatives have been investigated in detail and
H12 126 both are considered feasible. ^The single dam/ powerhouse
H12 127 complex at Dumbarton Rock would not significantly affect the
H12 128 properties on Teviot Flat and would utilise a higher proportion
H12 129 of the available river flow; however, its long term generation
H12 130 potential could be affected by any later necessity to sluice
H12 131 accumulated materials from the small Dumbarton Rock reservoir.
H12 132 ^Studies completed to date indicate that the single dam/
H12 133 powerhouse complex at Dumbarton Rock would have a slight
H12 134 economic advantage over the dam/ canal/ powerhouse alternative.
H12 135 ^On the other hand the absence of the canal would make
H12 136 community irrigation of Millers Flat more expensive to develop
H12 137 because of the resulting increase in the length of the supply
H12 138 line.
H12 139    |^All schemes included in this report incorporate the dam/
H12 140 canal/ powerhouse development alternative at Dumbarton Rock.
H12 141 ^This choice does not indicate an engineering preference for
H12 142 the alternative. ^It merely provides the opportunity to
H12 143 identify and discuss likely downstream impacts that would
H12 144 accompany the construction and operation of a canal across
H12 145 Teviot Flat and a powerhouse on the left bank of the river
H12 146 downstream of Marsh Road. ^Impacts at the Dumbarton Rock dam
H12 147 site would be reasonably similar for either alternative.
H12 148    |^The main features of a Dumbarton Rock power station
H12 149 would be:
H12 150 *<(**=i) Dumbarton Rock Dam Site and Reservoir*>
H12 151    |^The geology of the dam site area is dominated by bedrock
H12 152 schist overlain by some 8 \0m of gravels in the existing
H12 153 riverbed, and Tertiary sediments and gravels between the
H12 154 existing State highway and the prominent rock outcrop on the
H12 155 right bank of the river. ^Seismic profiling and drilling
H12 156 indicate that rock quality at the proposed dam site is
H12 157 variable. ^Good rock conditions exist in both abutments and
H12 158 across the majority of the existing riverbed. ^A narrow zone of
H12 159 sheared and shattered rock has been identified within the
H12 160 existing river channel adjacent to the right abutment. ^It is
H12 161 considered that the proposed site offers good foundation
H12 162 conditions for the construction of the dam or dam and
H12 163 powerhouse facilities.
H12 164    |^The type of development presently envisaged at the dam
H12 165 site would comprise a gate controlled spillway approximately 15
H12 166 \0m high in the existing riverbed, a gate controlled canal
H12 167 inlet structure on the left bank and a gate controlled
H12 168 diversion/ auxilliary spillway facility on the right bank. ^Any
H12 169 downstream residual flow requirement would be accommodated by
H12 170 the continual operation of one or more spillway gates. ^For the
H12 171 combined dam/ powerhouse alternative, the powerhouse would be
H12 172 situated within the existing riverbed and all diversion and
H12 173 spillway facilities would be provided on the right bank.
H12 174    |^At a maximum control level of 85.5 \0m the reservoir
H12 175 would be largely confined within the existing river channel and
H12 176 would extend to Roxburgh power station. ^Two existing
H12 177 landslides have been identified in the reservoir reach *- the
H12 178 Roxburgh Slide, on the right bank of the river between Roxburgh
H12 179 and Roxburgh power station, and the Benger Slide on the right
H12 180 bank of the river between Roxburgh and Dumbarton Rock. ^The
H12 181 Roxburgh Slide does not extend down to the existing river
H12 182 channel and would not be affected by the proposed reservoir. ^A
H12 183 short section of the Benger Slide does extend down to the
H12 184 existing river channel; however the proposed reservoir would
H12 185 have no significant effect on its existing stability.
H12 186 *<(**=ii) Dumbarton Rock Canal and Powerhouse*>
H12 187    |^The length of the canal, between the canal inlet
H12 188 structure and the powerhouse, would be approximately 4.5 \0km.
H12 189 ^The water depth in the canal would be approximately 10 \0m and
H12 190 the water surface width would approximate 60 \0m. ^The entire
H12 191 waterway area would be concrete lined.
H12 192    |^Between the Dumbarton Rock dam site and the proposed
H12 193 powerhouse site the basement schist is overlain by Tertiary
H12 194 sediments and late Quaternary terrace gravels. ^Seismic
H12 195 profiling and drilling indicate that the entire canal would be
H12 196 located in gravels. ^With the adoption of 2:1 excavation slopes
H12 197 and the inclusion of adequate access berms the overall canal
H12 198 excavation width would approximate 80 \0m.
H12 199    |^For the canal/ powerhouse altenative the powerhouse
H12 200 would be located on the left bank of the river, approximately 1
H12 201 \0km downstream of Marsh Road. ^The powerhouse would be founded
H12 202 on bedrock schist which is overlain at the proposed site by up
H12 203 to 20 \0m of Tertiary sediments and gravels. ^Slopes of 2:1 to
H12 204 3:1 would be necessary at the site to achieve adequate
H12 205 stability in the overlying materials.
H12 206 *<*43.3.4 Beaumont*>
H12 207    |^*0A Beaumont development is a common component of
H12 208 schemes A and D.
H12 209    |^An investigation programme was initiated at the site in
H12 210 1982 and found material which was generally indicative of a
H12 211 very strong relatively unfractured rock mass, with little
H12 212 weathering penetration. ^While the investigation indicated that
H12 213 the site would provide good foundation conditions for the
H12 214 proposed dam and powerhouse, the topography of the site would
H12 215 have necessitated a diversion of the river through a tunnel in
H12 216 the right abutment during construction. ^A tunnel diversion
H12 217 would have been a very expensive solution for the relatively
H12 218 low head, minimum impact development envisaged at Beaumont and
H12 219 investigation moved some 400 \0m downstream, where a cheaper
H12 220 open-cut diversion of the river during construction appeared
H12 221 possible.
H12 222    |^The geology of the preferred downstream site is
H12 223 dominated by bedrock schist which is overlain by some 8 \0m of
H12 224 gravel in the existing riverbed, and up to 5 \0m of sand and
H12 225 gravel on the left bank. ^Investigation results indicate that
H12 226 excellent rock conditions exist in both abutments and across
H12 227 the majority of the existing riverbed. ^A zone of sheared and
H12 228 crushed rock, some 10 \0m in total width, has been identified
H12 229 in the existing river channel adjacent to the right abutment.
H12 230 ^It is considered that the downstream site offers good
H12 231 foundation conditions for the construction of the proposed dam
H12 232 and powerhouse.
H12 233    |^The type of development presently envisaged at the site
H12 234 would comprise a 30 \0m high concrete gravity dam and
H12 235 powerhouse in the existing riverbed, and gate controlled
H12 236 diversion and spillway facilities on the left bank.
H12 237 *#
H13 001 **[277 TEXT H13**]
H13 002    |*0*"(5) ^Every licensee who fails to keep records sufficient to
H13 003 enable the Collector to readily ascertain his liability to duty
H13 004 commits an offence and shall be liable to a fine not exceeding
H13 005 *+$2,000.
H13 006    |*"(6) ^Every licensee who fails to supply the Collector with
H13 007 sufficient records to enable his liability to be readily ascertained
H13 008 or who fails when requested by the Collector to operate the mechanical
H13 009 or electronic device on which records are stored so as to allow the
H13 010 Collector to ascertain readily the information contained therein,
H13 011 commits an offence and shall be liable to a fine not exceeding *+$500
H13 012 together with a fine of *+$50 for every day that the licensee
H13 013 continues to offend.
H13 014    |*"97. ^*4Power to question persons *- *0(1) ^Where any question
H13 015 has arisen under this Part of this Act, the Collector may question any
H13 016 person as to the particulars shown in any entry delivered to him by a
H13 017 licensee in accordance with this Act, or any person dealing in
H13 018 dutiable goods for any purpose relating to the administration or
H13 019 enforcement of this Act.
H13 020    |*"(2) ^Any person who, on being so questioned, refuses or fails
H13 021 to answer any questions so put to him or to answer any such question
H13 022 in writing if so required by the Collector, or answers any such
H13 023 question incorrectly, commits an offence.
H13 024    |*"98. ^*4Duty payable on goods consumed before removal from
H13 025 licensed premises *- ^Duty shall be payable on goods consumed before
H13 026 removal from a licensed premises**[SIC**] in the same manner as if the
H13 027 goods had been removed on the date they had been consumed and the
H13 028 provisions of this Act shall, with all necessary modifications, apply
H13 029 accordingly.
H13 030    |*"99. ^*4Goods not to be removed without permission *-  (1)
H13 031 ^Except as provided by this Act, no goods that are subject to the
H13 032 control of the Customs shall be removed from any licensed premises
H13 033 except *-
H13 034 _|*"(a) With the permission of the proper officer of Customs after
H13 035 entry has been made and passed in respect thereof; or
H13 036 |*"(b) In pursuance of a written permit granted by the Collector in
H13 037 respect thereof.
H13 038    |*"(2) ^Every person who acts in contravention of this section
H13 039 commits an offence and shall be liable to a fine not exceeding *+$500
H13 040 or the value of the goods in respect of which the offence is
H13 041 committed, whichever sum is the greater.
H13 042    |*"(3) ^Any goods removed in contravention of this section shall
H13 043 be forfeited.
H13 044 *<*1*"Special Provisions for Export Warehouses*>
H13 045    |*0*"100. ^*4Entry for delivery to export warehouse *-  ^*0When
H13 046 any imported goods or goods manufactured in a manufacturing area have
H13 047 been entered for delivery to an export warehouse, the importer or
H13 048 supplier shall forthwith deliver them in accordance with the entry
H13 049 without payment of duty in the first instance, except where otherwise
H13 050 provided in this Act.
H13 051    |*"101. ^*4Temporary removal of export warehoused goods *-  *0(1)
H13 052 ^Subject to any regulations made under this Act, the Collector may
H13 053 permit the taking of warehoused goods out of the export warehouse
H13 054 without payment of duty for any temporary purpose for such convenient
H13 055 time and in such suitable quantities as he may approve, if sufficient
H13 056 security is taken for the return of the goods and payment of the duty
H13 057 thereon.
H13 058    |*"(2) ^So long as any goods so removed remain subject to the
H13 059 control of the Customs they shall be deemed to be warehoused in the
H13 060 export warehouse from which they were so removed, and all the
H13 061 provisions of this Act shall continue to apply thereto accordingly.
H13 062    |*"102. ^*4Liability of licensee for duty on missing goods *-
H13 063 *0(1) ^If any dutiable goods are removed from an export warehouse by
H13 064 any person without the authority of the proper officer of Customs, or
H13 065 if any dutiable goods, after, being warehoused, are not produced by
H13 066 the licensee to the Collector or other proper officer on demand made
H13 067 at the warehouse and are not accounted for as having been lawfully
H13 068 delivered from the warehouse, duty shall thereupon become due and
H13 069 payable on those goods as if entered for home consumption.
H13 070    |*"(2) ^The duty shall constitute a debt due to the Crown by the
H13 071 licensee, the importer, and the owner who shall be jointly and
H13 072 severally liable therefor, subject to the provisions of this Act
H13 073 relating to refunds and remissions of duty.
H13 074 *<*1*"Clearance of Export Warehoused Goods*>
H13 075    |*0*"103. ^*4Kinds of entry of goods from export warehouse *-
H13 076 ^*0Export warehoused goods may at any time be entered in the
H13 077 prescribed manner *-
H13 078 _|*"(a) For export; or
H13 079 |*"(b) For removal to another export warehouse; or
H13 080 |*"(c) For home consumption under conditions as may be approved by the
H13 081 Comptroller.
H13 082    |*"104. ^*4Entry for export *- ^*0When any goods in an export
H13 083 warehouse have been entered for export the person making the entry
H13 084 shall forthwith export the goods to a country outside New Zealand in
H13 085 accordance with the entry and with the provisions of this Act relating
H13 086 to the exportation of goods.
H13 087    |*"105. ^*4Entry for removal *- *0(1) ^When any goods have been
H13 088 entered for removal to an export warehouse licensed under this Act,
H13 089 they shall forthwith be removed in accordance with the entry, subject
H13 090 to such conditions as may be prescribed and with such security for
H13 091 their due transmission and for payment of the duty thereon as the
H13 092 Collector requires.
H13 093    |*"(2) ^On arrival of the goods at the port or place of
H13 094 destination they shall be entered and warehoused in accordance with
H13 095 the entry for removal and in the case of imported goods in the same
H13 096 manner and subject to the same provisions, so far as applicable, as in
H13 097 the case of the entry of goods on the first importation thereof.
H13 098    |*"106. ^*4Entry for home consumption *- ^*0When entry for home
H13 099 consumption has been made under conditions as may be approved by the
H13 100 Comptroller in respect of any warehoused goods, the person making the
H13 101 entry, not being an agent, shall pay on demand to the Collector or
H13 102 other proper officer the duties, if any, payable thereon.
H13 103 *<*1*"Special Provisions for Manufacturing Areas*>
H13 104    |*0*"107. ^*4Entry for delivery to manufacturing area *-  ^*0When
H13 105 any imported goods have been entered for delivery to a manufacturing
H13 106 area the importer shall forthwith deliver them in accordance with the
H13 107 entry, and the importer shall pay to the Collector or other proper
H13 108 officer the duties, if any, payable thereon in accordance with section
H13 109 152 or section 151A of this Act, as the case may be.
H13 110    |*"108. ^*4Manufacture of excisable goods *- *0(1) ^Subject to
H13 111 sections 109 and 110 of this Act, no person shall manufacture any
H13 112 goods specified in the Third Schedule to this Act except in a
H13 113 manufacturing area licensed under this Act.
H13 114    |*"(2) ^Every person who acts in contravention of this section
H13 115 commits an offence and shall be liable to a fine not exceeding *+$500
H13 116 or 3 times the amount of duty that would have been payable on the
H13 117 goods to which the offence relates if they had been manufactured in a
H13 118 manufacturing area licensed as aforesaid and duly entered for home
H13 119 consumption, whichever sum is the greater, and the goods shall be
H13 120 forfeited.
H13 121    |*"109. ^*4Exemptions *- ^*0Section 108 of this Act shall not
H13 122 apply to *-
H13 123 _|*"(a) Any person who, having grown tobacco on his own land,
H13 124 manufactures it exclusively for his own use or for the use of any
H13 125 members of his own family residing with him, and not for disposal to
H13 126 any other person by sale, barter, or otherwise:
H13 127 |*"(b) Any person who produces beer or wine exclusively for his own
H13 128 use or for the use of any members of his own family residing with him,
H13 129 and not for disposal to any other person by sale, barter, or
H13 130 otherwise.
H13 131    |*"110. ^*4Directions of Minister as to licensing *- *0(1) ^If, in
H13 132 the opinion of the Minister, it is undesirable in the public interest
H13 133 or impracticable or unnecessary that a person who carries on business
H13 134 as a manufacturer of goods specified in the Third Schedule to this Act
H13 135 should be licensed, the Minister may, in the Minister's discretion and
H13 136 under such conditions as to the payment of duty or otherwise as the
H13 137 Minister thinks fit, direct that the person need not be licensed for
H13 138 such period as the Minister thinks fit.
H13 139    |*"(2) ^Any direction under this section shall have effect
H13 140 according to its tenor and may be given in respect of the whole or any
H13 141 specified part of the business of the manufacturer to which it
H13 142 relates. ^Any such direction shall exempt the manufacturer from such
H13 143 provisions of this Act as may be specified in the direction.
H13 144    |*"111. ^*4Maturation period of brandy and whisky *- ^*0No brandy
H13 145 or whisky distilled in New Zealand shall be delivered from a licensed
H13 146 manufacturing area unless the Comptroller is satisfied that it has
H13 147 been matured by storage in wood for not less than 3 years.
H13 148    |*"112. ^*4Licensee leaving New Zealand *- ^*0If the Collector has
H13 149 reason to believe that a licensee is about to leave New Zealand before
H13 150 any duty owing by the licensee becomes payable in accordance with the
H13 151 provisions of this Act, the duty shall, if the Collector thinks fit,
H13 152 be payable on such earlier date as the Collector fixes and notifies to
H13 153 the licensee in that behalf.
H13 154    |*"113. ^*4Goods deemed to have been manufactured *- *0(1) ^For
H13 155 the purposes of this Act *-
H13 156 _|*"(a) Compressed natural gas shall be deemed to have been
H13 157 manufactured by a licensee of a manufacturing area on his premises
H13 158 when natural gas supplied by him to a compressed natural gas fuelling
H13 159 facility is compressed for use as a motor vehicle fuel:
H13 160 |*"(b) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, goods on which work
H13 161 has been done by a contractor shall be deemed to have been
H13 162 manufactured by the contractor.
H13 163    |*"(2) ^Where the Minister is of the opinion that in any
H13 164 particular case the application of subsection (1)(b) of this section
H13 165 is inequitable in respect of motor vehicles assembled under contract
H13 166 for the owner, and the owner is the importer of the imported
H13 167 components used in the assembly, the Minister may, in the Minister's
H13 168 discretion, and subject to any conditions that may be imposed,
H13 169 determine that, for the purposes of this Act, the owner is deemed to
H13 170 be the manufacturer of the motor vehicles and the place of security
H13 171 for the deposit, keeping, and securing of the motor vehicles by the
H13 172 owner is deemed to be the place where the motor vehicles are
H13 173 manufactured.
H13 174    |*"l14. ^*4Manufacture may be prohibited on non-payment of excise
H13 175 duty *- ^*0Every licensee who fails to pay any excise duty which is
H13 176 properly due may, by notice under the hand of the Collector, be
H13 177 prohibited from manufacturing and every licensee who manufactures
H13 178 goods or classes of goods specified in the Third Schedule to this Act
H13 179 without the permission of the Collector after the receipt of such a
H13 180 notice shall be deemed to have manufactured excisable goods without a
H13 181 licence.
H13 182 *<*1*"Clearance of Goods from Manufacturing Area*>
H13 183    |*0*"115. ^*4Kinds of entry of goods from manufacturing area *-
H13 184 ^Goods specified in the Third Schedule to this Act may be entered in
H13 185 the prescribed manner *-
H13 186 _|*"(a) For home consumption; or
H13 187 |*"(b) For export; or
H13 188 |*"(c) For removal to another licensed manufacturing area for
H13 189 manufacture or to an export warehouse.
H13 190    |*"116. ^*4Entry for home consumption *- *0(1) ^Every licensee
H13 191 shall, within 7 days after the end of each calendar month, deliver to
H13 192 the Collector for the district specified in his licence a home
H13 193 consumption entry in the prescribed form setting forth such
H13 194 particulars as the entry may require in respect of all goods removed
H13 195 for home consumption during that calendar month.
H13 196    |*"(2) ^Where for any reason there are no goods removed for home
H13 197 consumption, every licensee shall be required to deliver a nil entry
H13 198 for the period to which it relates.
H13 199    |*"(3) ^For the purposes of this section the Collector may, in his
H13 200 discretion, by writing under his hand, permit any licensee who would
H13 201 otherwise, in the opinion of the Collector, usually deliver a home
H13 202 consumption entry in respect of which no duty was payable, to deliver
H13 203 a home consumption entry in respect of any period longer than one
H13 204 calendar month but not exceeding one calendar year, and in the
H13 205 application of this section to any such case, the term *'calendar
H13 206 month**' shall mean such permitted period, and the last day of that
H13 207 period shall be deemed to be the end of the month.
H13 208    |*"(4) ^Where the licensee of a manufacturing area *-
H13 209 _|*"(a) Purchases materials for use for manufacture; or
H13 210 |*"(b) Purchases for resale any goods manufactured by him, being goods
H13 211 sold on or after the 1st day of October 1986, at the same price at
H13 212 which he sold them, the licensee may claim as a credit in the home
H13 213 consumption entry provided by him under subsection (1) of this section
H13 214 any excise duty paid or payable in respect of those materials or
H13 215 goods:
H13 216 |*"Provided that, in the case of goods purchased for resale, the
H13 217 subsequent resale shall be deemed to be a removal for home
H13 218 consumption, and the credit shall not be claimable or allowable until
H13 219 the subsequent resale occurs.
H13 220 *#
H14 001 **[278 TEXT H14**]
H14 002 |^*2BE IT ENACTED *0by the General Assembly of New Zealand in
H14 003 Parliament assembled, and by the authority of the same, as follows:
H14 004    |*41. ^Short Title *- ^*0This Act may be cited as the Auckland
H14 005 Improvement Trust Amendment Act 1986, and shall be read together with
H14 006 and deemed part of the Auckland Improvement Trust Act 1971
H14 007 (hereinafter referred to as the principal Act).
H14 008    |*42. ^Interpretation *- *0(1) ^Section 2 of the principal Act is
H14 009 hereby amended by repealing the definition of the term
H14 010 *"Corporation**".
H14 011    |(2) ^The principal Act is hereby amended by omitting the word
H14 012 *"Corporation**" wherever it occurs, and substituting in each case the
H14 013 word *"Council**".
H14 014    |*43. ^Old Synagogue building and curtilage  *- *0(1) ^Section 4
H14 015 of the principal Act is hereby amended by repealing subsection (6),
H14 016 and substituting the following subsections:
H14 017    |*"(6) ^Until the Council passes a resolution under subsection
H14 018 (5) of this section in respect of the land thirdly described in the
H14 019 First Schedule to this Act (old Synagogue site), or in respect of any
H14 020 part of it, the Council may let or lease the same or any remaining
H14 021 part to which such a resolution has not been applied, for such
H14 022 professional, commercial, cultural, or community purposes as the
H14 023 Council considers will be likely to require minimum interference with
H14 024 the external appearance of the old Synagogue building, yet will ensure
H14 025 that the building is kept in constant use.
H14 026    |*"(6A) ^Any such letting or leasing may permit the tenant or
H14 027 lessee, subject to the Council's supervision, to make alterations or
H14 028 additions to that building, within the foregoing limitations, but the
H14 029 Council may nevertheless permit the demolition or replacement of any
H14 030 other building on the said land if, in the Council's opinion, such
H14 031 demolition or replacement would enhance the appearance or impact of
H14 032 the old Synagogue building and will assist with the financial
H14 033 viability of the use to which the property is to be put.
H14 034    |*"(6B) ^Any use of the said land and of any building on it, and
H14 035 any proposed alteration to the old Synagogue building, shall comply
H14 036 with the provisions of the Town and Country Planning Act 1977 and of
H14 037 the Historic Places Act 1980.
H14 038    |*"(6C) ^Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Act,
H14 039 any lease granted pursuant to subsection (6) of this section may be
H14 040 for such term, either less or more than 21 years, as the Council
H14 041 thinks fit, but any lease for a total term in excess of the period
H14 042 authorised by section 4A(1)(b) of this Act shall contain a provision
H14 043 that it may be terminated by the Council at any time after the
H14 044 expiration of the maximum period stated in that section (which shall
H14 045 run from the date of commencement of that lease or any earlier lease
H14 046 granted pursuant to this Act) after having given not less than 12
H14 047 months' notice in writing of intention so to do, if in the Council's
H14 048 opinion it is in the public interest that the lease should be
H14 049 terminated so as to make the property available for the public in
H14 050 general.
H14 051    |*"(6D) ^Any termination of a lease under subsection (6C) of this
H14 052 section shall be subject to the payment of compensation by the Council
H14 053 to the lessee for the fair market value of the undertaking as a going
H14 054 concern and, in determining the fair market value, regard shall be had
H14 055 to such matters as may be appropriate including, but not by way of
H14 056 limitation, the following matters:
H14 057 _|*"(a) The value of the lessee's improvements (as defined in section
H14 058 2 of the Valuation of Land Act 1951) at the time of termination:
H14 059 |*"(b) The value of chattels, fixtures, and fittings:
H14 060 |*"(c) The value of goodwill.
H14 061    |*"(6E) ^In case of disagreement, the fair market value shall be
H14 062 determined by arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration Act 1908.
H14 063    |*"(6F) ^Section 4A(1)(g) of this Act shall be read subject to
H14 064 the provisions of subsections (6A) and (6C) of this section.
H14 065    |*"(6G) ^Any tenant or lessee of the said land or any part of it
H14 066 may, with the prior written consent of the Council, sublet or sublease
H14 067 a portion of the land for such term and subject to such conditions and
H14 068 restrictions as the Council may stipulate.
H14 069    |*"(6H) ^Any resolution passed pursuant to subsection (5) of this
H14 070 section, and any letting or leasing or subletting or subleasing as
H14 071 authorised by this section, shall be deemed not to be a subdivision of
H14 072 the land thirdly described in the First Schedule to this Act for the
H14 073 purposes of Part *=XX of the Local Government Act 1974 or for any
H14 074 other purpose.**"
H14 075    |(2) ^Section 2(3) of the Auckland Improvement Trust Amendment
H14 076 Act 1973 is hereby consequentially repealed.
H14 077    |*44. ^General powers of Council *- *0(1) ^Section 6(1) of the
H14 078 principal Act (as amended by section 4 of the Auckland Improvement
H14 079 Trust Amendment Act 1973) is hereby amended by omitting the words
H14 080 *"and the buildings and curtilages thereof and the old Synagogue
H14 081 building referred to in subsection (6) of section 4 of this Act**",
H14 082 and substituting the words *"and the buildings and curtilages thereof
H14 083 and the land thirdly described in the First Schedule to this Act**".
H14 084    |(2) ^Section 4 of the Auckland Improvement Trust Amendment Act
H14 085 1973 is hereby consequentially repealed.
H14 086    |*45. ^Application of income *- ^*0Section 8 of the principal Act
H14 087 is hereby amended by repealing paragraph (c), and substituting the
H14 088 following paragraph:
H14 089    |*"(c) ^In works of public utility or ornament in the City of
H14 090 Auckland, or in furtherance of recreation, education, science, and
H14 091 art, or for the improvement of any form of culture, or for the
H14 092 improvement or development of amenities for the public:**".
H14 093    |*46. ^Existing rights preserved *- ^*0Nothing in section 3 of
H14 094 this Act shall deprive any person of any rights of occupancy of any
H14 095 part of the land thirdly described in the First Schedule to the
H14 096 principal Act in existence on the commencement of this Act, or
H14 097 prejudice any such rights; and the powers conferred by the said
H14 098 section 3 shall not be exercised in respect of any part of the said
H14 099 land to which any such rights apply until those rights have been
H14 100 extinguished.
H14 101 *<*4An Act to amend the Auckland City Council (Rating Relief)
H14 102 Empowering Act 1980*>
H14 103 |*2BE IT ENACTED *0by the General Assembly of New Zealand in
H14 104 Parliament assembled, and by the authority of the same, as follows:
H14 105    |*41. ^Short Title *- ^*0This Act may be cited as the Auckland
H14 106 City Council (Rating Relief) Empowering Amendment Act 1986, and shall
H14 107 be read together with and deemed part of the Auckland City Council
H14 108 (Rating Relief) Empowering Act 1980 (hereinafter referred to as the
H14 109 principal Act).
H14 110    |*42. ^Further matters to which regard shall be had in deciding
H14 111 whether to grant relief *- ^*0Section 3(2) of the principal Act is
H14 112 hereby amended *-
H14 113 _|(a) By adding to paragraph (d) the word *"; and**":
H14 114 |(b) By adding the following paragraph:
H14 115 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H14 116 |*"(e) ^The nature and extent of free public amenities and public
H14 117 facilities (additional to those conferring structural benefits under
H14 118 the Council's district planning scheme) proposed to be included in the
H14 119 development, including, but without limiting the generality thereof,
H14 120 public viewing areas and rest rooms, landscaping and environmental
H14 121 improvements, fountains, and outdoor sculpture.**"
H14 122 **[END INDENTATION**]
H14 123    |*43. ^New section added *- ^*0The principal Act is hereby
H14 124 amended by adding the following section:
H14 125    |*"8. ^*4Suspension or limitation of this Act *- *0(1)
H14 126 ^Notwithstanding anything contained or implied in the provisions of
H14 127 this Act, the Council, by resolution publicly notified, may determine
H14 128 that those provisions, either indefinitely or for such period as may
H14 129 be specified in the resolution, *-
H14 130 _|*"(a) Shall be wholly suspended:
H14 131 |*"(b) Shall apply only to such types of development as may be
H14 132 specified in the resolution:
H14 133 |*"(c) Shall apply only to developments situated or proposed to be
H14 134 situated in such part or parts of its district as may be specified in
H14 135 the resolution:
H14 136 |*"(d) Shall apply only to such types of development as may be
H14 137 specified in the resolution and which are situated or proposed to be
H14 138 situated in such part or parts of its district as may be so specified
H14 139 *-
H14 140 |and may from time to time cancel or modify any such resolution by a
H14 141 subsequent resolution publicly notified.
H14 142    |*"(2) ^No resolution made under this section shall apply to any
H14 143 development in respect of which *-
H14 144 _|*"(a) A remission or postponement of rates has been granted; or
H14 145 |*"(b) An application has been made and not finally dealt with *-
H14 146 |under this Act before the date on which the resolution was made.
H14 147    |*"(3) ^In this section, the term *'publicly notified**' has the
H14 148 same meaning as is given to it by section 2 of the Local Government
H14 149 Act 1974.**"
H14 150 *<*4An Act to empower the Dunedin City Council to grant relief from
H14 151 rate commitments during the development or redevelopment of certain
H14 152 properties for industrial, commercial, or administrative purposes*>
H14 153 |*2BE IT ENACTED *0by the General Assembly of New Zealand in
H14 154 Parliament assembled, and by the authority of the same, as follows:
H14 155    |*41. ^Short Title *- ^*0This Act may be cited as the Dunedin
H14 156 City Council (Rating Relief) Empowering Act 1986.
H14 157    |*42. ^Interpretation *- ^*0In this Act, unless the context
H14 158 otherwise requires, *-
H14 159 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H14 160 |*"Council**" means the Dunedin City Council:
H14 161 |*"Development**" means the construction, erection, or alteration of
H14 162 any building or buildings intended to be used solely or principally
H14 163 for industrial or commercial or administrative purposes (including,
H14 164 but not by way of limitation, hotels, motels, and other transient
H14 165 accommodation), or any combination of those purposes, where the
H14 166 estimated cost of the construction, erection, or alteration will
H14 167 exceed *+$1,000,000.
H14 168 **[END INDENTATION**]
H14 169    |*43. ^Power to remit or postpone rates on a development *- *0(1)
H14 170 ^Notwithstanding anything in any other Act, but subject to subsection
H14 171 (2) of this section, the Council may by resolution, as a means of
H14 172 encouraging development in its district, remit or postpone for such
H14 173 time as it thinks fit the payment of any rates in respect of any
H14 174 rateable property (within the meaning of the Rating Act 1967) in
H14 175 respect of which any development is taking place or is about to take
H14 176 place.
H14 177    |(2) ^In deciding whether so to grant relief and, if so, to what
H14 178 extent relief shall be granted, the Council shall pay due regard to
H14 179 the following matters:
H14 180 _|(a) Whether, and to what extent, the development when completed will
H14 181 be to the financial advantage of its district (including the creation
H14 182 of employment opportunities); and
H14 183 |(b) Whether, and to what extent, the viability of the development
H14 184 might be compromised or prejudicially affected by a refusal to grant
H14 185 relief; and
H14 186 |(c) The timetable for implementing the development for the purpose of
H14 187 ascertaining whether the granting of relief would encourage an earlier
H14 188 completion date; and
H14 189 |(d) The location of the proposed development; and
H14 190 |(e) The nature and extent of any free public amenities or public
H14 191 facilities (additional to those conferring structural benefits under
H14 192 the Council's district planning scheme) proposed to be included in the
H14 193 development, including, but not by way of limitation, public viewing
H14 194 areas and rest rooms, landscaping and environmental improvements,
H14 195 fountains, and outdoor sculpture.
H14 196    |(3) ^In remitting or postponing any rates pursuant to this Act,
H14 197 the Council may remit or postpone the whole or a part of the rates
H14 198 otherwise payable for a whole year or years, or for any lesser period,
H14 199 or may provide for a combination of remitting and postponing rates.
H14 200    |(4) ^A resolution under this section shall not be passed by the
H14 201 Council at any meeting from which the public has been excluded under
H14 202 section 4 of the Public Bodies Meetings Act 1962.
H14 203    |*44. ^Objection by developer against decision of Council *-
H14 204 *0(1) ^Any person whose application for a remission or postponement of
H14 205 rates under this Act has been refused may object against the decision
H14 206 of the Council.
H14 207    |(2) ^The provisions of subsections (3) to (5) of section 90 of
H14 208 the Rating Act 1967, with the necessary modifications, shall apply in
H14 209 respect of objections under this section as if references in those
H14 210 subsections to a territorial authority were references to the Council.
H14 211    |*45. ^Continuation of remission or postponement after completion
H14 212 of development *- ^*0The Council may continue a remission or
H14 213 postponement of rates under this Act in respect of not more than 3
H14 214 rating years commencing on the 1st day of April next following the
H14 215 date on which, in the Council's opinion, the development was
H14 216 completed.
H14 217    |*46. ^Registration of charges for postponed rates *- ^*0Where
H14 218 any rates have been, are, or will be postponed under this Act, the
H14 219 provisions of section 96 of the Rating Act 1967, with the necessary
H14 220 modifications, shall apply in respect of the postponement as if
H14 221 references in that section to a local authority were references to the
H14 222 Council.
H14 223    |*47. ^Council may impose conditions when granting relief *-
H14 224 ^*0The Council may remit or postpone rates under this Act subject to
H14 225 such conditions as to completion of the development concerned as it
H14 226 thinks fit.
H14 227 *#
H15 001 **[279 TEXT H15**]
H15 002    |*49. ^\0Mr *6PETERS *0(Tauranga), on behalf of *4\0Mr
H15 003 *6TOWNSHEND *0(Kaimai), to the *4Minister of Immigration: ^*0What
H15 004 consultations were held with Pacific Island countries before the
H15 005 announced extension of the number of countries from which skilled
H15 006 persons qualifying under the occupational priority list may immigrate;
H15 007 and what mechanism is now in place to stop the drainage of skills from
H15 008 Pacific Islands, especially of those who have been technically and
H15 009 professionally trained in New Zealand for the benefit of their home
H15 010 countries?
H15 011    |^*4\0Hon. *6KERRY BURKE *0(Minister of Immigration): ^No
H15 012 specific consultations were held with the Pacific Island countries,
H15 013 nor with the more than 100 other countries involved in the policy
H15 014 change. ^As my statement of 18 February made clear, no change is
H15 015 envisaged with regard to the existing arrangements for Western Samoa,
H15 016 Australia, the Netherlands, the Cook Islands, Niue, or the Tokelau
H15 017 Islands. ^It will continue to be the practice not to entertain
H15 018 applications from students from Pacific Island developing countries or
H15 019 from other developing countries who trained in New Zealand under aid
H15 020 programmes or Government sponsorship until their obligations to their
H15 021 home Governments and countries have been fulfilled.
H15 022 *<*4Postal and Telecommunications Facilities*>
H15 023    |*610. ^JUDY KEALL *0(Glenfield) to the *4Postmaster-General:
H15 024 ^*0What capital expenditure by the Post Office in the 1986-87
H15 025 financial year will improve postal and telecommunications facilities
H15 026 in the Glenfield electorate?
H15 027    |^*4\0Hon. *6JONATHAN HUNT *0(Postmaster-General): ^The Post
H15 028 Office plans to invest some *+$2.8 million on telecommunications
H15 029 facilities in the Glenfield electorate during 1986-87, and is at
H15 030 present working towards decentralising postal operations in the North
H15 031 Shore area as a means of improving service. ^Four of the five post
H15 032 offices located within the Glenfield electorate *- namely Chequers,
H15 033 Glenfield, Glenfield North, and Greenhithe *- have either had
H15 034 alterations completed recently or alterations planned for the near
H15 035 future.
H15 036    |^*4Judy Keall: ^*0How is the *+$2.8 million to be spent on
H15 037 telecommunications?
H15 038    |^*4\0Hon. *6JONATHAN HUNT: ^*0The main items of expenditure on
H15 039 telecommunications include a 1600 line extension to the Glenfield
H15 040 exchange at a cost of more than *+$300,000, replacement and expansion
H15 041 of the Forest Hill exchange to 6400 lines at a cost of *+$1.7 million,
H15 042 and augmentation of major cable routes, feeder cables, and subscriber
H15 043 reticulation, costing about *+$800,000.
H15 044    |^*4\0Mr {0R. F. H.} Maxwell: ^*0Will the public get a 22 percent
H15 045 increase in service as a result of the increases in charges?
H15 046    |^*4\0Hon. *6JONATHAN HUNT: ^*0I am satisfied there will be a
H15 047 considerable improvement in the services provided.
H15 048 *<*4Lamb Sales *- France*>
H15 049    |11. ^\0Dr *6LOCKWOOD SMITH *0(Kaipara) to the *4Prime Minister:
H15 050 ^*0When precisely did the Government initiate its inquiry into the
H15 051 meat industry's claims that New Zealand's handling of the *1Rainbow
H15 052 Warrior *0affair has led France to block lamb brain imports worth
H15 053 *+$8.5 million, and what has been the outcome of those investigations?
H15 054    |^*4{0Rt. Hon.} *6DAVID LANGE *0(Prime Minister): ^Inquiries
H15 055 commenced as soon as reports were received. ^They were undertaken
H15 056 through the embassy in Paris and through inquiry from the associates
H15 057 of the importing firms in New Zealand. ^The results were
H15 058 unsatisfactory. ^As a result I wrote to the French Minister of
H15 059 External Relations, \0M. Dumas.
H15 060    |*4\0Dr Lockwood Smith: ^*0Could the Prime Minister please answer
H15 061 the question? ^Precisely when were the investigations initiated, and
H15 062 what has the outcome been?
H15 063    |^*4{0Rt. Hon.} *6DAVID LANGE: ^*0The investigations were
H15 064 commenced as soon as the reports were received.
H15 065    |^*4\0Dr Lockwood Smith: ^*0I asked precisely when.
H15 066    |^*4{0Rt. Hon.} *6DAVID LANGE: ^*0I do not know. ^It could have
H15 067 been 10.45 {0a.m.} or it could have been been 10.47 {0a.m.} on that
H15 068 day. ^The question went beyond lamb brains. ^It goes to the issue of
H15 069 seed potatoes and an import licence for some 60 tonnes of meat to New
H15 070 Caledonia. ^As a result of those inquiries, it became clear that there
H15 071 was either a low-level official programme of hindering New Zealand's
H15 072 commercial activity with France, or a top-level political decision had
H15 073 been made. ^I wrote to the French Minister of External Relations to
H15 074 find out what was really involved. ^The matter has been communicated
H15 075 to the {0OECD} in Paris and a case is being prepared for {0GATT}.
H15 076    |^*4\0Dr Lockwood Smith: ^*0Could I please have the date when
H15 077 those inquiries were initiated; and what steps does the Prime Minister
H15 078 plan to take now, given the outcome he has described?
H15 079    |^*4{0Rt. Hon.} *6DAVID LANGE: ^*0The actual date is not part of
H15 080 my brief. ^It was as soon as the inquiry was received, and I give the
H15 081 member my undertaking about that. ^The matter of lamb brains was
H15 082 actually preceded by the complaint over lamb and seed potato imports
H15 083 into New Caledonia. ^The outcome is that I first spoke with the French
H15 084 Ambassador to New Zealand just before he left for a council meeting in
H15 085 Paris. ^I have received no official acknowledgment from the French
H15 086 Minister of External Relations. ^I have not had anything other than an
H15 087 interim report of the way in which the matter was received at the
H15 088 {0OECD}, although the initial response indicated a strong sympathy for
H15 089 the New Zealand position. ^The general effect of the message is that
H15 090 the French are never more intractable than when they are 100 percent
H15 091 wrong.
H15 092    |^*4\0Hon. {0J. H.} Falloon: ^*0Has the Prime Minister asked the
H15 093 Minister of Agriculture, who is in Ireland, to visit any French
H15 094 Minister to clarify the position face to face?
H15 095    |^*4{0Rt. Hon.} *6DAVID LANGE: ^*0That is a possibility but it is
H15 096 considered appropriate at this stage to take the matter through the
H15 097 multilateral institutions. ^The Minister of Agriculture is at present
H15 098 doing a round of some European capitals and would certainly be
H15 099 available. ^It remains for it to be determined whether the matter
H15 100 arises from a political directive from the French Administration or
H15 101 from someone within the bureaucracy who, thinking to please his or her
H15 102 master by breathing on New Zealand, is doing so in the hope of
H15 103 preference within the French system. ^The second alternative is
H15 104 distinctly possible.
H15 105 *<*4Industrial Design Awards*>
H15 106    |12. ^\0Mr *6ANDERTON *0(Sydenham) to the *4Minister of Trade and
H15 107 Industry: ^*0Does he know that of the six finalists for the Prince
H15 108 Philip award for industrial design four come from manufacturers in
H15 109 Christchurch, and, if so, has he any information to suggest why this
H15 110 predominance of Christchurch design talent has occurred, and what
H15 111 implications it has for the manufacturing industry of the country?
H15 112    |^*4\0Hon. *6DAVID CAYGILL *0(Minister of Trade and Industry):
H15 113 ^Yes, I did know that four of the six finalists for the New Zealand
H15 114 Industrial Design Council's 1985 Prince Philip Design Award were
H15 115 Christchurch manufacturers, and that the winning product was
H15 116 manufactured in Christchurch by Tait Electronics \0Ltd. ^That success
H15 117 reflects the recognition that the Christchurch manufacturers have
H15 118 given to the need to incorporate good industrial design as part of
H15 119 their product development. ^The wider recognition of the approach
H15 120 means that New Zealand manufacturers as a whole would be better placed
H15 121 to meet the growing competition both here and abroad.
H15 122    |^*4\0Mr McLean: ^*0Is one of the implications for the
H15 123 manufacturing industry *- as asked in the original question *- that
H15 124 many Christchurch designers are ready to migrate because so much of
H15 125 Christchurch manufacturing industry, like Anderson's, is closing down?
H15 126    |^*4\0Hon. *6DAVID CAYGILL: ^*0The member asked whether I took
H15 127 that from the question; indeed, I took the contrary. ^They are not
H15 128 migrating, because four of the six finalists are based in
H15 129 Christchurch.
H15 130 *<*6DEBATE *- GENERAL*>
H15 131    |^*4\0Hon. *6{0J. B.} BOLGER *0(Deputy Leader of the Opposition):
H15 132 ^I move, *1That a general debate be now held. *0I will talk about
H15 133 inflation, a topic that was covered in today's first question of the
H15 134 day. ^I will consider that question in the context of agriculture and
H15 135 the tragedy that is unfolding in the farming and rural communities and
H15 136 in families up and down the country. ^We are witnessing the Minister
H15 137 of Finance desperately flailing about himself to find an excuse for
H15 138 the disaster he has visited upon New Zealand families and those in the
H15 139 productive sector. ^Those who believed the Minister now find his
H15 140 assurances and statements to be untrue. ^Those who believed the Prime
H15 141 Minister now find his statements to be untrue.
H15 142    |^In the Christchurch *1Press *0of 18 May 1985 *- only 10 months
H15 143 ago *- the Prime Minister is quoted as saying: *"^Farmers may be in
H15 144 for a hard time, but they will not be forced off their farms.**" ^That
H15 145 statement has been exposed as being untrue, and anyone who is in any
H15 146 doubt can read the front page of this morning's *1Dominion. ^*0We are
H15 147 hearing the roar from the hills that greeted the Minister of Finance
H15 148 in Palmerston North yesterday. ^It was a roar of desperation from
H15 149 families who see their life's work destroyed by *"Rogernomics**". ^It
H15 150 was a roar of anger at the Prime Minister, who spoke of consensus
H15 151 before the election and now pursues policies that divide New Zealand
H15 152 *- town and country. ^Members have a responsibility to stop the
H15 153 economic madness that the Executive is imposing upon the country.
H15 154 ^That responsibility goes not only through the Opposition benches but
H15 155 also through the Government's back benches. ^I know those Government
H15 156 back-bench members are also confronted with the enormous social costs
H15 157 that the economic policies imposed by the Executive are causing.
H15 158    |^I call upon Government back-bench members to stand up and
H15 159 represent their constituents on the matter, and not be cowed by the
H15 160 Executive. ^The time to speak out is now. ^Farmers and small
H15 161 businesses are being destroyed. ^The anguished cry from that group is
H15 162 simple: why is the Minister of Finance trying to crucify the
H15 163 productive sector? ^There is no answer. ^That is the cry I hear up and
H15 164 down the country. ^Why is the Government trying to destroy those who
H15 165 work long hours under arduous conditions to create the wealth of New
H15 166 Zealand through exports? ^What madness drives the Executive's economic
H15 167 policy in that direction? ^That question is on the lips of every New
H15 168 Zealander.
H15 169    |^It is a matter of equity and priority: equity between sectors,
H15 170 and priority in terms of investment. ^Today the Postmaster-General
H15 171 spoke in the House about the investment in the Post Office. ^The House
H15 172 was told that New Zealand can afford *+$700 million worth of new
H15 173 investment in the Post Office, and can spend *+$1,200 million on
H15 174 increasing the salaries of State employees. ^However, according to
H15 175 *"Rogernomics**" madness, it has no money to invest in the productive
H15 176 sector. ^It is a matter of priorities, and the Government is not
H15 177 establishing the correct priorities. ^It is not establishing the
H15 178 essential priorities if New Zealand is to have an economic future.
H15 179    |^There is no gain in deregulating the finance market if the
H15 180 Government, through its economic policies, dominates the market by the
H15 181 massive borrowing programme to which it is committed. ^Interest rates
H15 182 are dominated by the Government's policy of borrowing *+$3 billion in
H15 183 the past financial year from the internal market. ^That amounts to
H15 184 *+$3,000 for each man, woman, and child *- or *+$15,000 a family.
H15 185 ^Worse is to come because the Government is committed to borrowing
H15 186 *+$4.5 billion in the next financial year, which starts in April *-
H15 187 just one month away. ^That *+$4.5 billion is the equivalent of
H15 188 *+$22,000 for each family.
H15 189    |^Deregulating the finance market will not help if the Government
H15 190 dominates the market, pushes interest rates to an unsustainable level
H15 191 for the export sector, and, by so doing, inflates the value of the New
H15 192 Zealand dollar. ^The interest rates policy followed by the Minister of
H15 193 Finance makes the New York mafia appear soft-hearted. ^A headline in
H15 194 today's *1Dominion *0states: *"^Borrowers to pay interest on
H15 195 interest**". ^Borrowers are borrowing money to pay interest. ^They are
H15 196 paying interest on interest. ^Is it any wonder that I talk about
H15 197 madness? ^It is madness. ^There is no rational base to the policy. ^No
H15 198 country, family, or home is safe from the economic madness that is
H15 199 abroad.
H15 200    |^People cannot survive paying interest on interest, but that is
H15 201 the point to which *"Rogernomics**" has taken New Zealand in 20 short
H15 202 months. ^New Zealand had a strong and vigorous economy, and a strong
H15 203 and growing export industry. ^Homes were established, and families
H15 204 were setting up their own homes. ^However, they are being destroyed by
H15 205 the policies that push up Government charges. ^The Post Office will
H15 206 increase its charges by 22 percent; other charges were increased by 40
H15 207 percent to 50 percent last year.
H15 208 *#
H16 001 **[280 TEXT H16**]
H16 002 ^*0New Zealand received *+$1 billion less in export income during the
H16 003 first 5 months of 1986, and the position is worsening. ^The balance of
H16 004 payments will get worse, and the Government knows that. ^Why can
H16 005 Government members not acknowledge that projects must proceed and that
H16 006 development must continue?
H16 007    |^New Zealand must earn its way in the world. ^It is not possible
H16 008 for it to earn its way merely by pontificating on world stages, as the
H16 009 Prime Minister does, and upsetting its friends and allies. ^That will
H16 010 not get New Zealand very far at all. [*1^Interruption.*0] ^The grizzly
H16 011 Minister of Health is now joining the debate. ^He would not be able to
H16 012 develop anything. ^His only success in life is shutting down
H16 013 hospitals. ^I know, because he has done that in my area. ^He is good
H16 014 at waving shrouds and attacking doctors.
H16 015    |^In their totality, the major projects *- the ammonia-urea plant,
H16 016 the methanol plant, the McKee oil wells, New Zealand Steel, the
H16 017 synthetic fuel plant, the New Zealand refinery expansion, and Comalco
H16 018 *- will earn New Zealand gross foreign exchange earnings of *+$1,300
H16 019 million and net after-interest returns of *+$550 million annually.
H16 020 ^They are good investments for New Zealand, and they will be better in
H16 021 the future when the oil markets of the world return to their normal
H16 022 state. ^However, at present they are still earning dollars for New
H16 023 Zealand, and God knows we need dollars.
H16 024    |^*4David Butcher: ^*0Why?
H16 025    |^*4\0Hon. *6{0J. B.} BOLGER: ^*0It is no wonder we are in
H16 026 trouble. ^The Parliamentary Under-Secretary to the Minister of
H16 027 Agriculture does not know why we need dollars. ^It is no wonder
H16 028 farming is in trouble! ^That member does not know why we need to earn
H16 029 money. ^I shall explain it so that it is clear. ^When people buy
H16 030 things they pay for them; the way to pay for them is by selling
H16 031 something else. ^If the Under-Secretary talks to me later I shall
H16 032 explain it a little further.
H16 033    |^The Bill before Parliament is wrong. ^Its timing is wrong.
H16 034 ^There is no alternative planning procedure to eliminate the delays
H16 035 that will inevitably occur. ^Whether the Government likes any
H16 036 particular project or not, Opposition members presume that it wants
H16 037 some development to take place. ^If that is so there has to be a
H16 038 planning procedure. ^The member for \0St. Kilda was happy to have some
H16 039 development in his area. ^However, it did not take place, and he is
H16 040 upset.
H16 041    |^The energy programme that was embarked upon will reduce New
H16 042 Zealand's demand for imported fuel to 1.6 million tonnes compared to
H16 043 4.2 million tonnes. ^That was the projection of the energy plan, and
H16 044 that plan is on target. ^As long as the natural gas is there to supply
H16 045 those projects New Zealand will have security of supply. ^That is
H16 046 worth a lot of money, and the member for Sydenham knows it. ^He is a
H16 047 little concerned because the Government wants to sell his bank; he
H16 048 thinks that is a bit unfair. ^I do not think it is a bad idea; the
H16 049 member for Sydenham should get in behind it, and let private sector
H16 050 expertise get in with the bank as it got in with the major projects.
H16 051 ^It would be wrong for New Zealand to proceed with the Bill at this
H16 052 stage without adequate replacement planning legislation to ensure that
H16 053 projects can go ahead on time.
H16 054    |^*4\0Mr *6ANDERTON *0(Sydenham): ^It is a very good opportunity
H16 055 for me to follow the Leader of the Opposition and to give him my views
H16 056 on the repeal of the Act. ^I have some advice for him, and perhaps
H16 057 some news. ^The news for the Leader of the Opposition is that the
H16 058 Government does not have any silver to sell, because the National
H16 059 Government pawned the lot before the Labour Government was elected.
H16 060 ^The cupboard is totally bare of silver. ^The Leader of the Opposition
H16 061 has shown that even as Leader of the Opposition he is incapable of
H16 062 learning from history. ^Even when he relives history he cannot learn
H16 063 anything from it.
H16 064    |^I ask him what rate of return New Zealand Steel would be earning
H16 065 if the Government had not bailed it out by exchanging its loan
H16 066 commitments for equity capital. ^What rate of return would it have
H16 067 achieved under the former Government? ^What rate of return would the
H16 068 oil companies be getting now for Marsden Point if his former
H16 069 Government had not given them a secret guarantee of a rate of return
H16 070 that the Government now has to honour? ^The oil companies do not have
H16 071 to pay for it; it is the motorists of New Zealand who have to pay for
H16 072 it every time they buy a litre of petrol. ^I ask the Leader of the
H16 073 Opposition what rate of return the Aramoana smelter in Dunedin would
H16 074 have now if the Act had been used to ram that project through as it
H16 075 was intended to be used? ^What rate of return would a brand-new
H16 076 aluminium smelter in Dunedin be earning for the people of New Zealand
H16 077 now? ^Those are some aspects of the rates of return to which the
H16 078 Leader of the Opposition did not address himself. ^His speech would
H16 079 have been much more balanced had he done so. ^The Act came into being
H16 080 amidst real fear by many people in the country at the erosion of, and
H16 081 also at the virtual abandonment of, the rule of law and the power of
H16 082 the courts.
H16 083    |^*4\0Mr McKinnon: ^*0Who wrote this?
H16 084    |^*4\0Mr *6ANDERTON: ^*0I wrote it, and it is better than some of
H16 085 the rubbish that comes from the Opposition that is not written, and
H16 086 could never be written, because I suggest that anybody who tried to
H16 087 write it would have to be slightly demented. ^The people of the
H16 088 country had real fears about the erosion of democratic rights, because
H16 089 the former Government had the temerity to act against the people of
H16 090 the country in a way that said that even if people went to the courts
H16 091 under such legislation and won, the Government would make sure that
H16 092 those people would lose, by changing the law and making certain that
H16 093 even when people won they lost. ^That is what the former Government
H16 094 did.
H16 095    |^The purpose of the National Development Act was to provide for
H16 096 works of national importance to proceed as properly as possible. ^No
H16 097 one disputes that particular goal, but the end does not justify the
H16 098 means. ^I have spoken about that to some of my colleagues on various
H16 099 occasions. ^The argument is really about the means by which that goal
H16 100 of national development is to be achieved. ^The Act gave extraordinary
H16 101 powers to the Minister of Works and Development to make a decision
H16 102 under the Act before the publication of any report from the Planning
H16 103 Tribunal. ^The Act was used on only two occasions, for two projects,
H16 104 and it was claimed at the time of its passage that it would apply to
H16 105 only about six projects in the foreseeable future. ^If that was the
H16 106 case, and so it proved, surely it would have been better for the
H16 107 former Government to introduce special empowering Bills to Parliament
H16 108 so that the information relating to and the circumstances surrounding
H16 109 those projects could be debated in Parliament and in the select
H16 110 committees of the House rather than in the secrecy of a Minister's
H16 111 office.
H16 112    |^My support for the repeal of the National Development Act is not
H16 113 only on the sound economic grounds that have been advanced by many of
H16 114 my colleagues in the debate, but on the equally sound ground that the
H16 115 Act did not deliver any benefit to New Zealand or New Zealanders. ^It
H16 116 did not deliver, at a cost both actual and potential, all fundamental,
H16 117 democratic, and constitutional rights taken away for no return but in
H16 118 my view, in a democratic sense for a thumping loss. ^The whole tragic
H16 119 sequence of events of the National Development Act was summed up in an
H16 120 article in the *1National Business Review *0last year. ^The article
H16 121 stated that the fast track was dead, and that the National Development
H16 122 Act was widely despised in theory and hardly effective in practice.
H16 123    |^The Act did not give unbridled power to the Minister of National
H16 124 Development, but it came close to doing that. ^It was not quite
H16 125 useless, but almost. ^It will be a very unlamented Act when it goes
H16 126 out of business as soon as possible. ^It was passed by Parliament in
H16 127 circumstances of great haste, and it is worth remembering the sequence
H16 128 of events in which the Bill was passed. ^It was introduced on 5
H16 129 October *- a Friday *- at 9 {0a.m.} ^The Bill was reported back on
H16 130 Tuesday, 4 December 1979, when urgency was taken. ^For those members
H16 131 who have short memories about the way in which the House used to
H16 132 operate, the progress of the Bill makes interesting reading.
H16 133    |^After urgency was taken at 5.30 {0p.m.} on Wednesday, 5
H16 134 December, the House adjourned at 12.10 {0a.m.} on Thursday, 6
H16 135 December. ^On Friday, 7 December, the House finished by 9.7 {0p.m.},
H16 136 and at 9.7 {0p.m.} the Committee stage commenced and it went on to
H16 137 12.13 {0a.m.} on Saturday. ^On Tuesday, 11 December, debate resumed at
H16 138 3.27 {0p.m.}, and urgency was taken again until 3.51 {0a.m.} the next
H16 139 day. ^That is how legislation of that sort was enacted in those days.
H16 140 ^It was enacted without the people of the country having the benefit
H16 141 of hearing the debate, because the proceedings were not broadcast.
H16 142 ^The Government has ensured that the people of the country can hear,
H16 143 and on occasions even see, Parliament in action. ^That may not be very
H16 144 edifying, but at least the Government has shown that it is committed
H16 145 to democratic institutions and not to turning off the radio switch
H16 146 when a Bill of this kind is pressed into service.
H16 147    |^The third reading, which is generally not so contentious, ended
H16 148 at 1.59 {0a.m.} on Thursday, 13 December. ^That sequence of events
H16 149 shows the shambles that occurred when the Bill came before the House.
H16 150 ^It was only a little over a year later that Act had to be amended.
H16 151 ^The reason behind the amendment was the Aromoana smelter development.
H16 152 ^South Pacific Aluminium \0Ltd appeared before the select committee to
H16 153 give evidence, and some of the amendments make interesting reading.
H16 154 ^They increased the Minister's power by giving him the power to add
H16 155 consensus to the fast-track submissions. ^Submissions to the committee
H16 156 stated that it was wildly impracticable.
H16 157    |^The amendments reduced the power of the Commissioner for the
H16 158 Environment to audit environmental impact reports. ^They gave the
H16 159 Planning Tribunal power to award costs that could amount to several
H16 160 hundred thousand dollars, and that provision conceivably applied to
H16 161 bankrupt organisations that were interested in the preservation of the
H16 162 environment when bringing evidence before the tribunal on any project.
H16 163 ^The power of the Planning Tribunal to make recommendations about the
H16 164 project was reduced and the reduction applied retrospectively to
H16 165 actions already commenced in the courts, and put those cases on a
H16 166 special judicial fast track.
H16 167    |^The final amendment was unique. ^It stated that if, after all
H16 168 that, anything went wrong, it did not count in any case. ^The National
H16 169 Development Act created one set of rules for the Government and its
H16 170 friends, and another for objectors. ^The amendments to the National
H16 171 Development Act were made by a Government that believed that in the
H16 172 minds of many people it knew everything, and it was determined to take
H16 173 power unto itself at any cost, even against people's fundamental
H16 174 democratic rights. ^It clearly wanted to downgrade the role of
H16 175 Parliament in terms of select committee presentations, and it
H16 176 certainly wanted to downgrade the right of judicial tribunals and the
H16 177 courts *- and it did so.
H16 178    |^There is no way that the Government is interested in amending
H16 179 the Act. ^It was always its intention to repeal it, and that process
H16 180 is what is happening tonight. ^It is interesting to ask ourselves what
H16 181 people thought about the original National Development Bill. ^Evidence
H16 182 that the Bill would not be tolerated by people was quickly apparent,
H16 183 because, with only 3 weeks in which to prepare submissions to select
H16 184 committees, 367 individuals and groups made submissions, and only 5 or
H16 185 6 of that number supported the Bill.
H16 186 *#
H17 001 **[281 TEXT H17**]
H17 002 ^*0I tell proponents of private enterprise to beware, because that
H17 003 philosophy is under attack in the Bill.
H17 004    |^Clause 2 repeals the definition of the term *"essential work**".
H17 005 ^What is wrong with that term? ^It offered protection, but it has been
H17 006 removed, and I am concerned about that. ^The clause also substitutes
H17 007 the following definition for the term *"Government work**":
H17 008 ^*"*'Government work**' means a work or an intended work that is to be
H17 009 constructed, undertaken, established, managed, operated, or maintained
H17 010 by or under the control of the Crown or any Minister of the Crown for
H17 011 any public purpose or any such work or intended work for the time
H17 012 being under the control of the Crown or any Minister of the Crown**".
H17 013 ^That gives Government departments a completely free hand and
H17 014 unlimited power. ^It is State control *- nothing less.
H17 015    |^Clause 2 also provides for a new definition of the term *"public
H17 016 work**". ^I suggest that the new definition means that the Ministry of
H17 017 Works and Development can take over any property it so desires, that
H17 018 it may force people out of their homes, their properties, or their
H17 019 businesses. ^I suggest that it gives them virtually a totally free
H17 020 hand. ^Many people should be concerned about that development. ^I
H17 021 refer to the new definition of *"public work**" in the proposed new
H17 022 section 2(5)(b). ^As there are no restrictions, does that mean that
H17 023 the Ministry of Works and Development could now set up a construction
H17 024 team and build schools under the Education Act, and take over the
H17 025 maintenance of those schools from an education board? ^Does it mean
H17 026 that those people are now under threat?
H17 027    |^*4\0Hon. Jonathan Hunt: ^*0No.
H17 028    |^*4\0Mr *6ANGUS: ^*0That is what it says it means. ^Does it mean
H17 029 that the Ministry of Works and Development could take over painting,
H17 030 maintenance, plumbing, and electrical work in schools? ^The Minister
H17 031 of Broadcasting should know that that puts people in private
H17 032 enterprise under threat. ^It means that the ministry will increase its
H17 033 operations outside its present perimeter. ^Does it mean that it will
H17 034 take over school bus runs because they are now being tendered?
H17 035    |^The proposed new section 6(3)(a) states that the ministry shall
H17 036 be entitied *"To perform any activity or undertaking, whether a public
H17 037 work or not, and whether in New Zealand or elsewhere**". ^Subsection
H17 038 (b) of that proposed new section states that it also shall be entitled
H17 039 *"To provide any service for, or supply any professional, trade,
H17 040 labour or administrative services or any real or personal property in
H17 041 respect of any activity or undertaking**". ^That is virtually another
H17 042 open hand approach. ^There must be concern at those unlimited wide
H17 043 powers. ^Do they mean that the ministry can take over the role of
H17 044 transport operators which, under the Government, are feeling the
H17 045 pinch? ^Do they mean that the ministry could take over the role of
H17 046 road construction contractors, who are also feeling the pinch? ^Do
H17 047 they mean that the ministry could take over garages, or, with the
H17 048 delicensing of the motor fuel industry, set up its own private service
H17 049 stations?
H17 050    |^The Bill gives wide powers, and we should all be concerned. ^The
H17 051 ministry should be restricted to sectors in which private enterprise
H17 052 is not involved. ^The ministry is doing well in such sectors, so why
H17 053 should it not stay in them? ^I refer to the proposed new section
H17 054 7(2)(b) in clause 3, which states: *"^To acquire any land, buildings,
H17 055 or structures required to carry out any of the functions specified in
H17 056 section 6 of this Act and to administer, develop, improve, transfer,
H17 057 or dispose of such property**". ^In *1Hansard, *0Volume 440, at page
H17 058 3168 the \0Hon. Michael Connelly said: ^*"A major objective of the
H17 059 Bill was to restrict compulsory aquisition of private property for
H17 060 essential works.**" ^What went wrong? ^That was the Labour Party's
H17 061 policy 5 years ago, under a very good Minister, the \0Hon. Michael
H17 062 Connelly, but it has changed its spots.
H17 063    |^*4\0Hon. Jonathan Hunt: ^*0He wasn't the Minister then!
H17 064    |^*4\0Mr *6ANGUS: ^*0He had been the Minister of Works and
H17 065 Development. ^That used to be the Labour Party's policy, but, of
H17 066 course, everything has been opened up. ^I shall now consider the
H17 067 proposed new section 6(2)(f) in clause 3, which states: *"^To carry
H17 068 out any activity or undertaking jointly with any other person, body
H17 069 corporate, firm, partnership, or joint venture**" *- and the Bill goes
H17 070 on about shares, stocks, and interest. ^Does it mean that the Ministry
H17 071 of Works and Development can go out and speculate, with taxpayers'
H17 072 funds, by buying shares in Brierley Investments \0Ltd or some other
H17 073 companies such as the Bank of New Zealand or Robert Jones Holdings
H17 074 \0Ltd? ^That clause should concern all New Zealanders, particularly
H17 075 the Minister of Broadcasting and Postmaster-General if any of his
H17 076 sectors of interest are *"privatised**".
H17 077    |^I also mention amended section 42(1)(d) in clause 8, *"Disposal
H17 078 in other cases of land not required for public works**". ^Why is that
H17 079 change being made? ^Who will make the decision about getting rid of
H17 080 land? ^Will it be the Minister or the local commissioner who will have
H17 081 the final say? ^What is wrong with the present tender system, which
H17 082 allows everybody to have a go, before perhaps the highest tender is
H17 083 accepted? ^Everybody gets a chance under that system. ^Now the
H17 084 Ministry of Works and Development will be able to sell land to its
H17 085 mates, or to people with whom it is friendly. ^That takes away the
H17 086 protection of the shareholders in the Ministry of Works and
H17 087 Development, who are all New Zealanders.
H17 088    |^In *1Hansard, *0Volume 440, at page 3167, the \0Hon. Michael
H17 089 Connelly said: ^*"I assert at the outset that Labour Governments are
H17 090 opposed to expropriation, have never practised it, and never will
H17 091 practise it.**" ^I suggest that that is exactly what the Bill does,
H17 092 because that word means to take away property from its owners. ^After
H17 093 only 5 years the Government has changed its mind and is legislating
H17 094 for that change. ^It has had a change of heart. ^The Labour Party in
H17 095 Government is committed to increasing the role of the State. ^In the
H17 096 same speech, the \0Hon. Michael Connelly said: ^*"The Opposition**" *-
H17 097 at that time the Labour Party Opposition *- *"took an important
H17 098 initiative to put a sanction on local government, and to build in
H17 099 safeguards against abuse of the Public Works Act**". ^I agree with the
H17 100 \0Hon. Michael Connelly.
H17 101    |^*4\0Mr *6WOOLLASTON *0(Nelson): ^The member for Wallace
H17 102 continued a line of silly argument against the Bill on behalf of the
H17 103 Opposition. ^It is irresponsible of a member of the House to quote a
H17 104 previous debate out of context, without even mentioning its overall
H17 105 thrust. ^The member quoted the \0Hon. Michael Connelly *- in a 1981
H17 106 debate in the House from *1Hansard, *0Volume 440, at page 3168 *- who
H17 107 was opposing the very measure that is now being repealed. ^The \0Hon.
H17 108 Michael Connelly did say that the Labour Party did not engage in
H17 109 expropriation. ^That statement is quite true, and it was said in the
H17 110 context of opposing a Bill that sought to restrict the right of a
H17 111 community to express the need for a public work, in opposition to a
H17 112 private landowner who might hold the community to ransom. ^That is not
H17 113 expropriation.
H17 114    |^The Bill contains adequate compensation for negotiations for
H17 115 recompense for property rights. ^Nothing in the Bill removes the
H17 116 ownership of property rights. ^It is a matter of whether the landowner
H17 117 can hold a community to ransom because the community's needs cannot be
H17 118 met without meeting the extraordinary demands of the landowner. ^In a
H17 119 few minutes I shall quote some examples of that position to the member
H17 120 for Wallace. ^The debate on the Bill exemplifies the Opposition. ^It
H17 121 hates knowing that the ordinary taxpayers, the man or woman in the
H17 122 street, can have a stake in a successful enterprise. ^It is fine for
H17 123 big business, but the Opposition cannot stand the idea of a
H17 124 community-owned enterprise such as the Ministry of Works and
H17 125 Development operating successfully in the interests of the man or
H17 126 woman in the street.
H17 127    |^The member for Wallace said that the Ministry of Works and
H17 128 Development *- and presumably other public enterprises *- should be
H17 129 restricted to sectors in which private enterprise is not involved. ^In
H17 130 other words, he wanted private entrepreneurs, big shareholders, to
H17 131 have the first cut at the cake, and ordinary people to take the crumbs
H17 132 that are left over. ^If big business wanted to expand its operation
H17 133 the Opposition would have the taxpayers' enterprise restricted to a
H17 134 smaller diet of fewer crumbs.
H17 135    |^The Bill does three major things. ^It modernises the apparatus
H17 136 of government in several ways the Opposition has not mentioned *- for
H17 137 example, by restricting the ministry so that Government departments
H17 138 are no longer its captive clients; it must compete with private
H17 139 enterprise to capture Government contracts. ^That is as it should be,
H17 140 and will keep it efficient. ^It will make sure that its prices are
H17 141 pruned to the bone and that taxpayers get the best deal. ^The other
H17 142 side of the coin is that it can tender for contracts in the private
H17 143 sector. ^Why should not the company that I, every member of the House,
H17 144 and every constituent has a share in be able to compete for contracts
H17 145 in an open market, in a neutral and transparent fashion? ^Why should
H17 146 not the people's firm be able to pay a dividend, too? ^The Opposition
H17 147 has not answered that.
H17 148    |^The Bill's most important achievement is to remove the arbitrary
H17 149 restriction placed on the definition of public works in 1981 when the
H17 150 previous Government limited the list of what are called essential
H17 151 works. ^I quote the \0Hon. Bill Young, who was at that time the
H17 152 Minister of Works and Development:
H17 153 **[LONG QUOTATION**]
H17 154    |^What was the result of that procedure? ^I shall give an example
H17 155 from my electorate, where there has been a series of major floods
H17 156 within only a few years. ^There is one property from which the Nelson
H17 157 catchment board has not, because of the restriction been able to
H17 158 acquire the land necessary to complete a major flood control scheme.
H17 159 ^As a result, properties are flooded and heavy damage has been done.
H17 160 ^Drainage and flood control work in the neighbouring electorate of
H17 161 Tasman has not proceeded because of the arbitrary restriction that was
H17 162 put into the Act in 1981, which is being removed today. ^Properties
H17 163 have been flooded several times a year because it is not possible for
H17 164 the catchment authority to acquire the land to build when one
H17 165 landowner holds out and says: ^*"No, I will not sell in the public
H17 166 interest.**" ^That is the effect of the restriction the previous
H17 167 Government put into the Act in the interests of a few of its friends.
H17 168 ^The Bill is aimed at ensuring that essential works can be completed
H17 169 in the public interest.
H17 170    |^I shall briefly mention some of the accolades gained by the
H17 171 Ministry of Works and Development in recent years. ^Opposition members
H17 172 say it cannot compete, but in 1986 it gained the Heavy Engineering
H17 173 Research Association steel award against all comers for the design of
H17 174 a steel bridge near Gisborne; in 1986 also it gained the New Zealand
H17 175 Concrete Society concrete award for the design of the Tree Trunk Gorge
H17 176 bridge; and, over the past 5 years, has received 1 national and 10
H17 177 branch awards for architectural design. ^That is the nature of the
H17 178 people's firm *- the Ministry of Works and Development that we all
H17 179 own. ^It has been rewarded for technical excellence and service. ^It
H17 180 can compete against all comers; the Bill will allow it to do so.
H17 181    |^*6DENIS MARSHALL *0(Rangitikei): ^The Bill gives the Ministry of
H17 182 Works and Development much wider powers of planning and development
H17 183 than are contained in any previous legislation introduced into the
H17 184 House. ^Under the provisions of the proposed new section 7(j) in
H17 185 clause 3 the Minister will have the power *"To direct any activity or
H17 186 undertaking, whether a public work or not, in relation to the orderly
H17 187 and efficient use or development of natural resources**". ^That
H17 188 particular section gives the ministry much wider powers than were
H17 189 given by even the National Development Act, which only accelerated the
H17 190 planning process. ^The ministry will be able to dominate totally the
H17 191 new Department of Conservation.
H17 192 *#
H18 001 **[282 TEXT H18**]
H18 002 |*0(c) ^If there was to be an apportionment of the expenditure because
H18 003 of private or domestic use of the dwellings, then a substantially
H18 004 greater allowance should be made for their business use in respect of
H18 005 outgoings than had been allowed by the Commissioner.
H18 006    |^For the Commissioner it was contended that:
H18 007 _|(a) ^The objectors had not discharged the onus of proof upon them of
H18 008 showing that the apportionments made by the Commissioner were wrong,
H18 009 or by how much they were wrong.
H18 010 |(b) ^The partnership is not a legal entity and the law does not
H18 011 recognise a tenancy from the four tenants in common to two lots of two
H18 012 of those same tenants. ^A partnership is not a taxpayer, it is only a
H18 013 means by which partners may carry on business. ^At all times the
H18 014 objectors were the taxpayers who divided up the profits of their
H18 015 business between them as they chose. ^They could not be both landlords
H18 016 and tenants of themselves.
H18 017 |(c) ^In any event, there was no proof of any tenancy apart from the
H18 018 adjustment in the accounts.
H18 019    |^I think that any need to establish exclusive use rights of the
H18 020 dwellinghouses, and to try and show there was a tenancy of these
H18 021 dwellings by the occupiers, relates solely to the private use of the
H18 022 dwellings rather than their business use, a point that seems to have
H18 023 been overlooked by counsel. ^There was no evidence or reason put
H18 024 forward as to why there was any need, requirement, or purpose, for any
H18 025 tenancy or exclusive use rights relating to the business use of the
H18 026 dwellings. ^The submissions of the objectors, I think, support the
H18 027 clear conclusion that both dwellinghouses were used in part for
H18 028 private purposes. ^In addition, there was no proof of any sort of
H18 029 tenancy agreement between the four objectors on the one part and the
H18 030 two lots of two objectors on the other part. ^There was no evidence as
H18 031 to any sort of term of tenancy, whether there was any sort of
H18 032 exclusive rights, to what any tenancy related to, or such like, apart
H18 033 from the entries in the accounts. ^The postings in the accounts, in my
H18 034 opinion, did not themselves with nothing more, give rise to any
H18 035 agreement to lease part of the land by any of the objectors from all
H18 036 of the objectors. ^They proved nothing more than a record of
H18 037 adjustments. ^There was no other evidence of an agreement to lease any
H18 038 part of the land by the objectors. ^I find that it has not been proved
H18 039 there were at the relevant times tenancy agreements between the
H18 040 objectors for the use of the two dwellinghouses.
H18 041    |^I do not agree with the submission of the counsel for the
H18 042 Commissioner, that just as a partner cannot be employed by a
H18 043 partnership, so one or more partners cannot obtain a lease from all
H18 044 partners or part of partnership land. ^The questions of employment and
H18 045 tenancy are two totally different concepts. ^I find there was no
H18 046 tenancy proved, but even if there was, I do not think that would
H18 047 advance the objectors' case. ^I have no idea how any rental was made
H18 048 up, whether it related to part or the whole of the dwellinghouses, or
H18 049 what. ^All I can say is that it was seemingly a nominal rent for
H18 050 bookkeeping purposes, and perhaps to try and assist the objectors'
H18 051 case, to deduct expenditure on the dwellinghouses. ^There was not
H18 052 evidence of the necessary nexus between the expenditure incurred and
H18 053 any recently received.
H18 054    |^The situation is that each objector used the dwellinghouses for
H18 055 private and business purposes. ^The dwellinghouses were used for both
H18 056 purposes. ^When the expenditure or depreciation in issue was incurred,
H18 057 it was for both business and private purposes. ^The advantages gained
H18 058 by the expenditure and depreciation were intangible; such advantages
H18 059 did not lend themselves to any sort of precise measurement or
H18 060 apportionment between business and private purposes. ^As *1Richardson
H18 061 *0\0J pointed out in the *1Buckley & Young *0case 3 {0NZTC} at \0pp
H18 062 61,283-61,284; [1978] 2 {0NZLR} at \0pp 498-499, the effect of the
H18 063 onus of proof upon the objectors is to require them to show, not only
H18 064 that the assessments are wrong, but also by how much they are wrong,
H18 065 and that applies equally to the amended assessments; so that in
H18 066 apportionment cases the objector has the burden of establishing the
H18 067 extent to which the amount claimed to be deductible satisfies \0sec
H18 068 104, or as the learned judge put it:
H18 069 |**[LONG QUOTATION**]
H18 070    |^The case then refers to the need to apply the onus of proof in a
H18 071 broad and commonsense way, but also, the need for the objector or
H18 072 taxpayer to *"point to some intelligible basis upon which a positive
H18 073 finding can be made that a defined part of the total sum is
H18 074 deductible**".
H18 075    |^From a time of use basis of the dwellinghouses for business
H18 076 purpose, and taking into account the disruption of the private use of
H18 077 the dwellinghouses by business uses, it may be that the Commissioner's
H18 078 apportionments to some extent do not wholly reflect the percentage of
H18 079 outgoings for each dwellinghouse that should be allowed for business
H18 080 purposes, as claimed by the objectors. ^However, I am unable to arrive
H18 081 at any other perceivable, intelligible, or reasonable basis by which
H18 082 to apportion such outgoings. ^I have no idea as to the relative uses
H18 083 of the various parts of the dwellings, except obviously the major
H18 084 parts of them seem to be primarily for private and domestic use. ^It
H18 085 would be mere surmise on my part to substitute for the basis of
H18 086 apportionment used by the Commissioner some other basis, and to
H18 087 increase the business content of the outgoings. ^No perceivable basis,
H18 088 other than an undefined increase, was put forward by the objectors.
H18 089 ^In the circumstances, the objectors have failed to prove on a balance
H18 090 of probabilities the extent to which the Commissioner's assessments by
H18 091 way of apportionment were wrong. ^They have therefore failed to
H18 092 satisfy the onus of proof upon them.
H18 093    |^With regard to the section, I am satisfied it was used by the
H18 094 partnership in gaining or producing assessable income of the
H18 095 partnership during the 1978 year. ^It was held for this purpose from
H18 096 about the time of the purchase of the land. ^I am satisfied that the
H18 097 expenditure or outgoings on the section were incurred for a similar
H18 098 purpose, although the first objector said that his thinking as to the
H18 099 use of the section had changed in the second year, and an aged aunt of
H18 100 his lived in the garage there for a time. ^I am satisfied that the use
H18 101 of the section for the private or domestic use of the objectors was
H18 102 minimal, although not so minimal to be of no significance at all. ^I
H18 103 do not know the exact time and amount of use of part of the section or
H18 104 by the objectors for private or domestic use, but that use would be
H18 105 well and adequately covered by an apportionment of 10% for such use.
H18 106 ^I find that the outgoings for the section, on the evidence, should be
H18 107 apportioned as to 90% for business use and deductible accordingly.
H18 108 ^The remaining 10% of such outgoings are not deductible because they
H18 109 relate to the private or domestic use of the section.
H18 110    |^In accordance with my findings and conclusions, I determine the
H18 111 Commissioner acted incorrectly in disallowing a deduction to the
H18 112 partnership for expenditure incurred on outgoings for the section in
H18 113 the year ending 31 March 1978, and the amended assessments should be
H18 114 further amended by allowing a deduction for 90% of the outgoings in
H18 115 respect of the section. ^In accordance with the foregoing, I further
H18 116 determine that as the objectors have not shown or proved the extent of
H18 117 any error by the Commissioner in his apportionment of outgoings in
H18 118 respect of the two dwellinghouses, the Commissioner's apportionment as
H18 119 set out in \0para 10 hereof is not shown to be wrong. ^The objection
H18 120 in regard to apportionment of outgoings for the dwellinghouses cannot
H18 121 be sustained and was, accordingly, correctly disallowed.
H18 122 *<*4Case H13*>
H18 123 *<Taxation Review Authority, 28 January 1986.*>
H18 124 **[LIST**]
H18 125    |^The taxpayer carried on business operating a small suburban
H18 126 hairdresser and tobacconist. ^Following an investigation, based on an
H18 127 assets accretion method, the Commissioner concluded that the taxpayer
H18 128 had suppressed sales. ^Amended assessments were made. ^The taxpayer
H18 129 denied that he had suppressed sales except to the extent of taking,
H18 130 daily, an amount for his lunch. ^The taxpayer claimed that his
H18 131 business did not have the trade to earn the income assessed by the
H18 132 Commissioner.
H18 133    |^Following a long period of negotiation between the parties, the
H18 134 taxpayer finally capitulated and accepted the assessments made by the
H18 135 Commissioner. ^He pleaded guilty to and was convicted of wilfully
H18 136 filing false returns of income. ^He was assessed for penal tax. ^The
H18 137 taxpayer objected against that assessment and the matter came before
H18 138 the Taxation Review Authority.
H18 139    |^The taxpayer argued that he never accepted the substance of the
H18 140 charges, but that he had pleaded guilty to be *"rid of the matter**".
H18 141 ^It was submitted that the amount of penal tax was excessive and that
H18 142 the taxpayer had been penalised as during the course of the
H18 143 investigation the department had raised the benchmark for penal tax in
H18 144 average cases.
H18 145    |^The Commissioner relied on the fact that the taxpayer had
H18 146 pleaded guilty to the offences and the fact that throughout the
H18 147 proceedings he had been professionally advised. ^The taxpayer had
H18 148 admitted a degree of evasion for which an appropriate amount of penal
H18 149 tax had been assessed.
H18 150    |^*1Held, *4assessments amended.
H18 151    |^While tax evasion and accordingly penal tax were serious
H18 152 matters, the case before the Authority was not a bad case of its type.
H18 153 ^On the civil standard of proof there was evasion. ^On the balance of
H18 154 probabilities, however, the taxpayer had satisfied the Authority that
H18 155 the amount of penal tax assessed was excessive.
H18 156 **[LIST**]
H18 157    |^Barber {0DJ}: ^*0At material times the objector carried on
H18 158 business as a hairdresser/ tobacconist. ^He stocked quite a wide
H18 159 variety of goods including sports goods. ^As the result of an
H18 160 investigation based on the assets accretion method and related to the
H18 161 income years 1973 to 1980 inclusive, undeclared income of the objector
H18 162 was ascertained at *+$14,138 of which *+$10,749 was presumed to be
H18 163 suppressed sales.
H18 164    |^As a result of the further assessment of income of *+$14,138,
H18 165 the objector was required to pay a further *+$6,323.84 in income tax
H18 166 for the said eight year period. ^These assessments for income tax were
H18 167 eventually accepted on behalf of the objector by letter dated 30 March
H18 168 1983. ^On 26 January 1984 the objector pleaded guilty to charges of
H18 169 wilfully filing false returns for the income years 1974 to 1980
H18 170 inclusive and was convicted on all charges.
H18 171    |^These proceedings concern a subsequent assessment in March 1984
H18 172 for penal tax as follows:
H18 173 **[LIST**]
H18 174    |^The objector objected to the assessments of penal tax and the
H18 175 usual procedures were followed leading to a hearing before me.
H18 176 ^Pursuant to the case stated, I am asked whether the objector is
H18 177 chargeable with penal tax and whether the assessments of penal tax are
H18 178 excessive and, if so, in what respects should such assessments and
H18 179 which of them be amended. ^At the hearing, counsel for the objector
H18 180 conceded that penal tax is chargeable so that I am only concerned with
H18 181 quantum. ^Although proof of chargeability would have rested with the
H18 182 respondent, at the civil standard but with a sliding scale upwards as
H18 183 referred to in *1Case *0F141 (1984) 6 {0NZTC} 60,254 at \0p 60,256
H18 184 [also reported as {0TRA} *1Case *023 (1984) 8 {0TRNZ} 154 at \0pp
H18 185 156-157], the objector is required in the usual way to prove on the
H18 186 balance of probabilities that the quantum is excessive.
H18 187    |^In reviewing the discretion of the respondent when he assessed
H18 188 the amount of penal tax, I may only in terms of \0sec 423 of the
H18 189 *1Income Tax Act *01976 have regard:
H18 190 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H18 191 |*"...to the nature and degree of the offence, or to the reason for
H18 192 the imposition of the penal tax...**".
H18 193 **[END INDENTATION**]
H18 194    |^In terms of \0sec 420 and 423, the maximum amount of penal tax
H18 195 chargeable is 300% of the deficient tax (that tax arising out of
H18 196 evasion or attempted evasion), and I have no jurisdiction to reduce
H18 197 penal tax below 10% of the deficient tax.
H18 198    |^Although there was no dispute of fact other than whether sales
H18 199 suppressed by the objector were minor or substantial, it is helpful to
H18 200 refer to parts of the evidence, in the sequence in which they were
H18 201 adduced.
H18 202 *#
H19 001 **[283 TEXT H19**]
H19 002 |^A quality control inspector, who was an indentured fitter and
H19 003 turner, was transferred to process work due to the winding down of
H19 004 operations of a motor assembly plant. ^The worker refused the
H19 005 temporary transfer and was dismissed.
H19 006 |^The union argued that the employer's motive was to avoid declaring
H19 007 the worker redundant and paying him accordingly. ^The employer argued
H19 008 that under the redundancy agreement it had an obligation of preserving
H19 009 the employment for as long as possible. ^It claimed that preservation
H19 010 of the worker's full remuneration as a quality control inspector while
H19 011 transferring him to a temporary process position was within the terms
H19 012 of the employment contract.
H19 013 |^*4Held: ^*0Claim disallowed. ^The majority held that the question of
H19 014 whether the process position was permanent could not be determined
H19 015 until further time had elapsed. ^The terms of the redundancy agreement
H19 016 did not require the employer to declare the worker redundant.
H19 017    |^\0Mr {0W R} Cameron dissenting.
H19 018 *<*7DECISION OF THE COURT DELIVERED BY FINNIGAN, \0J.*>
H19 019    |^*0This is a claim alleging unjustifiable dismissal brought by
H19 020 the New Zealand Engineering, Coachbuilding, Aircraft, Motor and
H19 021 Related Trades Industrial Union of Workers (hereinafter referred to as
H19 022 the *"union**") on behalf of a worker Robert Neilson who was dismissed
H19 023 from his employment after refusing a transfer within the Petone motor
H19 024 assembly plant of the employer. ^The worker had been employed from
H19 025 April 1982 until early 1984 as a quality control inspector. ^He is an
H19 026 indentured fitter and turner. ^The transfer was to have been to an
H19 027 assembly line. ^The background, and the reason, for the proposed
H19 028 transfer was that the employer was reducing the operations of its
H19 029 Petone plant with the object of closing it down.
H19 030    |^Transfer of employees in the ordinary course of events was
H19 031 provided for in Clause 12 of the Hutt Valley and Porirua Basin Motor
H19 032 Assembly Plants Engineering Employees Collective Agreement which was
H19 033 registered on 6 May 1981.
H19 034    |^Clause 12 of the Collective Agreement is as follows:
H19 035 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H19 036 *<12. *3TRANSFER OF EMPLOYEES*>
H19 037 |^*0The need to move employees between jobs may arise from a variety
H19 038 of circumstances such as emergency situations, staff shortages or
H19 039 employee absence. ^If the Union delegate of the area concerned
H19 040 considers an individual worker has been unfairly treated, then he may
H19 041 discuss that matter with management. ^When workers are transferred to
H19 042 perform other than their usual duties, the following provisions shall
H19 043 apply:
H19 044 _|(**=i) ^In the majority of cases temporary absence will be covered
H19 045 by employees in jobs of the same category and no problems of pay will
H19 046 thus arise.
H19 047 |(**=ii) ^If the rate of pay for the job to which he is transferred is
H19 048 higher than his usual rate, such a worker shall be paid the higher
H19 049 rate forthwith and shall remain on that rate for the balance of that
H19 050 pay week.
H19 051 |(**=iii) ^If a worker's rate of pay is higher than that of the job he
H19 052 has been temporarily transferred to he shall stay on the higher rate
H19 053 until a permanent transfer is made, at which time he shall receive the
H19 054 rate for that job category. ^However, no worker shall be permanently
H19 055 transferred to a job with a lower rate of pay without his consent.
H19 056 **[END INDENTATION**]
H19 057    |^On 18 July 1983 an agreement, called a redundancy agreement, had
H19 058 been reached between the New Zealand Engineering, Coachbuilding
H19 059 Motor Aircraft and Related Trades Industrial Union of Workers
H19 060 (Wellington Branch) and the employer. ^Clause 2 of that agreement is
H19 061 as follows:
H19 062 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H19 063 |2. ^Where the company offers alternative employment within the
H19 064 company and where the employees reject the offer they will not be
H19 065 considered to be redundant and will not be entitled to redundancy
H19 066 payments.
H19 067 |2.1 ^Alternative employment shall mean a position at a wage/ pay no
H19 068 less favourable than those that applied immediately prior to the
H19 069 transfer.
H19 070 |2.2 ^Employees affected by Clause 2 shall be entitied to evoke the
H19 071 Personal Grievance procedure contained within the Collective
H19 072 Agreement.
H19 073 **[END INDENTATION**]
H19 074    |^The preamble to this agreement is of great importance. ^It is as
H19 075 follows:
H19 076 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H19 077 |^The intent of the parties in making this agreement is to endeavour
H19 078 to provide for continued employment rather than declare redundancies,
H19 079 and in the event redundancies occur, re-employment is reasonably
H19 080 secure.
H19 081 **[END INDENTATION**]
H19 082    |^On 28 November 1983 a letter had been given to all hourly rated
H19 083 employees of the employer providing what the letter called further
H19 084 information in the phasing out of the Petone operation. ^The letter
H19 085 stated among other things that the activities of inspectors would be
H19 086 progressively affected by the closure of the various production areas
H19 087 in the plant.
H19 088    |^On 2 February 1984 \0Mr Neilson was approached by the General
H19 089 Foreman for Inspection about his workload and he reported to the
H19 090 General Foreman that his workload had virtually run out. ^A little
H19 091 later his own foreman asked him to transfer to process work on the
H19 092 production of axles. ^He refused the transfer and said to the employer
H19 093 that two other quality control inspectors were absent and their jobs
H19 094 should have been available to him. ^He was suspended without pay and
H19 095 told to report for work the following day to see whether inspection
H19 096 work could be made available. ^The following day no work was said to
H19 097 be available although \0Mr Neilson pointed out that the two quality
H19 098 control inspectors previously absent were still absent. ^The transfer
H19 099 to production work was offered and refused.
H19 100    |^On 14 February a grievance committee met pursuant to Clause 40
H19 101 of the Collective Agreement. ^An interim arrangement was made at that
H19 102 meeting but subsequently the parties asked the chairman to make a
H19 103 formal decision in the matter. ^That decision, issued on 27 February
H19 104 1984 required \0Mr Neilson to give the proposed transfer a fair trial
H19 105 and the employer to ensure the transfer was only temporary, a
H19 106 permanent transfer being the equivalent of a redundancy to which other
H19 107 considerations would apply.
H19 108    |^\0Mr Neilson did not at any time accept any of the production
H19 109 work offered to him and eventually on 1 March 1984 he was formally
H19 110 advised by the employer that having refused a temporary transfer at
H19 111 his normal rate of pay he was considered to be in breach of his
H19 112 contract and that his employment was terminated.
H19 113    |^\0Mr Neilson in evidence and counsel for the union in
H19 114 submissions urged the Court to accept that the fault lies with the
H19 115 employer, first in taking the unusual course of attempting to transfer
H19 116 him from a trade position to a process position when that had not been
H19 117 done before and second, in attempting to make this transfer permanent.
H19 118 ^They allege that the employer's motive was to avoid declaring \0Mr
H19 119 Neilson redundant under the redundancy agreement and paying him
H19 120 accordingly. ^They suggested also the employer was making an issue of
H19 121 his position in order to gauge the response of other trades workers
H19 122 and to test the question of transfers. ^\0Mr Neilson said in evidence
H19 123 that he had no opportunity to explain his situation or to put
H19 124 alternatives to the employer.
H19 125    |^The employer in evidence and submissions agreed with the union
H19 126 that Clause 12 of the Collective Agreement does not apply but
H19 127 disagreed in respect of the redundancy agreement dated 18 July 1983
H19 128 and relied upon Clause 2 of that agreement quoted above. ^It relied
H19 129 also on the fact that the closure of the Petone plant was an
H19 130 extraordinary and unique situation. ^It took the view that both under
H19 131 the redundancy agreement and in terms of general policy it had an
H19 132 obligation to consider the termination of each worker's employment in
H19 133 its own circumstances with the overall object of preserving the
H19 134 employment of each worker for as long as possible, either by transfer
H19 135 within the Petone plant or transfer where appropriate to the Trentham
H19 136 plant. ^It denied that a simple transfer to the work of other absent
H19 137 inspectors was possible. ^It claimed that \0Mr Neilson's employment
H19 138 was governed by the Collective Agreement, the conditions acknowledged
H19 139 by \0Mr Neilson in his signed application for employment and by the
H19 140 redundancy agreement. ^It claimed that preservation of \0Mr Neilson's
H19 141 full remuneration as a quality control inspector by transferring him
H19 142 from a position where he was no longer required to a process position
H19 143 was within the terms of the employment contract. ^It claimed also that
H19 144 \0Mr Neilson had between 2 February and 1 March a reasonable
H19 145 opportunity to present his point of view and any reasonable
H19 146 alternatives and to accept the offer of transfer. ^They claimed it was
H19 147 \0Mr Neilson's inflexible attitude which prevented the transfer and
H19 148 led inevitably to termination of his employment.
H19 149    |^A majority of the Court hold on the evidence that there was at
H19 150 the most very limited quality control inspection work available for
H19 151 \0Mr Neilson after 2 February, and that the question of whether the
H19 152 process position offered was permanent was not capable of being
H19 153 decided until further time had elapsed. ^The majority hold after
H19 154 considering the evidence and all of the very careful submissions of
H19 155 both counsel that it was the redundancy agreement of 18 July 1983
H19 156 which primarily governed the situation; in their view the employer was
H19 157 not required by that agreement or any other provision to declare \0Mr
H19 158 Neilson redundant, neither did \0Mr Neilson have any basis in the
H19 159 award, the redundancy agreement or any other provision of his
H19 160 employment contract to insist upon being declared redundant. ^In their
H19 161 view what the employer did was what the preamble and Clause 2 of the
H19 162 redundancy agreement provided. ^The question of whether such transfer
H19 163 was permanent must have been raised every time that clause was
H19 164 applied, and a permanent transfer other than by the separate agreement
H19 165 would have been outside the terms of that clause.
H19 166    |^The majority hold that the evidence clearly disproves the claims
H19 167 that \0Mr Neilson was given no opportunity to be heard in the matter
H19 168 or to be fully represented by the union; there was ample time and
H19 169 ample representation. ^It holds clearly also that in the unusual
H19 170 circumstances of this case provision had been made by agreement for
H19 171 the transfer which the employer offered to \0Mr Neilson. ^In view of
H19 172 those findings therefore the claims of the union on \0Mr Neilson's
H19 173 behalf must fail.
H19 174    |^A dissenting opinion by \0Mr Cameron follows.
H19 175    |^We make no order for costs.
H19 176 *<*7DISSENTING OPINION OF \0MR {0W.R.} CAMERON*>
H19 177    |^*0In dissenting from the above decision, I make the following
H19 178 comments:
H19 179 _|1. ^Neilson was employed as a Quality Control Inspector and in that
H19 180 position he carried out his duties in a competent and co-operative
H19 181 manner. ^The evidence shows that within the broad area of quality
H19 182 control he was prepared to fill any position at any time.
H19 183 |2. ^Neilson signed an Application for Employment form dated 5.4.82,
H19 184 which embodied a declaration to be signed by the applicant. ^Clause 1
H19 185 provides for alteration of duties, responsibilities and location of
H19 186 the employee.
H19 187 |^*3COMMENT: ^*0At the time of Neilson's signing the Application for
H19 188 Employment form there was no indication that any of the provisions
H19 189 applied to a redundancy situation, and cannot be interpreted as such.
H19 190 |3. ^The Hutt Valley and Porirua Basin Motor Assembly Plants'
H19 191 Engineering Employees *- Collective Agreement (Voluntary) provides for
H19 192 transfer of employees in Clause 12 and outlines the following
H19 193 circumstances where this clause would apply. ^They are:
H19 194 |Emergency situations, staff shortages, or employee absences.
H19 195 |^*3COMMENT: ^*0This clause in its preamble does not envisage
H19 196 redundancy situations.
H19 197 |4. ^The New Zealand Engineering, Coachbuilding, Motor, Aircraft and
H19 198 Related Trades Industrial Union of Workers (Wellington Branch) and
H19 199 General Motors ({0N.Z.}) Limited reached agreement to cover impending
H19 200 redundancy situations on July 18th, 1983. ^Clause 1 of this Agreement
H19 201 provides for payments to be made to workers declared redundant by the
H19 202 company. ^Clause 2 provides for the offer of alternative employment
H19 203 within the company and where the employees reject alternative
H19 204 employment they will not be considered redundant.
H19 205 |^*3COMMENT: ^*0Neilson had good reason to believe that he was
H19 206 declared, or about to be declared, redundant, as provided for in
H19 207 Clause 1 and therefore would not be affected by Clause 2.
H19 208 |5. ^Early in November, 1983, General Motors announced its decision to
H19 209 close its Petone plant and its Petone plant employees were officially
H19 210 notified of this decision. ^On November 28th, 1983 the company issued
H19 211 a letter to all hourly-rated employees which provided further
H19 212 information on the phasing out of the Petone operation and included an
H19 213 anticipated time-table.
H19 214 |^*3COMMENT: ^*0General Motors gave Neilson good reason for him to
H19 215 consider that he was to lose his job in March or June, 1984, by its
H19 216 announcement on its Petone plant in early November, 1983, and its
H19 217 time-table on spark plugs and axle production in its letter of 28
H19 218 November, 1983.
H19 219 *#
H20 001 **[284 TEXT H20**]
H20 002 ^*0Women are more likely to be church members than men.
H20 003 **[TABLE**]
H20 004    |^Nearly 40% of parents have no formal educational qualifications
H20 005 although most have at least 1 year at high school (see Table 5).
H20 006 ^About forty percent of the men but only 28% of the women have gained
H20 007 additional qualifications since leaving school.
H20 008 **[TABLE**]
H20 009    |^Over eighty percent of the men are in full-time employment and
H20 010 twenty percent of the women (see Table 6). ^About half the women are
H20 011 in part-time employment and about a quarter, engaged full-time in
H20 012 looking after a home and family. ^The data on socio-economic status of
H20 013 the sample (see Table 7) generally show more families in class 2 and
H20 014 fewer in classes 5 and 6 compared either with the typical urban male
H20 015 sample cited by Elley and Irving (1976), or with the total male labour
H20 016 force sample based on 1981 census (Elley & Irving, 1985). ^The reasons
H20 017 for this are probably that by this point in their lives, most of the
H20 018 fathers have moved into more responsible and managerial positions than
H20 019 they held when they were younger. ^Thus any sample of parents of 11-13
H20 020 year old children are likely to be atypical. ^However, it is also
H20 021 possible that replies are more likely to have come from those who are
H20 022 better educated and hence in the higher {0S.E.S.} positions. ^The
H20 023 women's {0S.E.S.} status is generally lower than that of the men
H20 024 reflecting the nature of the society.
H20 025 **[TABLES**]
H20 026 *<*2SUMMARY*>
H20 027    |^*0The children in this sample usually live with their mother,
H20 028 father and brothers or sisters. ^The parents are usually pakeha and
H20 029 are either non-church members or affiliated to one of the three major
H20 030 protestant religions. ^There is a spread of education and
H20 031 socio-economic status but most of the fathers hold middle-class jobs.
H20 032 ^Typically the mother is at home or in part-time employment while the
H20 033 father is employed full-time. ^Although the sample is probably fairly
H20 034 typical of the parents of Form *=I and *=II children over New Zealand
H20 035 as a whole, many schools will have quite different parent populations.
H20 036 ^Thus analyses have been done to compare responses from parents with
H20 037 different background characteristics and these are presented
H20 038 throughout the text when the differences prove important.
H20 039 *<*4The Consultation Procedure*>
H20 040    |^*0Information on the consultation procedure comes from three
H20 041 sources. ^The health co-ordinators and principals completed diaries
H20 042 indicating the nature of the arrangements they made and their meetings
H20 043 with individual members of the public, and both teachers and parents
H20 044 were asked their opinions of the process.
H20 045 *<*2MEETINGS*>
H20 046    |^*0All schools held at least one meeting to inform parents of
H20 047 the nature of the unit and to give them an opportunity to express
H20 048 opinions and ask questions. ^Some schools held up to 4 meetings. ^The
H20 049 average duration was about one and half hours. ^Attendance differed
H20 050 widely from school to school. ^More parents attended in the
H20 051 Christchurch area than in Porirua. ^Overall the average attendance was
H20 052 reported to be about 20% or more of the parents. ^All health
H20 053 co-ordinators reported the outcome of these meetings as either
H20 054 *"satisfactory**" (29%) or *"very satisfactory**" (71%). ^Comments
H20 055 were made on *"the openness of the parents and teachers**" and
H20 056 *"willingness to listen to other people's point of view**". ^Most of
H20 057 the parents who attended either already supported the introduction of
H20 058 the unit or were undecided and wanted more information or to compare
H20 059 their opinions with those of other parents. ^There was little or no
H20 060 opposition to the introduction of the unit. ^Sometimes a school
H20 061 mentioned a particular parent in a way that indicated that vocal
H20 062 opposition was an unusual occurrence. ^Votes were taken at meetings in
H20 063 about half the schools and in all cases were in favour of the unit.
H20 064    |^About 40% of the parents who replied to the questionnaires said
H20 065 they had attended the meetings about the unit. ^Those who attended
H20 066 found the meetings helpful (mean = 1.64 on a scale from 1 *"very
H20 067 helpful**" to 5 *"very unhelpful**") rating them as the most helpful
H20 068 of all the various sources of information available to them. ^Several
H20 069 people who were unable to attend meetings commented on their regret at
H20 070 having missed the opportunity. ^These results from the parents'
H20 071 questionnaire confirm the view of those who arranged the meetings.
H20 072 *<*2OTHER MEANS OF CONSULTATION*>
H20 073    |^*0All schools kept parents informed of issues related to the
H20 074 unit by means of newsletters and special notices. ^At least half of
H20 075 the schools sent out photostat copies of sections of the teaching
H20 076 programme outlining the course content.
H20 077    |^In two schools, members of the school council phoned all
H20 078 parents informing them of meetings or soliciting their opinions on the
H20 079 introduction of the unit. ^A subsequent meeting of one of these
H20 080 schools resulted in 68 parents attending. ^At the other school, only 2
H20 081 parents attended but this school had previously contacted all parents
H20 082 to ask their opinion about introducing the unit and had received
H20 083 *"overwhelming support**". ^Thus lack of attendance cannot always be
H20 084 interpreted as implying opposition or indifference.
H20 085    |^Consultations between the school and individual parents
H20 086 numbered only 3 or 4 per school according to the returned diaries.
H20 087 ^However discussions with the health co-ordinators suggested that this
H20 088 figure under-represents the actual number of informal consultations
H20 089 which often occurred between parents and individual teachers. ^In
H20 090 nearly all cases the individual approaches made to the school were for
H20 091 more information about the unit or clarification on school policy. ^A
H20 092 very small number of parents (5) contacted the school to record their
H20 093 opposition to the introduction of the unit. ^In these cases, the
H20 094 parents expressed reasoned opinions rather than anger or indignation
H20 095 directed towards the school. ^In about three quarters of the cases
H20 096 where parents approached the school, the health co-ordinators reported
H20 097 a shift towards a more positive response to the unit following
H20 098 discussion.
H20 099    |^Consultation with other members of the public and with
H20 100 community organisations was only reported by two schools who consulted
H20 101 church leaders. ^However the *"parent**" meetings were sometimes
H20 102 attended by other members of the community ({0e.g.} newspaper
H20 103 reporter, local doctor, local minister).
H20 104 *<*2THE TEACHERS' VIEWS ON THE CONSULTATION PROCESS*>
H20 105    |^*0Table 8 summarizes teachers' replies to the questions about
H20 106 consultations. ^Eighty-six percent of the teachers expressed very
H20 107 positive views on the consultation procedure. ^Only about 5% of the
H20 108 teachers felt that consultation could have been better handled or that
H20 109 more information could have been given. ^The suggestions for
H20 110 improvements mostly centre on giving more and/or earlier information
H20 111 although some teachers commented that parents weren't responding to
H20 112 the opportunities. ^Specific suggestions include making sure all
H20 113 parents receive an outline of the lessons, visiting maraes, contacting
H20 114 representatives of different community groups, teachers talking to
H20 115 their own pupils' parents and less media sensationalism.
H20 116 **[TABLE**]
H20 117    |^These views of the teachers reflect in part the different
H20 118 experiences of different schools. ^Most schools gave a lot of time and
H20 119 care to consultation and the communities seem to have responded with
H20 120 interest and support for the programme. ^However in some areas parents
H20 121 seemed unresponsive. ^In some communities the activity of pressure
H20 122 groups resulted in a few parents becoming alarmed as they had been
H20 123 misinformed about the content of the unit by the leaflets they had
H20 124 received from these groups.
H20 125 *<*2THE PARENTS' VIEWS*>
H20 126    |^*0Tables 9 and 10 summarize the results of the questions on
H20 127 parents' experiences of the consultation process. ^Again only the
H20 128 *"after**" results are given as the consultation was still proceeding
H20 129 in some schools when the *"before**" data was collected. ^Eighty-four
H20 130 percent of parents felt they had enough information having had the
H20 131 opportunity to attend 1 or 2 meetings plus receiving at least one and
H20 132 usually 2 or 3 newsletters.
H20 133 **[TABLE**]
H20 134    |^Only 2% reported not receiving any newsletters. ^Over half the
H20 135 parents (58%) reported talking to other people about the unit while
H20 136 almost two thirds (63%) read or watched media presentations. ^For
H20 137 those who attended them, the meetings were rated as the most helpful
H20 138 followed by newsletters and talking to others. ^The media was seen as
H20 139 being the least helpful with a mean close to the midpoint of the scale
H20 140 (2.45). ^Few found the material unhelpful; only 5% for meetings and 8%
H20 141 for newsletters. ^The most frequent suggestions for improvements were
H20 142 to include details of the specific content of the teaching unit in a
H20 143 newsletter, or to provide increased opportunity for face-to-face
H20 144 discussions or newsletters. ^The media was seen as unhelpful by about
H20 145 1 in 8 of the parents (12.5%), some of whom commented about alarmist
H20 146 publicity which did not match their actual experience.
H20 147 **[TABLE**]
H20 148    |^Overall the parents felt that the consultation was well handled
H20 149 (mean = 1.98) and less than 8% felt it was poorly handled. ^There was
H20 150 a significant relationship (\0r=0.50 \0p<.01 ) between opinions on how
H20 151 well the consultation had been handled and favourability toward the
H20 152 unit. ^Those who felt the consultation was poorly handled were usually
H20 153 against or neutral about the teaching compared to the remaining 92% of
H20 154 parents. ^The Christchurch parents were most likely to feel the
H20 155 consultation was well handled (mean = 1.82) while those in Porirua
H20 156 were least positive (mean = 2.17). ^Perhaps this reflects the fact
H20 157 that more of the Porirua schools took a *"low key**" approach to
H20 158 publicity and hence sent out fewer newsletters and held fewer meetings
H20 159 than did the Christchurch schools.
H20 160    |^The means for specific schools although always positive varied
H20 161 even more widely (from 1.66 to 2.56) but it is not clear why this
H20 162 should be so. ^Both the best and worst rated schools held meetings and
H20 163 sent out newsletters. ^It is possible that the activity of a group
H20 164 opposed to the unit in the area of some of the Porirua schools may
H20 165 have led to greater confusion for these parents over the contents of
H20 166 the unit. ^No other pattern of differences between the school
H20 167 populations is apparent. ^Alternatively it could be that the quality
H20 168 of presentation by the school that is a key factor.**[SIC**]
H20 169 *<*2SUMMARY*>
H20 170    |^*0All schools appear to have gone to considerable lengths to
H20 171 inform and involve parents although the methods and the numbers of
H20 172 parents who attended meetings varied considerably between schools.
H20 173 ^While numbers of meetings, attendance rates and numbers of
H20 174 consultations can be used as tangible evidence of the success of the
H20 175 consultation process, this is not necessarily the case. ^Low
H20 176 attendance at meetings may reflect parental confidence in the teachers
H20 177 and the school committee. ^Sampling of parental opinion is probably
H20 178 the only method of adequately determining the effectiveness of
H20 179 consultation procedures.
H20 180    |^A number of health co-ordinators expressed the view that they
H20 181 adopted a *"low key approach**" to the unit and said they did *"not
H20 182 want to blow it out of proportion**". ^The view that *"if the unit is
H20 183 very widely publicised, concerns and fears will increase**", may be a
H20 184 valid one providing it does not conflict with ensuring that parents
H20 185 are well informed about the school's plans. ^Certainly those schools
H20 186 who made a considerable effort to reach everyone seem to have been
H20 187 rewarded with parental support and interest.
H20 188    |^From the data available and impressions gained from
H20 189 interviewing co-ordinators it appears that schools have adopted a
H20 190 consultation procedure to suit the particular needs of the parents and
H20 191 the community they serve. ^Criticism and concerns coming to the notice
H20 192 of the school were very few in number and were dealt with as they
H20 193 arose with positive outcomes in all but one case.
H20 194 *<*4In-Service Training of Teachers*>
H20 195    |^*0Information on in-service training comes from the
H20 196 Principals'/ Health co-ordinators' diaries and from the teacher
H20 197 questionnaires.
H20 198    |^Schools differed in the arrangements they made for training
H20 199 teachers. ^Some had all day seminars, others had a large number of
H20 200 shorter meetings. ^Initially the meetings were to familiarize teachers
H20 201 with the content of the unit and the consultation procedures. ^Later
H20 202 the emphasis was on strategies for teaching. ^Most of the schools in
H20 203 the trial used in-service training time in order to complete the
H20 204 training module designed to accompany the unit (see Appendix A).
H20 205    |^Table 11 presents the data from the teachers' questionnaires on
H20 206 their experience of the training. ^The figures from the *"after**"
H20 207 sample have been quoted as this represents most of the teachers
H20 208 involved and is also more accurate as some of *"before**" sample
H20 209 teachers replied before the in-service training was complete.
H20 210    |^Eighty-eight percent completed all four of the in-service
H20 211 training tasks, spending about 6 hours on the tasks and rating them on
H20 212 average as satisfactory.
H20 213 *#
H21 001 **[285 TEXT H21**]
H21 002 _| *- ^*0Problems resulted from overtiredness of Civil Defence
H21 003 officers working in the operations headquarters.
H21 004 | *- ^All key Civil Defence personnel should have at least one deputy
H21 005 who can take over their positions when they need rest.
H21 006 | *- ^Stress was not a serious problem among relief personnel from
H21 007 other organisations.
H21 008 *<3.5.4 *1Reactions to Flood Relief Workers From Other Regions*>
H21 009    |^*0Following some overseas disasters it has been observed that
H21 010 there has not been a ready acceptance of disaster relief workers from
H21 011 other districts. ^The reactions from both those affected by the
H21 012 disaster and local relief workers is said to range from suspicion and
H21 013 resentment to open hostility.
H21 014    |^Civil Defence personnel are aware of the potential for problems
H21 015 of this type and it is apparent that the Civil Defence officers who
H21 016 came to Southland from other regions were tactful and sensitive in
H21 017 their approach to the local relief workers. ^They came not to take
H21 018 over but merely to advise and assist. ^Consequently, they do not
H21 019 appear to have received any adverse reactions.
H21 020    |^Similarly, members of other emergency services appear to have
H21 021 been accepted by the locals. ^There were no problems reported in
H21 022 relation to the army's deployment in Invercargill, the sailors who
H21 023 volunteered to help clean up after the floods, Invercargill police who
H21 024 helped patrol at Otautau, and the Red Cross teams from Timaru and
H21 025 Dunedin who played a large part at Otautau and Tuatapere.
H21 026    |^Apart from the acceptance of those in Civil Defence or the
H21 027 other emergency services, there were a few instances where local
H21 028 relief workers were initially unwelcoming to relief workers from other
H21 029 areas. ^However, this was never a serious problem and was mitigated by
H21 030 the fact that all of the relief workers brought into the area had
H21 031 previously lived in Invercargill.
H21 032    |^In spite of this minor problem, it was the opinion of all the
H21 033 relief workers consulted, that even if the non-local relief workers
H21 034 had been completely new to the area, there would not have been a
H21 035 strong negative reaction to them.
H21 036 *<*1Conclusion*>
H21 037 | *-
H21 038 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 039 ^*0There were no significant problems resulting from negative
H21 040 reactions to relief workers brought in from other districts.
H21 041 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 042 *<3.5.5 *1Convergence*>
H21 043    |^*0A common problem following disasters, now labelled
H21 044 *'convergence**' is that a massive in-pouring of food and other
H21 045 material donated by other districts swamps the agencies involved in
H21 046 relief work. ^These agencies are then forced to spend valuable time
H21 047 sorting, storing and distributing these largely non-essential goods.
H21 048    |^Civil Defence personnel have been aware of this problem for
H21 049 some time and there is also a growing awareness of this in the general
H21 050 population. ^Even so, this phenomenon was not entirely avoided
H21 051 following the Southland Floods. ^For example, a container-load of
H21 052 onions arrived from Pukekohe, truck-loads of over-ripe fruit came from
H21 053 central Otago, and piles of old clothing, sometimes hardly better than
H21 054 rags, arrived from a number of places. ^Some of these goods were
H21 055 delivered to central depots and sometimes they were delivered directly
H21 056 to church and other agencies involved in relief work.
H21 057    |^The occurrence of this problem following the Southland Floods
H21 058 shows that it will be necessary after future disasters to broadcast
H21 059 nationwide statements specifying whether donations should be made and
H21 060 the kind of donations required. ^Usually the resources in or near the
H21 061 affected areas will be adequate to cope with the emergency
H21 062 requirements for food and clothing. ^Apart from those donating money,
H21 063 potential donors should contact those in charge of the relief work to
H21 064 find out which goods are required.
H21 065 *<*1Conclusions*>
H21 066 | *-
H21 067 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 068 ^*0Some problems resulted from the arrival of donated food and
H21 069 clothing and other goods in the flood-affected areas.
H21 070 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 071 | *-
H21 072 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 073 ^Following future disasters clear statements designed to prevent the
H21 074 unsolicited donation of unwanted goods should be broadcast nationwide.
H21 075 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 076 *<3.5.6 *1Co-ordination of Flood Relief*>
H21 077    |^*0The co-ordination of services provided by all the agencies
H21 078 involved in relief work was not fully investigated during this
H21 079 exercise. ^(An attempt has been made in Appendix 2 to list most of
H21 080 these agencies and the services provided). ^It is not possible,
H21 081 therefore, to make a complete evaluation of the success or otherwise
H21 082 of the structures established to co-ordinate relief activity.
H21 083 ^However, the impression gained at this stage is that, generally,
H21 084 co-ordination was successful but there were some relatively minor
H21 085 problems, or hints of problems, which will be discussed here.
H21 086    |^Initially following the floods, in accordance with the normal
H21 087 Civil Defence procedures, relief work in Invercargill was initiated
H21 088 and controlled from the operations headquarters by the Chief Welfare
H21 089 Officer. ^She had responsibility for the running of the evacuation
H21 090 centres; registration of, and enquiries relating to, flood-displaced
H21 091 people; clothing; accommodation; catering; and personal services.
H21 092 ^This last category includes any welfare activity not listed in the
H21 093 other categories, {0e.g.} financial aid, counselling services, legal
H21 094 advice, \0etc.
H21 095    |^Within days of the floods a Disaster Recovery Co-ordinator was
H21 096 appointed, the first such appointment to be made in this country since
H21 097 it was made possible by a change in legislation in 1983. ^His task was
H21 098 to co-ordinate the flood recovery and to ensure a smooth transition
H21 099 bridging the periods before and after the lifting of the State of
H21 100 Emergency.
H21 101    |^Approximately one and a half weeks after his appointment he
H21 102 established a number of subcommittees which largely reflected the
H21 103 activities which were already in operation. ^Each committee looked
H21 104 after one of the following: welfare, furniture, clothing, food, toys,
H21 105 and housing.
H21 106    |^The State of Emergency was not lifted until a week after the
H21 107 formation of these subcommittees so that for a week there was some
H21 108 overlap between their activities and those directed from the Civil
H21 109 Defence Headquarters. ^It has been suggested that this caused problems
H21 110 in co-ordination and that there were some difficulties associated with
H21 111 the transferral of information to the subcommittees following the
H21 112 lifting of the State of Emergency. ^As this was not investigated
H21 113 further during this exercise, no further comment is possible on the
H21 114 validity of these claims.
H21 115    |^There were reports of some duplication of welfare services but
H21 116 at this stage it is not known whether this resulted from a possible
H21 117 lack of co-ordination between Civil Defence Headquarters and others
H21 118 supervising welfare relief, or from charitable groups and service
H21 119 organisations initiating activity without reference to a central
H21 120 authority. ^Whatever the cause, there appeared to be many groups
H21 121 involved in visiting homes in the areas where there was the heaviest
H21 122 concentrations of flooded houses: health nurses, members of the
H21 123 Women's Division of Federated Farmers, church members, volunteer
H21 124 social workers and others. ^It was claimed that flood-displaced people
H21 125 were annoyed by the frequency with which they were visited by relief
H21 126 workers. ^Counter-claims were made that flood-displaced people always
H21 127 appreciated being visited. ^The flood-displaced people interviewed
H21 128 during this investigation generally supported the latter of these two
H21 129 views: only one person complained about the frequency of visits which
H21 130 he said interfered with his work on his house.
H21 131    |^Although the flood-displaced people did not generally appear to
H21 132 resent being visited by relief workers from different organisations,
H21 133 there are other potential problems associated with this activity which
H21 134 suggest the need for a reasonable level of co-ordination. ^These
H21 135 problems have been mentioned earlier in other contexts. ^First, an
H21 136 excess of assistance might be given to one affected area while other
H21 137 areas are comparatively neglected. ^Secondly, untrained volunteers
H21 138 need qualified supervisors to whom cases can be referred for
H21 139 assessment where some sort of professional help or crisis intervention
H21 140 is indicated. ^Without co-ordination such supervision might not be
H21 141 available and in these circumstances it has been observed that
H21 142 untrained volunteers sometimes over-estimate the need for professional
H21 143 intervention.
H21 144    |^Civil Defence established for a time the position of
H21 145 Co-ordinator of Counselling Services. ^The person occupying the
H21 146 position adopted the role of liaising with the churches, service
H21 147 agencies and other charitable groups and encouraged them to assist in
H21 148 whatever capacity they were happy with, {0i.e.} *'to do their own
H21 149 thing**'. ^There was a minimum of interference in the activities
H21 150 commenced by these groups. ^With hindsight it seems that there may
H21 151 have been a need for a little more co-ordination of these activities
H21 152 by some centralised body, perhaps through the earlier establishment of
H21 153 the Welfare Subcommittee rather than a temporary Civil Defence
H21 154 position.
H21 155    |^That there was insufficient liaison with Otautau and Tuatapere
H21 156 was discussed earlier in Section 3.4.2. ^This caused problems in
H21 157 co-ordination of services on the regional level. ^For example, there
H21 158 were complaints that the Furniture Subcommittee, which arranged the
H21 159 supply of new and used furniture to flood-displaced people, serviced
H21 160 only the Invercargill area. ^It is clear that all disaster flood
H21 161 committees and subcommittees should in future have representatives from
H21 162 all affected towns unless the number of people affected does not
H21 163 warrant this.
H21 164 *<*1Conclusions*>
H21 165 | *-
H21 166 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 167 ^*0It is alleged that some problems resulted from a lack of
H21 168 co-ordination between Civil Defence Headquarters and other persons
H21 169 supervising relief work. ^Further investigation would be needed to
H21 170 clarify this issue.
H21 171 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 172 | *-
H21 173 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 174 ^There were some problems with duplication and co-ordination of
H21 175 welfare relief work, particularly in the visiting of flood-displaced
H21 176 people in some areas. ^This was not resented by the people visited but
H21 177 could lead to inadequate supervision of untrained volunteers and
H21 178 uneven distribution of services.
H21 179 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 180 | *-
H21 181 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 182 ^In future a more positive approach should be taken to the
H21 183 co-ordination of the activities of church organisations, service
H21 184 agencies and other bodies, recognising at the same time that they
H21 185 should not be discouraged from becoming involved in relief work. ^This
H21 186 co-ordination would be facilitated by forming the various relief
H21 187 subcommittees as early as possible following the disaster.
H21 188 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 189 | *-
H21 190 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H21 191 ^All relief committees and subcommittees should have representation
H21 192 from each of the affected towns unless only a small number of people
H21 193 from a particular town have been affected.
H21 194 **[END INDENTATION**]
H21 195 *<4. *3THE POSSIBILITIES OF CONDUCTING FURTHER RESEARCH ON THE
H21 196 SOUTHLAND FLOODS*>
H21 197 *<*04.1 *1Issues Requiring Further Investigation*>
H21 198    |^*0This preliminary investigation has identified some of the
H21 199 issues that have arisen following the Southland Floods. ^For some of
H21 200 these issues tentative conclusions were presented in Section 3. ^This
H21 201 does not indicate that further research is unnecessary on these
H21 202 issues. ^Rather, recognising that further research on the effects of
H21 203 these floods may not be feasible, the conclusions were stated in an
H21 204 attempt to pass on some of the experience gained by the Southlanders
H21 205 who were involved in flood relief work.
H21 206    |^The main issue requiring further investigation is the social
H21 207 and psychological effects that the floods had on people at all stages
H21 208 following the disaster.
H21 209    |^A number of sub-issues related to this main issue were
H21 210 identified as follows:
H21 211 _|**=i) The relationship between an individual's awareness of the
H21 212 flood potential in an area and the individual's response to flood
H21 213 warnings as well as her or his psychological reaction to the floods.
H21 214 |**=ii) The relationship between the severity of the impact and the
H21 215 psychological reaction.
H21 216 |**=iii) The extent and effect of the stress on the flood-displaced
H21 217 people from each of the following sources: the various types of
H21 218 temporary accommodation used; problems associated with flood damage
H21 219 compensation; and other problems related to the restoration of damaged
H21 220 homes.
H21 221 |**=iv) The extent to which the loss of memorabilia affects people.
H21 222 |**=v) The effect of sending children on holiday or otherwise
H21 223 separating them from their families in the post-flood period.
H21 224 |**=vi) The level of depression and excessive anxiety among those
H21 225 affected by the floods.
H21 226 |**=vii) The extent to which behavioural problems in children resulted
H21 227 from the floods.
H21 228 |**=viii) The effect of the floods on marriages.
H21 229 |**=ix) The level of assistance required by people at various stages
H21 230 following the disaster: *'listening ear**', befriending, counselling,
H21 231 and referrals to psychologists or other professionals.
H21 232    |^Other issues not so directly related to the social and
H21 233 psychological effects of the floods include:
H21 234 _|a) The best form and manner of dissemination of flood warnings and
H21 235 people's reaction to these warnings.
H21 236 |b) The long-term positive effect on the community resulting from the
H21 237 strengthening of community identity, community networks, and
H21 238 charitable and other service organisations as a result of the floods.
H21 239 |c) The long-term negative effect on the community resulting from the
H21 240 movement of people away from the flood-affected areas.
H21 241 *<4.2 *1Existing Sources of Information on the People Affected by the
H21 242 Southland Floods*>
H21 243 *#
H22 001 **[286 TEXT H22**]
H22 002    |^*0The landscape regions proposed earlier in this report are a
H22 003 preliminary interpretation. ^They require clarification and more
H22 004 detailed assessment if they are to be useful. ^Provisions for landscape
H22 005 conservation within existing planning procedures will be outlined.
H22 006 *<The {0PNA} Programme and landscape*>
H22 007    |^The Protected Natural Areas ({0PNA}) Programme was conceived in
H22 008 the early 1980s, and controlled from the Biological Resources Centre
H22 009 ({0BRC}), {0DSIR} in Wellington. ^Its applicability to the National
H22 010 Parks and Reserves Act 1980 was considered a requirement, to ensure
H22 011 the:
H22 012 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H22 013 |*"preservation of representative samples of all classes of natural
H22 014 ecosystems and landscape...**". (Section 3(1)(b)) (Simpson, 1982)
H22 015 **[END INDENTATION**]
H22 016 **[PLATE**]
H22 017    |^In 1982 the publication *1Ecological Regions and Districts of
H22 018 New Zealand *0was produced by {0BRC}, dividing the country into 82
H22 019 Ecological Regions and 235 Ecological Districts. ^Field surveys
H22 020 involving rapid ecological assessment over broad areas commenced in
H22 021 late 1983 in 4 sample regions. ^Two of these, the Old Man and
H22 022 Mackenzie Ecological Regions, involved survey of tussock grasslands.
H22 023 ^The ultimate aim was to identify representative areas of natural
H22 024 ecosystems, as near as possible to their state prior to European
H22 025 settlement, and recommend their protection for nature conservation.
H22 026    |^The {0PNA} pilot programme, which has subsequently involved
H22 027 surveying in the Heron Basin, was one of the most ambitious surveys
H22 028 ever conducted in tussock grasslands. ^It was more extensive in
H22 029 coverage than previous ecological surveys, and more detailed in
H22 030 biological assessment than the {0MWD} Land Resource Inventory.
H22 031    |^Despite popular belief, these surveys did *1not *0assess
H22 032 landscape values. ^Nor initially did {0PNA} claim to:
H22 033 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H22 034 |*"^it could be emphasised that the districts and regions are
H22 035 ecological, not environmental: they basically reflect features of the
H22 036 *1natural *0environment**". (Simpson, 1982)
H22 037 **[END INDENTATION**]
H22 038    |^However it was subsequently claimed that landscape values had
H22 039 been included.
H22 040    |^The result of a natural ecological value approach is reflected
H22 041 in the Priority Places for Protection ({0PPFP}s) recommended in the
H22 042 various surveys. ^A typical {0PPFP} might be a forest remnant in a
H22 043 hillside gully beside a lake (\0Fig.21). ^The remnant is proposed for
H22 044 protection, but the rest of the hillside and the other hills and
H22 045 valleys that can be seen from around the lake are not.
H22 046 |^Where there are several remnants of almost comparable vegetation,
H22 047 the best ecological sample is designated a {0PPFP}. ^Yet the others
H22 048 may be critical for the special landscape character of the area.
H22 049 ^Hence the overall *1seen landscape *0or context of the lake has not
H22 050 been considered. ^Its geological features and vegetation/ fauna
H22 051 communities have been rapidly assessed, but the total landscape is not
H22 052 just these. ^It includes combinations of natural and cultural features
H22 053 as well.
H22 054    |^In short, {0PNA} and the other surveys only looked at the
H22 055 ecological values of the landscape. ^Priority places for protection
H22 056 need management buffer zones to both ecologically and visually
H22 057 **[FIGURE**]
H22 058 integrate them into the landscape. ^Implementation of management for
H22 059 the {0PPFP}s alone is still a long way off.
H22 060    |^True landscape assessment of tussock grasslands is therefore
H22 061 desirable, and consideration of the visual values are paramount. ^The
H22 062 characteristics of these landscapes have been described already and
H22 063 can be summarised as follows:
H22 064 _| *- ^The mountains and valleys divide the landscape into a series of
H22 065 huge outdoor *"rooms**" or spaces. ^The shapes, forms and scale of the
H22 066 landforms, and the way they surround the viewer, cutting off views of
H22 067 adjacent areas, are the most important components of any landscape.
H22 068 | *- ^Overlaying and responding to these basic components is the
H22 069 pattern of the grasslands, scrub or forest remnants.
H22 070 | *- ^Within this pattern is the evidence of human impact, which may
H22 071 complement *1or *0detract from the natural features.
H22 072    |^Landscape assessment could look at each of these outdoor
H22 073 *"rooms**", and describe all these elements. ^This could be used as a
H22 074 basis for identifying valued areas, what sort of changes are likely to
H22 075 be a problem in each area and how further developments could be seen
H22 076 from different locations and designed to fit in to the landscape.
H22 077    |^Many such surveys have been attempted, especially overseas.
H22 078 ^Some form of visual assessment is *1essential *0to any landscape
H22 079 assessment, as so much depends on the visual values. ^They are not the
H22 080 whole story however, because they do not account for *1all *0landscape
H22 081 values. ^It is felt by many that there has been too much emphasis on
H22 082 preserving scenery and views, as something to be *1looked *0at like a
H22 083 photograph.
H22 084 |**[LONG QUOTATION**]
H22 085    |^We are not just viewers of landscape as scenery. ^We inhabit it,
H22 086 move through it, have feelings for it, pursue activities and make
H22 087 changes within it. ^All these must be recognised, especially in
H22 088 tussock grasslands with their rich sense of human involvement. ^So in
H22 089 assessing these areas, there must be more involved than just a hunt
H22 090 through the back country to find the most *"beautiful**" scenery. ^The
H22 091 most significant areas are by no means the only ones that matter, as
H22 092 they often require the context of typical areas. ^The importance of
H22 093 all areas to people must be considered, in terms of management,
H22 094 recreation, tourism and relationship to frequently travelled routes
H22 095 and towns and cities nearby.
H22 096    |^In 1984-5 the Environmental Resource Assessment ({0ERA}) group
H22 097 undertook an extensive landscape survey of the Mackenzie Basin
H22 098 (Jackman, 1985). ^The approach of this study gives direction for
H22 099 future assessment of tussock areas and high country landscapes. ^Using
H22 100 computer mapping techniques it looked at many factors and their
H22 101 interrelationship, including:
H22 102 **[LIST**]
H22 103    |^It also involved a computer-generated visibility study.
H22 104 ^Visibility is simply a measure of how much a particular landform, or
H22 105 part of a landform, can be seen from surrounding areas. ^Generally,
H22 106 the higher the landform, the more it can be seen. ^In the Mackenzie,
H22 107 the mountains encircling the basin are of high visibility, and are
H22 108 therefore the enclosing elements of the basin. ^Use of the computer
H22 109 enabled visibility to be accurately calculated for 1000\0m x 1000\0m
H22 110 square areas of land in a grid. ^Other visible landforms enabled the
H22 111 basin to be divided into 9 distinct areas. ^This enabled analysis of
H22 112 the possible impacts of forestry and recreation and the areas where
H22 113 they could best be absorbed visually. ^The results indicated that
H22 114 visibility of impacts was minimised when located in steep-sided
H22 115 valleys as opposed to open flat country. ^Of course the landscape
H22 116 importance of the valleys themselves, such as a spectacular gorge,
H22 117 must be a consideration.
H22 118    |^Visibility itself is highly variable in its significance. ^But
H22 119 the approach helped to emphasise the need for a comprehensive
H22 120 assessment considering all values and balancing the inevitable
H22 121 conflicts and differences of opinion. ^Those with local knowledge and
H22 122 experience of landscape values will already know some of the critical
H22 123 areas, and it is desirable that these are identified at the outset and
H22 124 analysed in detail. ^For example, \0B.Mason (Dunedin) has prepared a
H22 125 detailed draft report and map of Otago, showing *"landscape
H22 126 settings**" and their potential for different recreational
H22 127 experiences.
H22 128    |^Because of the complex and difficult nature of the issues
H22 129 involved, any landscape assessment should be done by those prepared to
H22 130 spend the time in the areas necessary to gain some appreciation and
H22 131 understanding of them. ^The full range of daily climatic and seasonal
H22 132 changes need to be understood for various areas as these are a vital
H22 133 part of the landscapes. ^This study has discussed landscape values in
H22 134 general. ^The specific values of each area in the context of
H22 135 surrounding landscape *- the Remarkables to Queenstown, or the
H22 136 distinctive volcanic forms of the Port Hills *1and *0their proximity
H22 137 to Christchurch, to give two very obvious examples *- need to be
H22 138 identified in detail.
H22 139 *<Landscape conservation and planning*>
H22 140    |^Landscape conservation of tussock grasslands could be
H22 141 accomplished in a variety of ways, either by management strategies by
H22 142 the landowner and manager, or under present New Zealand planning law.
H22 143 ^In considering landscape conservation, the following points should be
H22 144 addressed:
H22 145 _| *- ^Suitability of the land in terms of landscape values: ^the area
H22 146 of land in relation to the surrounding landscape, other reserves and
H22 147 amenities and appropriateness of boundaries are critical. ^For
H22 148 example, in conserving a view from a road, such as at the top of a
H22 149 pass, landscape conservation does not mean a strip along the roadside
H22 150 or the immediate hillside, but must consider management of everything
H22 151 that can be seen in the distance as well *- the visual corridor.
H22 152 | *- ^Management: ^tussock grasslands often need some control to guard
H22 153 against unwanted plants, or succession to scrub. ^This applies
H22 154 especially to snow and red tussock grasslands below treeline, and
H22 155 fescue tussock grasslands, which have largely been induced and
H22 156 maintained by human intervention. ^Controlled grazing can be the best
H22 157 means of conserving tussock grasslands. ^It is also important in
H22 158 determining access for recreation, to consider implications for stock
H22 159 disturbance and possible increased fire risk.
H22 160 | *- ^Status of land: ^ideally tussock grasslands of significant
H22 161 landscape value should remain under state control, either as reserves
H22 162 or as leasehold with conditions imposed on their use. ^Conservation
H22 163 covenants and private reserves may be appropriate for some areas.
H22 164 ^Destocking and possible surrender of high-altitude Class *=VIIe and
H22 165 *=VIII land, as per Catchment Board Run Plans, may be desirable in
H22 166 many areas to conserve ecological values. ^However in doing this, it
H22 167 is vital that the values of tussock lower down are not threatened by
H22 168 more intensive use, or the context of hill faces compromised by the
H22 169 sudden change in management on either side of a retirement fence.
H22 170 *<Legislation*>
H22 171    |^Several pieces of legislation are applicable to conservation of
H22 172 tussock grassland areas. ^These are summarised below.
H22 173    |^*1The Land Act 1948: ^*0Several sections of this Act may be
H22 174 related to the protection of tussock grassland, usually by way of
H22 175 restriction of intensive use. ^Up to now, it has been administered by
H22 176 the Department of Lands and Survey through the Land Settlement Board.
H22 177 ^In future, it may be amended with the governmental restructuring.
H22 178 ^For protection of grasslands either directly or indirectly, the
H22 179 following sections are most significant:
H22 180 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H22 181 |^\0S.66(3) and 66AA(3) allow for the Land Settlement Board to limit
H22 182 stock numbers on land under pastoral lease and pastoral occupation
H22 183 licence respectively, as the Board determines.
H22 184 |^\0S.66A allows for the Board to grant recreation permits for any
H22 185 recreational, tourist accommodation, safari or other purpose that, in
H22 186 the opinion of the Board, may be properly undertaken on that land.
H22 187 ^\0S66A(3) allows refusal to grant a permit for any purpose that, in
H22 188 the opinion of the Board, is incompatible with any water or soil
H22 189 conservation objectives relating to the land. ^\0S66A(4) allows for
H22 190 surrender of {0PL} or {0POL} lands to facilitate erosion control
H22 191 measures as a condition of granting a recreation permit.
H22 192 |^\0S106 relates to conditions and restrictions for burning of tussock
H22 193 cover.
H22 194 |^\0S108 relates to conditions and restrictions on cultivation,
H22 195 cropping, ploughing and sowing of grass, clearing and felling of bush
H22 196 or scrub, afforestation and surface sowing in grass.
H22 197 **[END INDENTATION**]
H22 198    |^The Land Settlement Board also has a detailed Crown lands
H22 199 policy, incorporating rural landscape, high country and tree planting
H22 200 on crown leasehold land. ^These all seek to ensure wise land-use,
H22 201 protection of indigenous vegetation and sensitive design and
H22 202 management overall on crown land. ^The rural landscape policy requires
H22 203 landscape studies for all land development blocks, and in part 15 of
H22 204 the implementation says the {0LSB} will:
H22 205 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H22 206 |*"recognise the unique and sensitive nature of the high country and
H22 207 give special attention to all matters affecting high country
H22 208 landscapes.**"
H22 209 **[END INDENTATION**]
H22 210    |^The Act and policies offer considerable scope for conservation
H22 211 of tussock grassland landscapes under Crown ownership, particularly
H22 212 pastoral leasehold lands. ^Application of the various aspects of the
H22 213 Land Act may unfortunately be compromised by the ability and attitudes
H22 214 of those administering it or by unauthorised lessee development which
H22 215 often proceeds without any action by the Department.
H22 216    |^*1The Reserves Act 1977: ^*0This statute has sections requiring
H22 217 administering bodies to draft management plans ensuring use,
H22 218 enjoyment, maintenance, protection and preservation of reserves, with
H22 219 opportunity for public submissions. ^There is provision for the Crown
H22 220 to enter into a covenant with landholders (freehold or leasehold) to
H22 221 protect land for its natural, scientific, scenic or cultural
H22 222 interests. ^Conservation covenants may also be arranged, for a
H22 223 specified time or in perpetuity, that are binding on future owners.
H22 224 ^At present this Act appears to be useful as a means of getting
H22 225 natural areas reserved, but there has thus far been a lack of
H22 226 resources and motivation for reservation of russock grasslands
H22 227 (Calvert, 1984).
H22 228 *#
H23 001 **[287 TEXT H23**]
H23 002 ^*0This would give the Crown greater control over the development of
H23 003 the mineral resources of New Zealand and would at the same time
H23 004 encourage owners of private minerals to ascertain and develop the
H23 005 mineral potential of their land.
H23 006    |^A detailed legislative precedent for this option is contained in
H23 007 the Mineral Land Tax Act 1979 of the Canadian province of British
H23 008 Columbia. ^It is also an option that has been urged in submissions
H23 009 presented to us in behalf of the New Zealand Mineral Explorers
H23 010 Association. ^There are, however, significant administrative
H23 011 difficulties involved in implementing this option, not the least of
H23 012 which would be the need to determine ownership of minerals in all
H23 013 titles before this system could be applied. ^More information is being
H23 014 sought on the British Columbian experience.
H23 015    |^In none of the Canadian provinces has there been a general
H23 016 resumption of mineral ownership by the Crown, as has occurred in
H23 017 Victoria and South Australia.
H23 018 *<d Confirmation of the Crown's right to mine for gold and silver*>
H23 019    |^The *"royal metals**" (gold and silver) present something of a
H23 020 special case. ^They are and always have been owned by the Crown, even
H23 021 in otherwise *"private**" land, but the common (though not universal)
H23 022 understanding of the law in New Zealand is that the Crown does not
H23 023 have the right to mine and remove those metals from *"private**" land
H23 024 without the landowner's consent. ^Because this is a frustration of the
H23 025 Crown's right of ownership of gold and silver, a statutory
H23 026 confirmation of the Crown's right to mine and remove those metals,
H23 027 wherever they are found, would be a logical development. ^It would
H23 028 have the effect of making all freehold land containing gold and silver
H23 029 open for mining for those minerals without the need for obtaining the
H23 030 landowner's consent in the case of land presently classified as
H23 031 *"private**" land.
H23 032 *<e Unification of ownership of minerals and rights of extraction*>
H23 033    |^This option represents an extension of the previous option so
H23 034 that it covers all minerals, whether they are in Crown or private
H23 035 ownership. ^It confirms that ownership of minerals includes in all
H23 036 cases the associated rights of extraction.
H23 037    |^Cases where minerals and the rights of access and extraction
H23 038 needed to mine them are owned by different persons are rare, except in
H23 039 the special case of gold and silver. ^Nevertheless the possibility of
H23 040 separate ownership of minerals and extraction rights is provided for
H23 041 in present legislation and is open to the same criticism as applies to
H23 042 the case of the Crown-owned *"royal**" metals, gold and silver.
H23 043 *<f Abolition of the requirement for the consent of private mineral
H23 044 owners to the issue of prospecting and mining licences*>
H23 045    |^This option is advocated in approximately one third of the
H23 046 submissions dealing with mineral ownership and landowners' consents.
H23 047 ^At the same time, the private mineral owner's continued entitlement
H23 048 to rent, royalties and compensation is recognised. ^The most favoured
H23 049 alternative to the present consent requirements is a compensation
H23 050 agreement, to be negotiated (or arbitrated in default of agreement)
H23 051 before entry on land to commence prospecting or mining operations.
H23 052 |^In the Australian states, requirements for private landowners'
H23 053 consents to the issue of prospecting and mining licences are in
H23 054 general non-existent. ^There are the usual classes of protected land
H23 055 that exist in New Zealand *- land under crop, or used as a yard,
H23 056 garden, orchard, \0etc, or the site of a building, cemetery, or
H23 057 waterworks.
H23 058    |^In Canada, where there is considerable private ownership of
H23 059 minerals, the position regarding owners' consents differs from one
H23 060 province to another. ^Some provinces require the mineral operator to
H23 061 obtain the owner's consent or to expropriate the land before entry can
H23 062 be made. ^Other provinces (the majority) provide for an arbitration of
H23 063 compensation or give the mineral operator a general, but limited,
H23 064 right of entry. ^Compensation for loss or damage is always payable by
H23 065 the mineral operator.
H23 066 *<g The *"status quo**"*>
H23 067    |^The final option *- that of leaving things substantially as they
H23 068 are *- is only acceptable if the disadvantages of the present system
H23 069 are less than the disadvantages of any of the options for change. ^It
H23 070 is listed here for the sake of completeness but has few if any
H23 071 advocates.
H23 072    |^In the area of mineral ownership *- which is the subject of this
H23 073 chapter *- the problems associated with the present New Zealand system
H23 074 are not peculiar to this country. ^They are (or have been) experienced
H23 075 to a greater or lesser extent in all of the Australian states and
H23 076 Canadian provinces. ^A number of those jurisdictions have adopted or
H23 077 are proposing to adopt one or other of the options examined above in
H23 078 order to lessen or remove those problems.
H23 079 |Thus:
H23 080 _|*?31 ^The option of replacing landowners' consents with arbitrated
H23 081 or negotiated compensation agreements is common throughout the
H23 082 Australian states. ^Comparable provisions exist in the legislation of
H23 083 several of the Canadian provinces.
H23 084 |*?31 ^The option of direct Crown acquisition of privately owned
H23 085 minerals has been or is to be applied in four of the Australian
H23 086 states.
H23 087 |*?31 ^The option of indirect Crown acquisition of private minerals
H23 088 (through a tax) has been applied in at least one Canadian province
H23 089 (British Columbia).
H23 090 |*?31 ^In the Australian states the Crown's ownership of gold and
H23 091 silver is treated as including rights of access and extraction and
H23 092 therefore the right to authorise prospecting and mining for those
H23 093 metals (option (d) above). ^This is also the case in the majority of
H23 094 the Canadian provinces (although in Quebec the Government's
H23 095 authorisation is required before anyone can stake out lands in which
H23 096 only gold and silver have been reserved to the Crown).
H23 097    |^The only change option for which no precedent has been found is
H23 098 option (a) above *- the abandonment of Crown mineral reservation and
H23 099 ownership in favour of private landowners. ^Quite apart from national
H23 100 interest considerations involved in the Crown's ownership and control
H23 101 of New Zealand's mineral resources, this option probably could not be
H23 102 entertained unless the legislation also provided that the land
H23 103 affected was open for mining without the landowner's consent. ^To do
H23 104 otherwise would increase rather than reduce the difficulties now
H23 105 experienced in the development of mineral resources in private land,
H23 106 where the landowner has an effective right of veto on such
H23 107 development.
H23 108    |^As already mentioned, the second and third of the options listed
H23 109 *- resumption of mineral ownership by the Crown and the introduction
H23 110 of taxation measures encouraging abandonment of private minerals to
H23 111 Crown ownership *- have been adopted and applied in comparable
H23 112 jurisdictions faced with problems similar to those in New Zealand. ^We
H23 113 have been informed by persons operating in those jurisdictions that
H23 114 they have been effective reforms *- rather less so in the case of the
H23 115 taxation option than in the cases of general Crown resumption of
H23 116 ownership of private minerals and of the rights needed to mine them.
H23 117    |^The other three options *- linking mineral ownership and
H23 118 extraction rights (both Crown and private) and removing the
H23 119 requirement for private owners' consents *- already exist in other
H23 120 jurisdictions. ^It was apparent to members of the review team during
H23 121 discussions with Australian state officials that the problems
H23 122 encountered under the different practice in New Zealand were absent or
H23 123 greatly reduced in the Australian states surveyed.
H23 124 *<*6CHAPTER 3: RIGHTS OF LANDOWNERS*>
H23 125    |^*0The ownership of land and of minerals are complex issues which
H23 126 were dealt with in the previous chapter. ^Here we deal with the rights
H23 127 of landowners and occupiers in respect of prospecting and mining by
H23 128 others on their land.
H23 129    |^The rights which have to be considered are:
H23 130 _|*?31 The right of a landowner whose fee simple title gives him
H23 131 ownership of the minerals in his land, to consent or not, to the grant
H23 132 of a mining licence or a prospecting licence; the right to require
H23 133 conditions to be attached to this consent; and the question of whether
H23 134 a consent given in such a case for a prospecting licence should be
H23 135 binding on the landowner in the event of a subsequent mining licence
H23 136 application.
H23 137 |*?31 The right to refuse access to his land for gold and silver
H23 138 prospecting and mining.
H23 139 |*?31 The right of a landholder to notice of entry on to his land by a
H23 140 licence holder.
H23 141 |*?31 The entitlement of a landholder whose fee simple title reserves
H23 142 mineral ownership to the Crown to ask for conditions to be placed on a
H23 143 licence.
H23 144 |*?31 The right of a landholder to compensation for damage done and
H23 145 for loss of use of land due to prospecting or mining operations.
H23 146    |^The classes of land which will be considered are as follows:
H23 147 _|*?31 Maori land.
H23 148 |*?31 Freehold land where the mineral ownership is vested in the
H23 149 titleholder.
H23 150 |*?31 Freehold land where the mineral ownership is reserved to the
H23 151 Crown and Crown leasehold land.
H23 152    |^It should be noted that Crown land subject to ministerial
H23 153 consent has not been dealt with in this chapter and that gold and
H23 154 silver are always reserved to the Crown.
H23 155    |^Taking the land categories in order:
H23 156 *<*4Maori Land*>
H23 157    |^Maori land is open for prospecting or mining only with the
H23 158 written consent of the owners. ^In general this provides adequate
H23 159 protection because consent can always be withheld.
H23 160    |^In the case of exploration licences, no owner's consent is
H23 161 required for Maori land, or for any other class of land, except to
H23 162 enter on or near to certain protected places {0eg} land under crop,
H23 163 gardens, orchards, burial grounds, waterworks, air strips, \0etc.
H23 164 ^Other than these protected areas all that is at present required is
H23 165 that the licensee should give reasonable notice of entry, if
H23 166 practicable, to the owner and occupier of the land.
H23 167    |^In 1983 the Public and Administrative Law Reform Committee
H23 168 recommended that 7 days' notice be given to land occupiers before
H23 169 entry is made on land by holders of exploration licences.
H23 170    |^We received a submission which recommended that the holder of
H23 171 any licence on Maori land *"should employ a kaumatua consultant from
H23 172 that tribal area for the duration of the work**". ^If this suggestion
H23 173 is taken up it would only be necessary to legislate for it in the case
H23 174 of exploration licences. ^Under present law all other licences may be
H23 175 granted only within the consent of the Maori owners who in giving it
H23 176 could require the appointment of a kaumatua.
H23 177    |^The same submission made the additional point that where land
H23 178 has been endowed by Maori people for some particular purpose, and
H23 179 subsequently the Minister of Energy seeks to bring the endowment
H23 180 within the operation of the Mining Act, he ought first to obtain the
H23 181 consent of those who made the endowment as well as that of the
H23 182 authority which administers it. ^This requirement, if adopted, could
H23 183 well be applied to all endowment land, Maori or otherwise.
H23 184 *<*4Freehold land where mineral ownership is reserved to the
H23 185 titleholder*>
H23 186    |^This class of land is defined as *"private land**" for the
H23 187 purposes of the Mining Act. ^It is open for prospecting or mining only
H23 188 with the consent of the titleholder. ^This definition needs to be
H23 189 borne in mind in reading the following paragraphs. ^In spite of what
H23 190 follows and for so long as the present interpretation of the law
H23 191 relating to access to gold and silver is retained, the landowner is in
H23 192 control of the situation because his land is only open for mining with
H23 193 his consent and presumably he will only consent if he thinks it is in
H23 194 his interest to do so.
H23 195    |^Consent to prospecting or mining may be granted subject to
H23 196 conditions to be attached to the licence but these conditions are
H23 197 appealable if considered to be unreasonable. ^Without the consent of
H23 198 the landholder an application for a licence over private land is void.
H23 199 ^Consent once given is irrevocable and is binding on successors to the
H23 200 land title. ^Also, consent to a prospecting licence for minerals other
H23 201 than coal constitutes a consent to a subsequent mining licence.
H23 202 ^However, when a mining licence is applied for, a landowner may
H23 203 require additional conditions relating to protection and
H23 204 rehabilitation of his land to be placed on the licence.
H23 205    |^The question as to whether a consent by a private landowner to a
H23 206 prospecting licence should carry over to a subsequent mining licence
H23 207 is a contentious one. ^Under the Coal Mining Act separate consents are
H23 208 required, but a Mining Act consent to prospecting is deemed to be a
H23 209 consent to subsequent mining.
H23 210  *#
H24 001 **[288 TEXT H24**]
H24 002    |^*4The Conservation Act requires that new commercial concessions
H24 003 can be granted only in accordance with an approved management plan,
H24 004 frequently delaying their authorisation.
H24 005    |^*0The granting of concessions to provide facilities and services
H24 006 for visitors to stewardship and protected areas has benefits for both
H24 007 the public and resource managers. ^There is already frustration by
H24 008 potential commercial operators and the tourism industry at the time
H24 009 taken to grant or decline concession applications.
H24 010    |^Management plans are required for all conservation areas. ^The
H24 011 department is joining with the tourism industry in looking at ways of
H24 012 streamlining the management planning process for national parks. ^It
H24 013 is also beginning the process of developing a new policy appropriate
H24 014 to the responsibilities of the new department. ^Changes to the
H24 015 Conservation Act to provide for provisional concessionaire activity
H24 016 may need to be considered to overcome these problems.
H24 017 *<*4User Pays and Cost Recovery*>
H24 018    |^Cost recovery targets are high and will be difficult to achieve.
H24 019    |^*0The Conservation Act 1987 provides that public access to and
H24 020 use of conservation areas shall be free of charge, including use of
H24 021 roads, paths and tracks. ^The department may charge for the use of
H24 022 facilities and services but it is not yet clear to what extent users
H24 023 will pay for this limited range of recreation/ tourism services and
H24 024 facilities.
H24 025    |^Any charges made or revenue generating system implemented must
H24 026 reflect the level and quality of service provided. ^At present,
H24 027 funding levels are such that maintenance of existing facilities will
H24 028 be difficult and quality of service will be hard to maintain.
H24 029 ^Resistance to charging for previously free services and facilities
H24 030 (huts for example) can be expected and substantial increases in
H24 031 charges creates consumer resistance.
H24 032 *<4Commercial and Public Service Activities*>
H24 033    |^Some {0DOC} activities and functions are purely a public service
H24 034 and should not be expected to recover costs. ^Others have commercial
H24 035 aspects and targets should be set to recover costs from those.
H24 036    |^*0Some directorates (Protected Ecosystems and Species for
H24 037 example), provide a purely public service and cannot be expected to
H24 038 recover costs. ^Others (such as Recreation and Tourism), provide some
H24 039 services and facilities that can be charged and for which cost
H24 040 recovery is therefore possible. ^Consideration should be given to
H24 041 separating these functions out and setting targets for cost recovery
H24 042 only from functional areas of the department with the ability to
H24 043 recover costs.
H24 044 *<*4No Offence Provisions for Concessions*>
H24 045    |^The Conservation Act contains no provision making it an offence
H24 046 to undertake a commercial operation in a conservation area without a
H24 047 lease or licence.
H24 048    |^*0In several districts, particularly Northland, a number of
H24 049 commercial entrepreneurs are operating in conservation areas without a
H24 050 lease or licence. ^These areas do not have current management plans as
H24 051 required by the Conservation Act. ^Without offence provisions in the
H24 052 Conservation Act the Department cannot enforce the intent that all
H24 053 commercial activity be subject to a lease or licence. ^The department
H24 054 will face public criticism if it permits commercial activity on its
H24 055 lands without a formal licence agreement.
H24 056    |^Changes to the Conservation Act to include offence provisions
H24 057 need to be considered and, in the meantime, solutions need to be found
H24 058 to allow the department to grant leases and licences.
H24 059 *<*4Additional Funding From the Tourism Sector*>
H24 060    |^There is a strong case for additional funding to the Department
H24 061 from the Tourism Sector because overseas visitors use departmental
H24 062 facilities.
H24 063    |^*0Overseas tourists use facilities and services that {0DOC}
H24 064 provide, both those that are currently provided free of charge and
H24 065 those that are charged. ^It is clear that many overseas visitors come
H24 066 to New Zealand specifically to enjoy national parks and other natural
H24 067 areas in the public domain.
H24 068    |^Those facilities for which no charges are made are a cost to the
H24 069 taxpayer and additional funding from the tourism sector should be
H24 070 sought to help pay for them.
H24 071 *<*4Additional Government Taxing Through {0GST}*>
H24 072    |^Visitors pay {0GST} for facilities and services provided. ^This
H24 073 extra revenue to conservation areas could provide more Government
H24 074 funding for conservation.
H24 075    |^*0Overseas and domestic tourists pay {0GST} for services and
H24 076 facilities. ^It can be argued that additional funding for the
H24 077 department should be made available because of the extra revenue
H24 078 {0GST} provides. ^These extra funds should be put to provision of
H24 079 tourist/ visitor amenities on protected natural areas.
H24 080 *<*4{0CAPS} Scheme*>
H24 081    |^The {0CAPS} Scheme, although helpful, cannot compensate for
H24 082 extra funding required to provide visitor facilities.
H24 083    |^*0Money has been provided for development of facilities over the
H24 084 last 2 years through the {0CAPS} scheme administered by Tourist and
H24 085 Publicity Department. ^While the department welcomes any funding, the
H24 086 appropriateness of another Minister raising revenue for {0DOC} lands
H24 087 raises difficulties with assessing priorities. ^The department itself
H24 088 should be able to set its priorities for capital development and is
H24 089 less able to do so when some of the funding comes from the tourism
H24 090 vote.
H24 091 *<*4Oparara, Honeycomb Hill Caves*>
H24 092    |^There has been recent pressure to develop these caves of high
H24 093 scientific importance for commercial guided tours.
H24 094    |^*0It is recognised by several scientific authorities that the
H24 095 caves contain bird bone deposits of international significance as well
H24 096 as outstanding examples of cave morphology. ^In order to provide some
H24 097 support for recreational developments in Karamea (without risking
H24 098 irrevocable damage to the cave system) a small section has been
H24 099 *"developed**" for guided tours operated on a cost recovery basis by
H24 100 the Department. ^Tour parties are kept small and only a small number
H24 101 of trips are undertaken every year. ^A Scientific Advisory Committee
H24 102 has strongly recommended against commercial development for a period
H24 103 of years so that the effects of the present level of use can be
H24 104 monitored and assessed.
H24 105 *<*4Mount Robert Ski Field Access Road*>
H24 106    |^The Nelson-Marlborough National Park and Reserves Board has
H24 107 supported a Nelson Ski Club application to build a road to its
H24 108 skifield; an application that had been turned down by the National
H24 109 Parks and Reserves Authority.
H24 110    |^*0There are four major concerns that lead to the Authority
H24 111 rejecting the proposal: *-
H24 112 _| *- ^The road would not significantly reduce the walking distance to
H24 113 the ski field.
H24 114 | *- ^The construction of the road was fraught with physical and
H24 115 environmental problems.
H24 116 | *- ^The road would not enhance the ability to quickly evacuate ski
H24 117 patrons from the ski field in adverse weather conditions.
H24 118 | *- ^The development costs are high compared to the snow reliability
H24 119 of the field.
H24 120    |^The Department of Conservation supports the view held by the
H24 121 National Parks and Reserves Authority that the Mount Robert access
H24 122 road should not be extended.
H24 123 *<*4Review of Legislation*>
H24 124    |^The Historic Places Act 1980 contains ineffective protection for
H24 125 many historic places, and major review is expected next year.
H24 126    |^*0Automatic protection is provided for archaeological sites
H24 127 only. ^However, this does not prevent the destruction of many sites.
H24 128 ^Once traditional sites and historic areas have been declared by the
H24 129 Trust, recommendations may be made to the local authority on
H24 130 preservation but there is no requirement that those recommendations
H24 131 should be acted upon.
H24 132    |^There is no automatic protection for any classified building.
H24 133 ^Buildings and structures classified A or B can have a protection
H24 134 notice placed over them with the consent of the Minister. ^The
H24 135 classification procedure laid out in the Act is cumbersome and
H24 136 outdated by international standards. ^The potential for compensation
H24 137 to be awarded against the Trust, if it infringes the rights of owners
H24 138 in carrying out its statutory procedures, needs clarification.
H24 139 *<*4Protection Notices*>
H24 140    |^The Trust's only legal protection against the alteration,
H24 141 demolition or extension of an historic building classified A or B is
H24 142 to issue a protection notice which must be approved by the Minister of
H24 143 Conservation.
H24 144    |^*0The Historic Places Trust can approach the Minister of
H24 145 Conservation for approval of the issuing of a protection notice over a
H24 146 building classified A or B when the Trust believes a building may be
H24 147 under threat, or proposed alterations are unsympathetic.
H24 148    |^Ten protection notices have been issued *- 500 buildings are
H24 149 classified A or B. ^The Minister may be asked to sign protection
H24 150 notices on buildings owned by major developers, private individuals,
H24 151 local authorities, state owned enterprises and the Crown. ^A
H24 152 protection notice over the State Insurance Office, Wellington may be
H24 153 presented for approval in the near future.
H24 154 *<*4Financial and Planning Incentives*>
H24 155    |^There is pressure building to introduce financial and planning
H24 156 incentives to encourage owners of historic places to preserve their
H24 157 properties rather than destroy them.
H24 158    |^*0In many cases it is financially advantageous for an owner of
H24 159 an historic property to demolish or destroy it.
H24 160    |^In a number of overseas countries, tax incentives have been
H24 161 introduced and have resulted in a greater recognition of the value of
H24 162 rehabilitation of historic properties. ^There is a requirement to
H24 163 consider the introduction of tax incentives or other financial
H24 164 incentives such as rates relief and recognition of heritage values in
H24 165 land valuations.
H24 166 *<*4Maori Traditional Sites*>
H24 167    |^There may be increasing pressure placed on the Minister to
H24 168 become involved in issues relating to the recognition and protection
H24 169 of traditional sites.
H24 170    |^*0The Trust may declare a place or site as a traditional site
H24 171 which is important by reason of its historic significance or spiritual
H24 172 or emotional association with the Maori people.
H24 173    |^While the Minister rarely becomes involved in the declaration of
H24 174 traditional sites, some groups may make a direct approach to the
H24 175 Minister regarding protection of such sites.
H24 176 *<*4Archaeological Sites*>
H24 177    |^Individuals or organisations can appeal to the Minister against
H24 178 decisions made by the Trust on the Protection of Archaeological sites.
H24 179 ^One such appeal is before the Minister at present.
H24 180    |^*0Section 48 of the Historic Places Act provides the right of
H24 181 appeal to the Minister against any decision made by the Trust under
H24 182 the protection of archaeological sites provisions of Section 46 of the
H24 183 Act. ^The appeal before the Minister is from Wilkins and Davies in
H24 184 Auckland and was lodged on 28 January 1987. ^The appeal is against the
H24 185 Trust's decision to decline an authority to modify archaeological
H24 186 sites by the Ohiatua Quarry Development, Mangere, Auckland.
H24 187    |^The Trust and {0DOC} are considering possibilities of gaining
H24 188 long term protection of archaeological sites on this land. ^They
H24 189 represent the last substantial remains of pre-European settlements on
H24 190 Auckland's volcanic lava fields.
H24 191 *<*64.5 ADVOCACY AND EXTENSION*>
H24 192 *<*4Quango Review*>
H24 193    |^The Department is reviewing the structure and functions of all
H24 194 quangos serviced by it.
H24 195    |^*0Certain areas of conservation advice and management are
H24 196 covered by a number of quangos. ^The reorganisation of environmental
H24 197 administration, has raised questions over the relevance of some
H24 198 quangos.
H24 199    |^A system is needed to channel public experience and information
H24 200 on conservation issues, as the Department does not have a monopoly on
H24 201 conservation wisdom. ^Quangos being reviewed include the National
H24 202 Parks and Reserves Authority and its boards; Forest Park Advisory
H24 203 Committees; the Nature Conservation Council; Walkways Commission and
H24 204 Acclimatisation Societies.
H24 205 *<*4Antarctica*>
H24 206    |^The Department has a responsibility to promote the conservation
H24 207 of the natural and historic features of the Ross Dependency and
H24 208 Antarctica generally.
H24 209    |^*0Current debate on Antarctica reveals two opposing positions:
H24 210 protect the continent's conservation values or explore its development
H24 211 potential. ^Antarctica is seen as the world's last vast wilderness and
H24 212 provides a baseline for study of world-wide environment trends.
H24 213    |^Conservation appears to have been favoured by past New Zealand
H24 214 governments. ^New Zealand's ability to exert its sovereignty claim
H24 215 over Antarctic territory is limited and pressures to develop the
H24 216 continent are strong. ^New Zealand must maintain active involvement in
H24 217 discussions regarding development proposals, ({0eg} mineral
H24 218 exploitation). ^A world park status for the continent has been
H24 219 advocated by environmental groups.
H24 220 *<*4Conservation Economics*>
H24 221    |^Further study of economic benefits to the Department from use of
H24 222 conservation areas is required.
H24 223    |^*0Not all the benefits generated by conservation initiatives are
H24 224 in a form that can be marketed by the Department. ^For example a
H24 225 national park may generate tourism which benefits a regional economy.
H24 226 ^Presently the tourist industry provides modest financial grants for
H24 227 park visitor centres, tracks \0etc.
H24 228    |^A better understanding of regional economic benefits may enable
H24 229 the Department to obtain additional funds from other sections of the
H24 230 community. ^Even if a region was simply aware of the magnitude of
H24 231 benefits generated by protected areas public support for conservation
H24 232 would be enhanced.
H24 233 *<*4Review of Resources *- Use Statutes*>
H24 234    |^The Department is providing an input into the current review of
H24 235 resource-use statutes to ensure adequate consideration is given to the
H24 236 conservation perspective.
H24 237 *#
H25 001 **[289 TEXT H25**]
H25 002    |^*1Framework is a recently developed community-based charitable
H25 003 trust situated in Auckland. ^It was established to take the initiative
H25 004 for, and promote the provision of, projects in the community for
H25 005 people who have experienced mental ill-health. ^This paper describes
H25 006 the development of Framework from the kernel of an idea to a reality.
H25 007 *<*4The Origins of Framework*>
H25 008    |^*0In December 1980 a group of para-medicals working at
H25 009 Carrington Hospital in the field of vocational rehabilitation got
H25 010 together to discuss the issue of unemployment amongst psychiatric
H25 011 patients following the visit of \0Dr. Early. ^\0Dr. Early is a
H25 012 psychiatrist working in this field in England and the Mental Health
H25 013 Foundation had sponsored his visit, which was intended to generate
H25 014 discussion on ways and means of dealing with this problem. ^\0Dr.
H25 015 Early had been a driving force in establishing a charitable trust
H25 016 which developed, firstly, work alternatives for ex-psychiatric
H25 017 patients in the form of Industrial Therapy Units, which were outside
H25 018 the hospital institutions, and secondly, alternative accommodation.
H25 019    |^In 1981 a working party was formed to address the lack of
H25 020 community resources for psychiatric patients who, because of the lack
H25 021 of such facilities, remained linked with hospital services. ^The
H25 022 working party resolved that a charitable trust could cater for these
H25 023 people by providing a variety of services to be determined by the
H25 024 expressed needs of psychiatric patients. ^It was envisaged that a
H25 025 charitable trust could utilise a variety of funding sources including
H25 026 Government Departments, such as Social Welfare, Labour, and Health, as
H25 027 well as the private sector.
H25 028 *<*4Outpatient Survey*>
H25 029    |^*0Later in 1981 two {0P.E.P.} workers were employed to conduct a
H25 030 survey of Carrington Hospital staff, which aimed to assess the needs
H25 031 of outpatients. ^A second survey assessed the availability of existing
H25 032 workshop facilities and employment opportunities.
H25 033    |^Staff from Carrington Hospital and its affiliated agencies, who
H25 034 were working with outpatients and ex-patients, completed a
H25 035 questionnaire on each of those currently unemployed and appearing to
H25 036 require sheltered employment. ^The majority of questionnaires were
H25 037 completed by psychiatric home visitor staff the remainder by staff
H25 038 from the Occupational and Industrial Therapy, Psychology and Social
H25 039 Work Departments and in the affiliated community mental health
H25 040 centres, Ponsonby Care and Pentlands.
H25 041    |^A search of the hospital files suggested a target population of
H25 042 approximately 400 outpatients. ^In all, questionnaires for 313
H25 043 outpatients were returned, aged from 15 to 60 years, with a roughly
H25 044 normal distribution about a mean age of 37.6 years. ^Slightly more of
H25 045 this sample were male (56%), 77% were of European ethnic origin, with
H25 046 11% Maori and Pacific Island. ^Out of this sample, 87% have worked,
H25 047 and of those only 14% were dismissed from their last job
H25 048 (predominantly for being *"too slow**"). ^The reasons that most gave
H25 049 for leaving employment were *"illness**" (39%) or leaving of their own
H25 050 accord (41%). ^Seventy-four per cent of the sample had worked in
H25 051 unskilled jobs, 10% in skilled jobs, 2% were professionals and 2% were
H25 052 students. ^Based on knowledge of their work history, staff rated work
H25 053 *"regularity and consistency**" for 211 outpatients. ^The results
H25 054 suggested that the population was divided into two groups, one group
H25 055 of moderately inconsistent and irregular workers, and another group of
H25 056 moderately consistent and regular workers. ^(This suggestion, though,
H25 057 still warrants further investigation).
H25 058    |^During their unemployment, the majority of outpatients appear to
H25 059 have made some attempt at finding jobs through work-related agencies.
H25 060 ^Two thirds of a sub-sample of 188 outpatients had contacted an agency
H25 061 with the aim of finding employment. ^Of those who had made the effort,
H25 062 most contacts were to the Industrial Therapy Department at Carrington
H25 063 Hospital (25%), the Rehabilitation League (23%), the Labour Department
H25 064 (20%) or the Auckland Sheltered Workshop (18%). ^Overall, about half
H25 065 the contacts made resulted in some form of placement. ^Contacts with
H25 066 the Sheltered Workshops and Industrial Therapy were the most likely to
H25 067 lead to some form of employment, while contact with the Labour
H25 068 Department seemed to have had the least chance of leading to
H25 069 employment possibilities.
H25 070    |^Staff made estimates of current work skill functioning according
H25 071 to the complexity of work tasks and the level of supervision required.
H25 072 ^Few in the sample were capable of complex tasks with supervision (6%)
H25 073 or without it (8%). ^The majority were at the level of either simple or
H25 074 moderately difficult tasks, most requiring supervision at both these
H25 075 levels (20% were rated as being able to cope with simple tasks with
H25 076 supervision, and 16% with simple tasks without supervision; 30% could
H25 077 cope with moderately difficult tasks with supervision, 20% without
H25 078 supervision).
H25 079    |^Besides estimating current functioning, estimates were made of
H25 080 how motivated the person was to participate in *"meaningful daily
H25 081 activity of a work nature**". ^Ten per cent of the sample were
H25 082 characterised as very unmotivated; 32% as indifferent; 36% as
H25 083 motivated and 7% as very motivated. ^A further finding was that there
H25 084 was a high cost to the Social Welfare Department in terms of Sickness
H25 085 and Invalid Benefits, as over 88% of the patients sampled, were
H25 086 receiving Social Security benefits. ^It was thought that some of this
H25 087 benefit money could be redirected to create more employment and
H25 088 training facilities for rehabilitation purposes.
H25 089    |^In summary, the survey indicated a number of salient points:
H25 090 _|1. ^The majority of the sample were unskilled and would therefore
H25 091 experience difficulties competing for open employment.
H25 092 |2. ^From a knowledge of work history, individuals surveyed varied
H25 093 considerably across levels of: acquired work skills, regularity and
H25 094 consistency, occupational functioning and motivation.
H25 095    |^Clearly, in catering for such a diverse population, a work trust
H25 096 would need to provide a broad range of tasks and degree of
H25 097 supervision. ^Alternatively, the trust could attempt to establish
H25 098 small units for specific levels of client functioning. ^At present
H25 099 agencies such as Industrial Therapy and Sheltered Workshops provide
H25 100 most opportunities for this population; however, these facilities are
H25 101 limited in the number and type of clientele they can assist.
H25 102 *<*4Survey of Workshop Facilities*>
H25 103    |^The survey of workshop facilities included eight sheltered
H25 104 workshops in Auckland, five of which were associated with {0I.H.C.},
H25 105 the other three being run by different community groups. ^One workshop
H25 106 was run as a factory intended to make a profit and it was the only one
H25 107 to reach 100% self-sufficiency. ^This workshop included non-disabled
H25 108 employees in association with the disabled. ^The other seven workshops
H25 109 were less than 40% self-sufficient. ^All work was labour-intensive
H25 110 process work ranging from low to high grade packaging, with electronic
H25 111 work predominating.
H25 112    |^In three workshops over 80% of clients had contact with a
H25 113 psychiatric service and in the other five less than 40% of clients had
H25 114 contact. ^Six workshops were overloaded and the other two had recently
H25 115 expanded into new premises. ^Seven altogether were operating at full
H25 116 capacity and six needed to expand building space and equipment, with
H25 117 finance being a major stumbling block.
H25 118    |^Seven workshops had rehabilitation programmes preparatory to
H25 119 open employment and stated that there was a greater need than they
H25 120 could meet. ^The exception was the self-sufficient workshop. ^In
H25 121 summary, the survey of the facilities available for the disabled
H25 122 demonstrate that the majority were operating at full capacity and
H25 123 needed to expand building space and equipment but were hampered
H25 124 through lack of finance.
H25 125    |^At the same time as the surveys were being carried out, the
H25 126 Carrington Market Garden was being established as a Department of
H25 127 Labour Work Skills Development Programme. ^The Market Garden was
H25 128 approved in July 1981, and began with the author as supervisor, two
H25 129 instructors and facilities for twelve trainees. ^In June 1982,
H25 130 following further negotiations, Department of Labour Work Skills
H25 131 Development funding was obtained for a full-time Occupational
H25 132 Therapist and six extra trainee positions. ^Carrington Hospital also
H25 133 designated another four acres for the garden, making a total of seven
H25 134 acres. ^The Market Garden has stayed stable in staff and acreage since
H25 135 then and is now a flourishing concern.
H25 136    |^The results of the survey were submitted to the Auckland
H25 137 Hospital Board in 1983 along with a model prototype of a charitable
H25 138 trust which used the Carrington Market Garden as an example of the
H25 139 type of project envisaged. ^It was argued in the submission that the
H25 140 survey clearly indicated that the flow-through for a patient leaving
H25 141 hospital to live in the community was an area not well-serviced. ^For
H25 142 a patient to proceed and succeed along a rehabilitation programme into
H25 143 the community, this issue had to be addressed. ^Included in this
H25 144 submission to the Auckland Hospital Board were proposed
H25 145 recommendations for the involvement required of the Board for the
H25 146 establishment of such a trust. ^These were outlined in a sequential
H25 147 process by means of flow charts and staffing requirements were
H25 148 detailed. ^The Auckland Hospital Board expressed its support for the
H25 149 concept and approved secondment of the author as the Development
H25 150 Officer in January 1984.
H25 151 *<*4The Establishing of the Trust, 1984*>
H25 152    |^Throughout 1984 the author was directly responsible to \0Dr.
H25 153 Fraser McDonald, Medical Superintendent, and the Carrington Hospital
H25 154 Manager. ^We met fortnightly to discuss developments and progress. ^As
H25 155 the Trust was to cater for the Auckland Hospital Board area, a first
H25 156 priority was to call all psychiatric hospitals and related community
H25 157 services to extend the representation on the Working Party and to form
H25 158 the Trust's decision-making committee. ^Also, all community agencies
H25 159 concerned with assisting psychiatric patients were informed of the
H25 160 Working Party and the minutes of the meetings were made available.
H25 161 ^From that time on the role of the Working Party was to act as a
H25 162 steering committee for the Trust's developments.
H25 163    |^To clarify long term goals and identify short term goals, John
H25 164 Raeburn's systems model was used. ^A structure of group consensus
H25 165 evolved and the amicable sharing of tasks created a very positive
H25 166 approach, as at times it felt we had undertaken a formidable task!
H25 167 ^Another exciting aspect was to have health professionals from a
H25 168 variety of work areas all working towards a common goal. ^The first
H25 169 agenda for the Working Party was to formalize the philosophy and goals
H25 170 of the Trust. ^As originally concluded, the main goal was seen as the
H25 171 need to take the initiative for, and promote projects in the community
H25 172 for people who have experienced mental ill-health.
H25 173    |^It was decided that potential users of the projects should be
H25 174 involved in planning, via a questionnaire. ^Aligned with this it was
H25 175 established that projects should be kept small to enable a variety
H25 176 throughout the Auckland Hospital Board area that would meet the
H25 177 vocational, emotional and social needs of people as identified via the
H25 178 questionnaire. ^Access to potential clients would be via the Auckland
H25 179 Hospital Board, psychiatric services and associated community
H25 180 agencies.
H25 181    |^Throughout these initial stages the author approached 25 people
H25 182 to be trustees and in April 1984 ten people established the first
H25 183 trustees' meeting. ^The name *"Framework**" was adopted and a logo was
H25 184 designed. ^Three representatives of the Working Party and the author
H25 185 attended trustees' meetings and one trustee had worked with the Full
H25 186 Working Party. ^This procedure is still operating as the Working Party
H25 187 is seen as an integral part of Framework.
H25 188    |^In July 1984 two {0PEP} workers were employed to implement the
H25 189 client questionnaire. ^The questionnaire was chosen as the research
H25 190 mode as it allows participation on the part of the client. ^This was
H25 191 seen as a vital part of the study and exemplifies an underlying
H25 192 principle of the Working Party's goal. ^If the clients are to function
H25 193 well in the community they must feel responsible for their life and be
H25 194 active agents in the world, making their own decisions. ^To foster
H25 195 this, the clients would be encouraged to see the planned centres as
H25 196 theirs to mould, rather than as something already rigidly established.
H25 197    |^The questionnaire was implemented in a one-to-one interview
H25 198 session, with the interviewer discussing the questions with the client
H25 199 and recording the answers. ^It was hoped the answers would show the
H25 200 depth and type of need in the areas of work and activity. ^The
H25 201 interviews were open-ended and were intended to encourage the client
H25 202 to think more deeply and confidently about their answers.
H25 203    |^The ethics of dangling the *"carrot**" of employment in front of
H25 204 the clients were considered, but it was felt that misunderstanding
H25 205 could be avoided by sensitive interviewing. ^The questionnaire would
H25 206 be presented simply as a survey to get ideas from clients, with an
H25 207 invitation extended to them to get involved in planning if they
H25 208 wished.
H25 209 *#
H26 001 **[290 TEXT H26**]
H26 002    |^*0Ladies and Gentlemen,
H26 003    |^It is with considerable satisfaction that I present the Report
H26 004 of the Foundation for 1986.
H26 005    |^The past year will be recalled as a period of some austerity
H26 006 where economies have been looked for on all sides and where grants in
H26 007 every field have come under intense scrutiny. ^It is pleasing,
H26 008 therefore, to be able to report that, rather than feeling obliged to
H26 009 curtail its activities, the Board has been able to maintain and even
H26 010 to increase its research funding.
H26 011    |^Some 25 years ago, when strong submissions were being made for
H26 012 the establishment of a second School of Medicine in New Zealand, a
H26 013 party headed by the Chairman of the University Grants Committee, \0Dr
H26 014 {0F J} Llewellyn, visited Auckland. ^Even then it was by no means
H26 015 certain that Auckland would be the preferred location. ^But one can
H26 016 clearly recall \0Dr Llewellyn, on behalf of his committee, expressing
H26 017 how surprised but how genuinely impressed they were with the research
H26 018 being undertaken in Auckland and with the enthusiasm and obvious skill
H26 019 of those conducting it. ^There is little doubt that the groups, who
H26 020 had important recommendations to make, were greatly influenced by what
H26 021 they saw that day.
H26 022    |^Sir Douglas Robb, in his autobiography records with some pride
H26 023 that the newly-formed Foundation was providing about 3,500**[SIC**] a
H26 024 year at that time. ^The Foundation has come a long way since then.
H26 025 ^Commitments of over *+$900,000 were approved during last year, a most
H26 026 encouraging increase, even when making due allowance for inflation.
H26 027 ^Those who took advantage of the opportunity to visit the School of
H26 028 Medicine during its recent open days could not fail to be impressed by
H26 029 the extent and importance of the research now being carried out.
H26 030    |^The Board has continued its policy of maintaining a good balance
H26 031 in its activities by complementing research projects with travel
H26 032 grants, fellowships, senior scholarships awards**[SIC**], and summer
H26 033 student research grants.
H26 034    |^Once again I express our sincere thanks to the Medical Committee
H26 035 chaired by Professor {0G S M} Kellaway. ^As Chairman for the last 14
H26 036 years Professor Kellaway's contribution has been invaluable. ^The
H26 037 Board leans heavily on the considered judgment and advice of this
H26 038 highly qualified group of people who give so freely of their time and
H26 039 expert knowledge in assessing with great care the many and varied
H26 040 applications they receive. ^There is, I believe, wide appreciation of
H26 041 the efforts of the committee to judge objectively the creativity of
H26 042 those seeking support and to ensure that funds are directed into the
H26 043 right channels and being efficiently used.
H26 044    |^One aspect which will give increasing concern in the future is
H26 045 the difficulty of providing the sophisticated and expensive equipment
H26 046 important in modern research. ^The Board is well aware of the problem
H26 047 together with the importance of ensuring an adequate supply of skilled
H26 048 technicians capable of working and maintaining equipment and
H26 049 instruments at maximum efficiency *- a task far too difficult for the
H26 050 researcher.
H26 051    |^As always, we are greatly indebted to the Finance Committee
H26 052 headed by \0Mr {0W D} Goodfellow, \0Mr {0G S} Blanshard, and \0Mr {0D
H26 053 G E} Brown, a triumvirate who would be the envy of any Board of
H26 054 Directors. ^As Treasurer and Chairman, \0Mr Goodfellow, in particular,
H26 055 devotes countless hours in directing and controlling the finances of
H26 056 the Foundation. ^With a committee of such strength, members and
H26 057 supporters together with Trust Officers, accountants and solicitors
H26 058 who advise their clients in the matter of legacies and bequests can
H26 059 have every confidence that the funds of the Foundation are in expert
H26 060 hands.
H26 061    |^We thank the retiring Hospital Board nominee, \0Mr {0W J}
H26 062 Bridgman, for his valuable contribution during his term of office and
H26 063 are pleased to welcome back \0Mrs {0A S} Barrett for a further term.
H26 064 ^Our thanks too, to retiring members, Professor {0A G C} Renwick and
H26 065 \0Dr \0P Doak.
H26 066    |^The very considerable volume of clerical and accounting work
H26 067 has, as usual, been carried out efficiently by the Secretary, \0Mr
H26 068 Gerald Wakely and his office staff. ^We are indebted to them for the
H26 069 pleasant and smooth running of the Foundation.
H26 070    |^By no means least, our sincere thanks to the {0A. S. B.} Trust
H26 071 Bank and to all members and supporters for their continued generous
H26 072 assistance. ^It is a great relief to the Board not to be faced with
H26 073 repeated fund-raising appeals.
H26 074    |^Finally, my grateful thanks to the members of the Board for
H26 075 their willing co-operation and their many constructive contributions
H26 076 throughout the year.
H26 077    |^People either have faith in research or regard it with some
H26 078 cynicism, believing that many projects are esoteric, almost entirely
H26 079 laboratory-oriented, and have little to do with people. ^This is not
H26 080 our experience. ^We are confident that the research of those whom we
H26 081 support, while important to the international medical scene, is
H26 082 broadly relevant to the institution and country where it is carried
H26 083 out and that the researchers are well aware of the society in which
H26 084 they live and the many health problems that exist there. ^We hope to
H26 085 encourage those who think deeply about the problems they encounter,
H26 086 are determined to understand them thoroughly and find solutions to
H26 087 them, and are eager to spread their knowledge amongst others and pass
H26 088 on their own feelings and enthusiasms. ^Such people are vital to a
H26 089 teaching hospital or university and have an all-important part to play
H26 090 in the provision of an enlightened and dedicated medical profession.
H26 091    |^We feel that the Foundation will be fulfilling its main function
H26 092 if it can continue to make provision for such men and women. ^In this
H26 093 way it can play its part in ensuring a Health Service with a nice
H26 094 balance between the breadth of experience of the general practitioner,
H26 095 the skill of the specialist, and the depth of knowledge of the
H26 096 researcher.
H26 097 **[BEGIN INDENTATION**]
H26 098 |^For the Board of the Foundation
H26 099 |**[SIGNATURE**]
H26 100 |^Sir Henry Cooper
H26 101 |^*2PRESIDENT
H26 102 **[END INDENTATION**]
H26 103 *<*4Sir Douglas Robb Memorial Fund*>
H26 104    |^*0The Sir Douglas Robb Memorial Fund was established in memory
H26 105 of an outstanding cardiothoracic surgeon, former Chancellor of the
H26 106 University of Auckland and Vice President of the Foundation. ^The
H26 107 following are reports of those who received a grant from this Fund in
H26 108 1986.
H26 109 *<*4Auckland Speakeasy Association, Auckland Hospital*>
H26 110    |^*0The grant was used for just the one project, to fund \0Dr
H26 111 Craig's visit and to organise a two day seminar.
H26 112    |^The seminar was held at the Kohia Teachers Centre, Kohia
H26 113 Terrace, Epsom, over a two day period, 30 to 31 January 1986. ^\0Dr
H26 114 Craig, who is a {0PhD} (speech psychologist), was the only speaker.
H26 115 ^The audience comprised speech therapists, all members of the New
H26 116 Zealand Speech Therapists Association, and Speak Easy members, from
H26 117 the Auckland Speak Easy Association and Wellington Speak Easy group.
H26 118    |^The grant from the Sir Douglas Robb Memorial Fund, was for the
H26 119 purpose of financing the above project. ^It achieved the bringing
H26 120 together of therapists from as far as Wellington, all keen to hear and
H26 121 talk with \0Dr Craig. ^Its value to therapists and speak easy members
H26 122 alike was immeasurable, the information and ideas received will
H26 123 benefit us at Speakeasy especially, to use at meetings and working in
H26 124 closer co-operation with therapists.
H26 125 *<*4Cerebral Palsy Society of New Zealand \0Inc. , {0P O} Box 24042,
H26 126 Royal Oak*>
H26 127    |^*0The grant from the Foundation to the Society has been used on
H26 128 the following:
H26 129    |^*1National Register of Cerebral Palsy *- *0this was supported by
H26 130 the purchase and distribution to medical personnel of an important and
H26 131 very recent reference, *1The Epidemiology of the Cerebral Palsies,
H26 132 *0\0ed. Eva Alberman and Fiona Stanley, {0SIMP}, London. ^Ten copies
H26 133 have been distributed. ^A discussion with workers in Bethesda, \0Md,
H26 134 {0USA} resulted from publication of *1Prenatal and Perinatal Factors
H26 135 Associated With Brain Disorders, *0\0ed. John \0M. Freeman, National
H26 136 Institutes of Health, {0USA}, when information was urgently needed
H26 137 here.
H26 138    |^*1Conductive Education *0is a relatively new treatment method
H26 139 and we were concerned that only two copies of an important source book
H26 140 were in New Zealand libraries, so we purchased twenty copies of
H26 141 *1Conductive Education: A System for Overcoming Motor Disorder,
H26 142 *0\0ed. Philippa \0J Cottam and Andrew Sutton, Croom Helm, {0U. K.}
H26 143 and we have begun distributing them, to alert the medical and
H26 144 supportive professions to this very successful Hungarian treatment
H26 145 mode.
H26 146    |^Our *1Resource Kit for Cerebral Palsy *0and a video of our
H26 147 Skills and Therapy Sessions have been supported by the grant, also.
H26 148 *<*4Chaplaincy Service, Auckland Hospital*>
H26 149    |^*0The purpose of the grant was to add to and update the existing
H26 150 library resources in the department. ^For a long time the chaplains
H26 151 have been concerned about the inadequate amount of reference and
H26 152 reading material for the people who do their training in pastoral care
H26 153 through this department. ^The grant enabled us to purchase about
H26 154 twenty books and to subscribe to two journals. ^From the time the
H26 155 books were purchased the library has been used extensively by both
H26 156 chaplains and trainees. ^It is our belief that those who read the
H26 157 books will, through their reading, become more effective carers. ^The
H26 158 people in the Chaplaincy service are indeed grateful for the grant.
H26 159 *<*4The Auckland Family Counselling Service \0Inc. , 33 Owens Road,
H26 160 Epsom*>
H26 161    |^*0The grant from the fund was for the purchase of books for the
H26 162 service's library. ^The specialist knowledge of staff at the agency in
H26 163 dealing with unresolved conflict, has led to greater demands for us to
H26 164 work with separated or separating families. ^The titles that we have
H26 165 been able to purchase will enhance the expertise of our staff, and to
H26 166 date our Librarian has been thrilled that the books have scarcely had
H26 167 time to be catalogued before staff have been requesting them. ^The
H26 168 staff appreciate the grant from the Sir Douglas Robb Memorial Fund
H26 169 which has helped fulfil an important training need.
H26 170 *<*4Professor {0W F} Lubbe, Department of Medicine, University of
H26 171 Auckland and Green Lane Hospital*>
H26 172    |^*0A grant was obtained from the Sir Douglas Robb Memorial Fund
H26 173 towards expenses incurred in editing a symposium for the Journal of
H26 174 Molecular and Cellular Cardiology on the subject: *"Biochemical Basis
H26 175 of Arrhythmias**". ^This symposium is based on a session at the
H26 176 International Conference of the International Society for Heart
H26 177 Research held in Melbourne in February 1986.
H26 178    |^The editing procedure is currently in progress. ^Eight submitted
H26 179 manuscripts have been accepted for the symposium and each was sent to
H26 180 two referees who are recognised experts in the field. ^The eight
H26 181 manuscripts are now on *"floppy disc**" and copies have been returned
H26 182 to the authors for revision. ^Four of the manuscripts have already
H26 183 been placed on camera-ready paper and have been returned to the
H26 184 authors for proof-reading.
H26 185 *<*4Sir Harcourt Caughey Award*>
H26 186    |^*0The Sir Harcourt Caughey Award was established from an
H26 187 anonymous gift of *+$100,000 to recognise the outstanding contribution
H26 188 to the Foundation of Sir Harcourt Caughey, who was President for seven
H26 189 years and on the Board of the Foundation since its establishment. ^In
H26 190 1986 the Award was used to bring to Auckland a person with expertise
H26 191 not available in New Zealand.
H26 192 *<*4Professor {0S J} Barry, Professor of Audiology, University of
H26 193 Oklahoma*>
H26 194    |^*0Professor {0S J} Barry, Professor of Audiology at the
H26 195 University of Oklahoma, visited the National Audiology Centre for 4
H26 196 months early in 1986.
H26 197    |^\0Dr Barry assisted \0Dr Keith and \0Ms Purdy of the National
H26 198 Audiology Centre on a 3-year project to develop an objective method of
H26 199 fitting hearing aids to deaf babies. ^The project involves the
H26 200 development of objective methods for measuring hearing aid
H26 201 performance, and for assessing hearing in sleeping infants. ^\0Dr
H26 202 Barry assisted with research into evoked response procedures for
H26 203 assessing hearing levels.
H26 204    |^\0Dr Barry advised on the setting up of equipment, and assisted
H26 205 in the choice of instrumentation for this research. ^The Auditory
H26 206 Brainstem evoked Response ({0ABR}) was selected as the optimal method
H26 207 for evoked response audiometry in infants. ^This method involves the
H26 208 recording of neural responses to sounds from the auditory nerve and
H26 209 brainstem, via electrodes attached to the scalp.
H26 210    |^Several experiments were undertaken during \0Dr Barry's visit.
H26 211 ^These involved the investigation of a newly-reported method for
H26 212 improving the {0ABR} response to low tones, the establishment of
H26 213 required levels of masking noise to limit the {0ABR} response to the
H26 214 part of the hearing spectrum being tested, and the collection of
H26 215 {0ABR} data in normal-hearing adults using brief tones without masking
H26 216 noise.
H26 217 *#
H27 001 **[291 TEXT H27**]
H27 002 |^*2THE 1986/ 87 FINANCIAL YEAR *0produced yet another series of
H27 003 dramatic and exciting events, all solidly supported by record earnings
H27 004 for the 19th time in a row. ^The final result of *+$342 million is the
H27 005 second highest profit ever recorded by a New Zealand public company
H27 006 and is another milestone in the progression of more than two decades
H27 007 of outstanding growth.
H27 008    |^*2GROWTH PROSPECTS ^*0After the relative euphoria of our 25th
H27 009 anniversary celebrations it was necessary to return to the practical
H27 010 demands of 1987 *- our 26th year in historical terms, but only the
H27 011 first in popular expectations of another quarter century of comparable
H27 012 expansion
H27 013 **[PLATE**]
H27 014 and achievement. ^In this context, the outcome augurs well because the
H27 015 record profit was accompanied by a number of significant developments
H27 016 for the future and is backed by a conservatively stated balance sheet
H27 017 of great strength and flexibility.
H27 018    |^Longer term it will obviously be impossible to maintain
H27 019 indefinitely a compound rate of growth on the same mathematical scale
H27 020 as the first 25 years, but in its place we offer *"blue chip**"
H27 021 security and wide marketability combined with a firm determination to
H27 022 continue to provide very high returns by any normal criteria. ^It is
H27 023 also worth repeating that {0BIL} is still of modest size by world
H27 024 standards and if we can emulate in overseas markets what has been
H27 025 achieved in New Zealand and Australia, the results could be
H27 026 spectacular, not only for {0BIL} shareholders, but for the whole New
H27 027 Zealand economy.
H27 028    |^*2INVESTMENT ^*0In last year's annual report we commented
H27 029 on the acquisition of substantial shareholdings in various old
H27 030 established New Zealand companies and this trend continued in 1986/
H27 031 87. ^*4Skellerup Industries \0Ltd *0became a subsidiary during the
H27 032 year and *4The Auckland Gas \0Co. \0Ltd *0was absorbed by *4Welgas
H27 033 Holdings \0Ltd *0in a three way merger also incorporating *4East Coast
H27 034 Gas Supply \0Ltd. ^*0Shareholdings have been increased in *4{0NZI}
H27 035 Corporation \0Ltd *0(32%), *4Lane Walker Rudkin Industries \0Ltd
H27 036 *0(47%) and *4Cable Price Downer \0Ltd *0(40%). ^There have also been
H27 037 a number of full acquisitions of previous publicly listed
H27 038 subsidiaries, mainly where their small size did not justify separate
H27 039 shareholding structures.
H27 040    |^*2WINSTONE \0LTD ^*4Winstone \0Ltd *0became a wholly-owned
H27 041 subsidiary as a conseqence of a share exchange offer for minorities
H27 042 and subsequently acquired *4The Golden Bay Cement \0Co. \0Ltd *0which
H27 043 complements an already impressive range of concrete and building
H27 044 supply operations. ^Winstone is an important subsidiary for us and
H27 045 will become even more so in the future.
H27 046    |^It is interesting to note the similarity between Winstone and
H27 047 *4CalMat \0Co. *0in California in which we have a 15% interest
H27 048 (through {0IEP}). ^Both companies operate large scale basic resources
H27 049 and building materials operations and each has a strong property base,
H27 050 partly because of *"urban sprawl**" having overtaken previously remote
H27 051 quarry locations. ^It is also of interest to compare the cost of our
H27 052 15% investment in CalMat of {0NZ}*+$190 million with the {0NZ}*+$300
H27 053 million book value for 100% of Winstone (which is a major company in
H27 054 its own right in New Zealand). ^Both are worth a lot more in real
H27 055 terms but the comparison illustrates the scope for big overseas
H27 056 investments in industries in which we have familiarity and experience
H27 057 in New Zealand and Australia.
H27 058    |^*2RAINBOW CORPORATION ^*0In April, we aquired 30% of *4Rainbow
H27 059 Corporation \0Ltd *0and in the current term we have made an agreed
H27 060 offer for the balance of the capital. ^This is a similar aquisition to
H27 061 the Bunting deal in 1984. ^We have secured some good people and several
H27 062 strategic investments *- notably *4Woolworths \0Ltd *0(40% now held by
H27 063 the group) and 65% of *4Progressive Enterprises \0Ltd. ^*0This
H27 064 immediate entry to a strong position in food and consumer retailing on
H27 065 both sides of the Tasman fills a gap in our industry profile and was
H27 066 Rainbow's attraction.
H27 067    |^*2WOOLWORTHS \0LTD ^*0The somewhat unusual circumstances of our
H27 068 aggregation of Woolworth's shares has been well ventilated in the
H27 069 media (most inaccurately) but we have no doubt whatever of the
H27 070 complete validity of Woolworths which was a sharemarket legend in the
H27 071 40s and 50s, but badly lost its way when the original entrepreneurs
H27 072 were succeeded by accountants and administrators. ^However, it is
H27 073 still Australia's second largest retailer with more than 1000 stores
H27 074 and annual sales of \0A*+$5 billion. ^It is a big challenge for {0BIL}/
H27 075 {0IEL} to assist Woolworths to regain direction in the future.
H27 076    |^*2MAGNUM CORPORATION \0LTD ^*0The restructuring and expansion of
H27 077 our liquor interests through the acquisition of 69% of *4Magnum
H27 078 Corporation \0Ltd *0(formerly Rothmans) is an important move. ^Magnum
H27 079 incorporates Liquorland, Allied Liquor, Robbie Burns, Corbans, \0J.
H27 080 Rattray and Countdown and has become the holding company for our
H27 081 former direct interests in Dominion Breweries, Quill Humphreys and
H27 082 Cooks McWilliams. ^We have definitely overtaken Lion Corporation as
H27 083 the industry leader, mainly because of better anticipation of
H27 084 structural and consumer requirements of the 1980s.
H27 085    |^{0IEL} subsidiary, *4The Cascade Brewery \0Co. \0Ltd *0is also
H27 086 relevant in this context as it is the first time that one group has
H27 087 owned breweries in both New Zealand and Australia. ^This is
H27 088 particularly opportune in the {0CER} environment of increasing
H27 089 reciprocal trade and the Cascade relationship has more immediate
H27 090 potential than the purchase of breweries elsewhere in the world *-
H27 091 although this is still an added option if suitable opportunities
H27 092 arise.
H27 093    |^*2UNITED KINGDOM ^*0In the past two years, we have been involved
H27 094 in three large takeover offers in the {0UK} *- the current *+450
H27 095 million bid by {0BIL} for *4Equity & Law \0plc, *0a leading {0UK} and
H27 096 European life assurance office, and earlier offers of *+300 million
H27 097 for *4Ocean Transport & Trading \0plc *0and *+70 million by {0TKM} for
H27 098 *4Molins \0plc.
H27 099    |^*0Both latter offers were unsuccessful and were generally
H27 100 unfavourably received by the {0UK} media and sharemarket. ^This
H27 101 response was mildly disappointing but certainly not discouraging in
H27 102 view of *"the City's**" apparent belated recognition of our original
H27 103 judgement in acquiring large shareholdings in these companies at much
H27 104 lower prices. ^We intend to retain our integrity as a value investor
H27 105 and will accept numerous more *'defeats**' in preference to ego driven
H27 106 *'victories**' at excessive cost.
H27 107    |^The 1985 acquisition of a majority interest in *4Tozer
H27 108 Kemsley & Millbourn (Holdings) \0plc *0and the subsequent
H27 109 takeover and integration of *4Kenning Motor Group \0plc *0has
H27 110 succeeded very well indeed. ^{0TKM} is one of the largest motor
H27 111 vehicle distributors in the {0UK}, France and Ireland with tyre
H27 112 retailing, service stations and rental car businesses in support. ^In
H27 113 our view, this substantial trading base (with sales of *+717 million
H27 114 per annum and more than 7,800 employees) is well underrated by the
H27 115 market, which is somewhat ironic in view of the push by other
H27 116 investment groups to obtain genuine operating earnings in the {0UK}
H27 117 and elsewhere.
H27 118    |^*2UNITED STATES ^*0In the more complex {0US} corporate
H27 119 environment, the development of potential takeovers has proceeded more
H27 120 slowly. ^Of the two acquisitions so far, *4The Higbee Company *0has
H27 121 been very successful whereas *4Anadite \0Inc *0(on a much smaller
H27 122 scale) has essentially been a disappointment.
H27 123    |^The proposed sale of Higbee may seem somewhat peverse in these
H27 124 circumstances but has arisen in a very logical manner. ^In recent
H27 125 months we have been involved in various discussions regarding possible
H27 126 merger or aquisitions of other stores as a prelude to a public
H27 127 flotation. ^Although none of these negotiations came to fruition, it
H27 128 became clear that Higbee's strong geographical representation in Ohio
H27 129 (12 stores) has an added value in the present round of extensive
H27 130 rationalisation in {0US} department stores ownership. ^With the full
H27 131 support of management it was therefore decided to offer Higbee for
H27 132 sale in order to create other opportunities for a stronger grouping of
H27 133 stores for the company. ^The response has been good and we are now
H27 134 evaluating the various proposals.
H27 135    |^*2CAPITAL ^*0As announced already, the Board has continued in
H27 136 1987 the established pattern of cash and bonus issues at year end
H27 137 which has always been a popular feature in the past. ^The terms of the
H27 138 latest issue (1 for 10 at *+$2 and a 1 for 4 bonus) places only modest
H27 139 demands on shareholders and acknowledges the view that we have almost
H27 140 reached the limit of capital which the New Zealand financial market
H27 141 can supply.
H27 142    |^The increase in balance sheet totals from *+$5.6 billion to
H27 143 *+$11.8 billion demonstrates the incredible level of activity which
H27 144 has been packed into the past year and the current term is no less
H27 145 active. ^Even applying the most selective investment criteria, we
H27 146 believe we can profitably utilise vast amounts of new funding.
H27 147 ^Although there has been a steady expansion in the share register (now
H27 148 160,000 shareholders) it is still 92% New Zealand dominated and we
H27 149 recognise the need to broaden our geographical appeal in order to
H27 150 maximise benefits for existing shareholders.
H27 151    |^The financial year has begun well and we look forward to
H27 152 reporting another top performance in 1988.
H27 153    |^*2DIRECTORS ^*0A feature of the {0BIL} Board is its stability *-
H27 154 since the company was formed there have only been 16 directors
H27 155 including the present board of 10. ^It is somewhat notable therefore
H27 156 that two directors *- \0Mr {0D.H.} McDonald and \0Mr {0D.N.} Chalmers
H27 157 *- are retiring at this year's Annual General Meeting.
H27 158    |^Don McDonald has been a director since 1971 and before then was
H27 159 involved with various subsidiary operations, so he has been closely
H27 160 identified with the progress of {0BIL} almost since inception. ^He has
H27 161 been a tower of strength throughout that period in both a personal and
H27 162 professional capacity, particularly in the difficult early years. ^We
H27 163 will miss him at board level but look forward to continued informal
H27 164 association for many years ahead.
H27 165    |^David Chalmers, who recently retired as Managing *4Director of
H27 166 {0NZI} Corporation \0Ltd**[SIC**], *0joined the Board in 1984 as a
H27 167 consequence of our close association with that company. ^His
H27 168 constructive contribution has been most valuable, particularly in
H27 169 developing the mutually beneficial {0BIL}/ {0NZI} relationship.
H27 170 |**[SIGNATURE**]
H27 171 |^{0R.A.} Brierley
H27 172 |^*2CHAIRMAN OF DIRECTORS
H27 173 |^5 OCTOBER 1987
H27 174 *<CHIEF EXECUTIVE'S REPORT*>
H27 175 |^*01987 has been another outstanding year characterised not just by
H27 176 record profits but by an underlying momentum and sense of purpose
H27 177 which singles out {0BIL} as Australasia's leading company. ^Although
H27 178 the *'final score**' or profit is important, both at the time of
H27 179 achievement and for the record books, it is
H27 180 **[PLATE**]
H27 181 nevertheless only one ingredient in a very critical mixture. ^Even
H27 182 more fundamental than playing and winning is the strength of the
H27 183 competition, proving the consistency of our performance and having a
H27 184 balanced team capable of repeating the success story into the future
H27 185 *- that is {0BIL} today. ^Our existing investments, future prospects
H27 186 and strong financial positions coupled with an outstanding team of
H27 187 proven performers ensure a continuation of our *'winning formula.**'
H27 188 *<*2PROFITABILITY*>
H27 189 |^*0The 1986/ 87 profit of *+$342 million represents an increase of
H27 190 9O% on last year and all increase in adjusted earnings per share of
H27 191 61%. ^Even more pleasing is the inherent quality of the
H27 192 **[GRAPH**]
H27 193 result. ^This is despite unprecedented conditions in the New Zealand
H27 194 financial markets which saw short term interest rates peaking at over
H27 195 40% whilst at the same time the New Zealand dollar was continuing to
H27 196 revalue against the currencies of the countries in which we operate *-
H27 197 namely the United States, the United Kingdom and Australia.
H27 198    |^{0BIL} has two broad sources of revenue *- entrepreneurial
H27 199 profits and dividend income from our share portfolio, and earnings
H27 200 from our trading companies. ^With over half of the group assets
H27 201 represented by shares in public companies, the holding costs are
H27 202 substantial and significantly impact on current profits. ^To achieve
H27 203 superior profitability while at the same time having over half of the
H27 204 Group's assets invested for the future is a clear illustration of the
H27 205 excellence of the result. ^The real substance of the profit is
H27 206 highlighted by the earnings before tax and minority interests of
H27 207 *+$677 million which is up 70% on last year. ^This is derived entirely
H27 208 from either wholly owned subsidiaries or companies in which {0BIL} is
H27 209 the majority shareholder.
H27 210 *<*2ACCOUNTING POLICIES*>
H27 211 |*0^As in 1986, we have not equity accounted any interests.
H27 212 ^Shareholdings which could be treated in this manner include *- in the
H27 213 United States: Molokai Ranch 29%; Everest and Jennings 27%; Union
H27 214 Special 28%; in Luxembourg: European Pacific Investments {0S.A.} 28%;
H27 215 in Australia: The Australian Gas Light Company 30%; Woolworths 20%;
H27 216 and in New Zealand: Acadia Corporation 46%; Cable Price Downer 40%;
H27 217 Lane Walker Rudkin 47%; {0NZI} Corporation 32%; Rainbow Corporation
H27 218 30%; Wellesley Resources 26% and Willliams & Kettle 30%.
H27 219    |^Consistent accounting policies have been applied and in
H27 220 particular goodwill on acquisition of subsidiaries has been written
H27 221 off, all foreign exchange gains and losses have been included in the
H27 222 profit and loss account, no property revaluations have been included
H27 223 in the profit and the accounts have been prepared on a conservative
H27 224 basis.
H27 225 *#
H28 001 **[292 TEXT H28**]
H28 002    |^*0Renouf Corporation Limited was established with the goal of
H28 003 becoming a significant New Zealand-based international company
H28 004 returning above average yields to investors. ^Within three years it
H28 005 has fulfilled that objective and I am proud that predictions of a
H28 006 *+$150 million profit have been achieved.
H28 007    |^The declaration in the review period of an annualised earnings
H28 008 per share of 48.7 cents is an increase of 113.6 percent over the
H28 009 previous year. ^There are few companies with such an excellent track
H28 010 record of profit generation in their formative years. ^It is not
H28 011 surprising therefore that shareholdings in your company should prove
H28 012 highly attractive to major investors. ^Most recently I have increased
H28 013 my personal shareholding from 42 million to 57 million shares and
H28 014 welcomed two new major shareholders in {0FAI} Insurances Limited with
H28 015 58 million shares, and the Development Finance Corporation of New
H28 016 Zealand Limited with 7.5 million shares.
H28 017    |^I feel sure the contribution of these major corporations in
H28 018 both the New Zealand and international financial markets will generate
H28 019 significant opportunities for Renouf Corporation.
H28 020    |^Shareholders and management can be well satisfied with the
H28 021 operating record of your corporation to date which bears testimony to
H28 022 the loyalty and hard work of both executive directors and staff.
H28 023 ^Following the
H28 024 **[PLATE**]
H28 025 shareholding changes noted above, \0Messrs {0M J} Cashin, {0I L G}
H28 026 Stewart, {0A W} Strange and {0G J} Marsh left the Board with myself
H28 027 joining as Chairman plus \0Messrs {0R B} Corlett (Deputy Chairman),
H28 028 {0C J} Beardsley and {0J R} Needham.
H28 029    |^During the year, I regret to say that one of our
H28 030 directors, Reid Jackson, passed away. ^He will be sadly
H28 031 missed.
H28 032    |^We have witnessed an exciting profit period for the Corporation
H28 033 *- I can assure you the future looks bright indeed.
H28 034 |**[SIGNATURE**]
H28 035 |^*4Sir Francis \0H Renouf
H28 036 |^Chairman
H28 037 **[GRAPH**]
H28 038 *<Managing Director's Report*>
H28 039    |^*0Your company has now consolidated its position among the
H28 040 leading New Zealand international corporations. ^We believe that the
H28 041 quality of earnings and strength of the New Zealand and international
H28 042 base established by the corporation provide an extremely sound
H28 043 platform for further global development. ^It is the intention of your
H28 044 directors to build on the successes achieved to date and we envisage
H28 045 that the excellent earnings per share rates achieved during the period
H28 046 under review will be sustained over the long term.
H28 047    |^Our profit in the period under review when placed on an
H28 048 annualised basis gives a return of *+$121.7 million, with earnings per
H28 049 share of 48.7 cents. ^This means your corporation has a price/
H28 050 earnings ratio of 7 which is low by industry standards.
H28 051    |^Profits during the year were boosted by the sale of our
H28 052 shareholding in {0NZI} Corporation which gave a gain of some *+$45
H28 053 million. ^Returns were further boosted by contributions of *+$21.5
H28 054 million from Renouf Properties Limited and *+$19.4 million from \0R &
H28 055 \0W Hellaby Limited, in addition to *+$65.3 million from the banking
H28 056 and investment division.
H28 057    |^Our confidence in the rewards available to shareholders and
H28 058 staff in the future springs from the soundness of the earnings base
H28 059 now in place and the proven success of our operating philosophy. ^We
H28 060 believe that returns from our international investments, coupled with
H28 061 the activities of the divisions within New Zealand, will ensure
H28 062 excellent rewards for shareholders in coming years. ^Looking ahead to
H28 063 June 1988, we are forecasting a sustainable earnings base of *+$120
H28 064 million.
H28 065    |^We have consistently encouraged our executive team to accept
H28 066 new ideas and to investigate their potential from a fundamental base
H28 067 of achieving a productive return on investment.
H28 068    |^Members of the team have fulfilled these goals.
H28 069    |^We believe that the policy of
H28 070 **[PLATE**]
H28 071 encouraging management autonomy among subsidiary companies has proved
H28 072 successful. ^It has resulted in excellent returns for the group and a
H28 073 good deal of satisfaction among executives and line management whose
H28 074 performance is mirrored in the level of earnings achieved. ^The focus
H28 075 of management will continue to be on making the most effective use of
H28 076 shareholders' funds to achieve the highest returns.
H28 077    |^It was the original intention of your directors to maximise the
H28 078 public listing of subsidiaries in order to give senior executives and
H28 079 staff of these companies an opportunity for commitment through public
H28 080 holdings. ^However, management experience has shown it will be of
H28 081 greater benefit to your corporation if we seek to minimise public
H28 082 listings. ^We are therefore seeking to achieve one primary listing in
H28 083 New Zealand and to make Impala Pacific Corporation our main overseas
H28 084 arm. ^This policy has been implemented to good effect in the case of
H28 085 Alliance, Hellaby and Repco and we now hold 93 percent of Renouf
H28 086 Properties. ^The intention of your directors is to maintain a balance
H28 087 between our investments offshore and New Zealand activities directed
H28 088 through the corporation.
H28 089    |^It is the belief of your directors that the maintenance of a
H28 090 strong industrial sector is essential to New Zealand's economic
H28 091 growth. ^We intend to build on our investments in this sector,
H28 092 pursuing our previously announced policy of seeking out fundamentally
H28 093 sound companies whose performance can be improved by the application
H28 094 of fresh management techniques. ^The successes of Alliance, Hellaby
H28 095 and Repco have endorsed the soundness of our approach. ^Our
H28 096 involvement will continue to focus on both direct participation and
H28 097 the provision of investment finance.
H28 098    |^Increased competition in the deregulated New Zealand economy
H28 099 has underlined the reasons why your directors consider expansion of
H28 100 the corporation's overseas interests is essential to the maintenance
H28 101 of high returns for shareholders.
H28 102 **[GRAPH**]
H28 103 |^Activity abroad will provide us with greater access to overseas
H28 104 capital markets for further development of our New Zealand base as
H28 105 required.
H28 106    |^On the international front, we have made a full bid to acquire
H28 107 all the issued capital of Impala Pacific Corporation from our current
H28 108 base of some 26 percent. ^We are guaranteed at least 51 percent by way
H28 109 of an agreement with Ariadne Australia with our option to purchase all
H28 110 of Ariadne's shareholding at {0HK}*+$18.00 per share. ^We expect to
H28 111 complete this takeover by the end of November 1987.
H28 112    |^It is the belief of your directors that the 1988-89 year will
H28 113 see further progress in the expansion of your corporation both
H28 114 internationally and within New Zealand. ^We have every confidence that
H28 115 there will be increased returns for shareholders in the future as a
H28 116 result of decisions taken during the past year, together with plans
H28 117 now being implemented.
H28 118 |**[SIGNATURE**]
H28 119 |^*4{0C J} Beardsley
H28 120 |^Managing Director
H28 121 *<Geared to Performance*>
H28 122    |^*0Renouf Corporation Limited is geared to performance. ^Within
H28 123 three years it has grown to become one of New Zealand's leading
H28 124 international corporations, holding significant investments in the
H28 125 United States, Asia and Australia, as well as New Zealand. ^Its
H28 126 operations encompass industrial, property, banking and investment
H28 127 activities and each of these divisions complements the strengths of
H28 128 the others. ^Our philosophy of matching entrepreneurial flair to the
H28 129 integrity for which the Renouf name has always stood has produced
H28 130 spectacular gains for shareholders and a growth in company
H28 131 profitability which is the envy of many financiers. ^Annualised
H28 132 earnings have soared from 13.6 cents a share in the year to 31 March
H28 133 1985, to 48.7 cents per share in the 15 months to 30 June 1987.
H28 134    |^Inevitably the successes achieved by the corporate team and
H28 135 rewards available to shareholders have attracted a great deal of
H28 136 interest among investors and major financial institutions who see
H28 137 advantages for themselves in associating with your company. ^That this
H28 138 should be the case represents recognition of the achievements recorded
H28 139 by Renouf Corporation.
H28 140    |^The various shareholding issues have been settled in a way
H28 141 which the directors feel sure will permit sustained long term growth
H28 142 in accord with their intention to build Renouf Corporation as a
H28 143 dynamic international operator.
H28 144    |^Your directors see the company poised for further considerable
H28 145 **[PLATE**]
H28 146 expansion now that the banking and investment, property and industrial
H28 147 divisions are geared to high performance levels. ^They are also
H28 148 pleased with the opportunities showing up for Impala Pacific
H28 149 Corporation and with the returns coming through from the investment in
H28 150 Benequity. ^Your directors see this as the first in a series of moves
H28 151 through which Renouf Corporation will establish itself still further
H28 152 internationally.
H28 153    |^Impala Pacific Corporation is considered well placed to
H28 154 participate in this fresh growth phase of Renouf Corporation and the
H28 155 decision to take a majority interest will assist in the drive to
H28 156 expand in the United States, Europe and Asia. ^A considerable level of
H28 157 investment-related activity can be expected in the latter part of this
H28 158 year as the Corporation moves to strengthen links forged with
H28 159 international financiers.
H28 160    |^The operating philosophy of your company is geared to
H28 161 maintaining a specially selected group of key executive staff able to
H28 162 establish a pattern of development and identify opportunities to
H28 163 achieve maximum reward. ^Managers of the operating groups within the
H28 164 divisions are encouraged to take full responsibility for the
H28 165 development of their areas. ^This management method has proved
H28 166 particularly successful in the transformation of Alliance Textiles and
H28 167 Repco Merchants into strong cash generators. ^Management teams of
H28 168 Renouf companies are lean in numbers but strong in performance. ^Our
H28 169 consistent approach has been to locate companies capable of better
H28 170 performances and to turn
H28 171 **[GRAPH**]
H28 172 **[PLATE**]
H28 173 them into more profitable businesses through rationalisation,
H28 174 reconstruction and redirection. ^In this the entrepreneurial flair and
H28 175 innovation of our own team of executive directors is paramount. ^Their
H28 176 focus on identifying and placing accountability on line management
H28 177 with specific expertise, and then rewarding success when it is
H28 178 achieved, has been a key factor in the process.
H28 179    |^In line with our policy of focusing our expansion overseas
H28 180 through Impala Pacific Corporation, this company has announced its
H28 181 intention to purchase all the capital of Renouf Corporation Australia.
H28 182 ^It is our objective to own 51 percent of the Impala shareholding and
H28 183 the bid has been made at {0HK}*+$18.00 a share. ^Currently we hold
H28 184 some 26 percent of Impala and Ariadne has indicated it will sell to us
H28 185 any outstanding shares we require to take our holding to the 51
H28 186 percent level.
H28 187 *<*4Banking and Investment*>
H28 188    |^*0By making maximum use of the Corporation's wide international
H28 189 contacts the division contributed *+$65.3 million to the group's
H28 190 profitability in the period. ^Unlike a number of other merchant
H28 191 banking operations which have developed in New Zealand under the new
H28 192 deregulated environment, the division has maintained a low profile
H28 193 fitting to the specialist and
H28 194 **[PLATE**]
H28 195 confidential role it has adopted as an entrepreneurial unit geared to
H28 196 meet the urgent, and often complex, financial needs of New Zealand
H28 197 corporations. ^During the period under review it has acted defensively
H28 198 in mergers and takeovers both in New Zealand and Australia.
H28 199    |^Niche marketing with an emphasis on specialist skills tailored
H28 200 to individual client requirements has been the thrust of development
H28 201 within the division. ^The division does not plan to take up a banking
H28 202 licence or foreign exchange dealing licence in line with the opening
H28 203 up of the New Zealand banking environment. ^It intends to focus its
H28 204 development thrust on securities trading through its widening
H28 205 international network, servicing of the requirements of group
H28 206 activities and operations as a boutique merchant banker putting
H28 207 together financial packages geared to the increasingly international
H28 208 requirements of New Zealand commerce.
H28 209    |^Opportunities available for carrying out successful
H28 210 transactions are considerable, and although competition in the finance
H28 211 and banking sector is increasing rapidly with the introduction of new
H28 212 foreign specialists to the New Zealand market, the division is
H28 213 positioned for growth. ^Its activities relate well to the management
H28 214 of group financial resources. ^These provide it with a sound base for
H28 215 future development. ^The division will continue to operate in the
H28 216 areas of mergers and acquisitions, underwriting, risk management,
H28 217 project financing, leveraged buyouts, debt and equity finance and
H28 218 general corporate advice.
H28 219 **[PLATE**]
H28 220    |^The increasing sophistication of New Zealand financial markets,
H28 221 and rising demands from corporate fund managers for innovative
H28 222 packages, has created a situation in which the specialist expertise of
H28 223 our banking division is in constant demand. ^Our foreign exchange
H28 224 advisory services are regularly required for the management of
H28 225 corporate forex dealings.
H28 226    |^The banking team is widely experienced in managing the finances
H28 227 of industrial organisations and in view of the increasing competition
H28 228 evident in the New Zealand manufacturing sector we believe our
H28 229 specialist skills will add further to the role of the division within
H28 230 the New Zealand financial sector.
H28 231 *<*4Impala Pacific Corporation*>
H28 232    |^*0Impala Pacific Corporation's investment activities are
H28 233 focused on securities trading, property ownership and development. ^It
H28 234 contributed some *+$16.9 million to group profitability in the period
H28 235 under review.
H28 236 *#
H29 001 **[293 TEXT H29**]
H29 002    |^*0With a large projected increase in the number of old persons
H29 003 in the population, planning for the care of the elderly is a priority.
H29 004 ^The research being undertaken by Avery Jack should make a
H29 005 contribution to this by indicating the preferences that old and
H29 006 handicapped persons have for their care, and also by providing an
H29 007 understanding of the circumstances and the views of those who give
H29 008 care to dependent persons.
H29 009 *<*2STUDYING SOCIAL WORK TRAINING*>
H29 010 |^*0Jennie Pilalis is completing a study of the experiences of social
H29 011 workers in their first twelve months in work following their
H29 012 completion of a university-based, qualifying course.
H29 013    |^Twenty-two graduates were interviewed four times to record their
H29 014 perceptions of their experience of moving from course to agency
H29 015 settings. ^Emerging findings indicate that the social work course has
H29 016 a major impact on graduates' social work perspectives and confidence.
H29 017    |^A broader view of social work and, for most, a clearer and more
H29 018 confident personal perspective resulted. ^Upon entering agencies,
H29 019 graduates experienced their perspective as fitting or misfitting that
H29 020 of the agency, colleagues and clients. ^They became preoccupied with
H29 021 gaining or maintaining a way of working which encompassed their
H29 022 perspectives.
H29 023    |^Implications for the planning of social work courses, induction
H29 024 of graduates to agencies and for preparing graduates for this
H29 025 transition will arise from this research.
H29 026 *<*2PROBING THE {0NZ} ECONOMY*>
H29 027 |^*0Since its beginnings fifty years ago, the development of numerical
H29 028 models of the economy has grown into a major activity in economic
H29 029 research. ^For the last four years, \0Drs Lew Evans and Graeme Wells
H29 030 have been investigating the uses and interpretations of time-series
H29 031 models of the New Zealand economy.
H29 032    |^By contrast to the traditional approach, their objective is to
H29 033 construct and test small models which use very few prior assumptions
H29 034 about how the economy works. ^Such models have had considerable
H29 035 overseas success in forecasting applications, and they are beginning
H29 036 to be used for this purpose in New Zealand.
H29 037 **[PLATE**]
H29 038    |^An additional objective of their research is to develop computer
H29 039 software for the theoretical interpretation of simulation experiments
H29 040 with the models. ^If successful, this can be used to test, for
H29 041 example, the effects of an exchange rate change on New Zealand wages
H29 042 and prices. ^These tests may be less expensive than and equally
H29 043 reliable as those generated by traditional approaches.
H29 044 *<*2THE ECONOMICS OF MIGRATION*>
H29 045 |^*0The study of the causes and consequences of New Zealand's internal
H29 046 and international migration is one of the research interests of \0Dr
H29 047 Jacques Poot, who himself emigrated from the Netherlands to New
H29 048 Zealand in 1979. ^During 1985 he has been involved in projects in this
H29 049 area.
H29 050    |^One of these is an econometric study of the post-war population
H29 051 exchange with Australia, which \0Dr Poot carried out jointly with \0Dr
H29 052 Peter Brosnan of the Industrial Relations Centre.
H29 053    |^Since World War *=II, trans-Tasman migration has had strong
H29 054 cyclical fluctuations, but on average more people have left New
H29 055 Zealand to settle in Australia than the other way around. ^The net
H29 056 outflow to Australia has cumulated to as much as 300,000 people, and
H29 057 the econometric model explains this *"Drift West**" in terms of better
H29 058 long-term prospects in Australia in terms of earnings and employment
H29 059 opportunities, although demographic factors, return migration and the
H29 060 cost of air travel relative to earnings also play a role.
H29 061    |^The results of this study will be integrated with an analysis of
H29 062 the trans-Tasman exchange of persons with specific occupations in a
H29 063 report to be published by the New Zealand Planning Council in 1986.
H29 064    |^Another project is a study of the economic consequences of
H29 065 immigration to New Zealand, which \0Dr Poot started towards the end of
H29 066 1985 and which he has been undertaking for the Department of Labour,
H29 067 on behalf of the Institute of Policy Studies.
H29 068    |^The objective of the study is to assess whether the findings of
H29 069 a recent major Australian study, which provided cautious support for
H29 070 higher levels of immigration, are also applicable to New Zealand. ^One
H29 071 important finding which appears true in both countries is that
H29 072 immigration, contrary to popular belief, does not increase the rate of
H29 073 unemployment.
H29 074 *<*2ACCOLADES FOR RUSSIAN PROFESSOR*>
H29 075 |^*0Professor Waddington is collaborating on the definitive new Soviet
H29 076 edition of Turgenev's works and letters.
H29 077    |^His two recent books *1Turgenev in England *0(London, 1980) and
H29 078 *1Turgenev and George Sand: An Improbable Entente *0(London and
H29 079 Wellington), 1981 were reviewed very favourably by the Soviet
H29 080 periodical *1Russkaya Literatura *0\0No 1, 1985.
H29 081    |^The two authors of the 2500-word review article, described
H29 082 Patrick Waddington as a New Zealand Slavist and professor at the
H29 083 capital's University, who for the past fifteen years had published
H29 084 thirty items including two books containing newly discovered material
H29 085 relating to Turgenev.
H29 086    |^*"Each new work of Patrick Waddington's**" they said
H29 087 **[LONG QUOTATION**]
H29 088 *<*2IMPACT OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION*>
H29 089 |^*0Situated on the Mediterranean Sea 20 kilometres north of the
H29 090 Spanish border, Collioure is today a small, picturesque town. ^200
H29 091 years ago it was a bustling, important but generally impoverished
H29 092 port, garrison-town and fishing community, almost all of whose people
H29 093 were Catalans.
H29 094    |^With the bicentenary looming of the French Revolution of 1789,
H29 095 Peter McPhee decided to study the impact of the Revolution and
H29 096 Napoleonic periods (1789-1815) on Collioure's inhabitants.
H29 097    |^Life would never again be the same for these people, though
H29 098 responses to the Revolution varied according to their class, gender
H29 099 and ethnicity.
H29 100    |^These years were often traumatic, especially when Collioure was
H29 101 occupied by the invading royalist Spanish army in 1794, but the
H29 102 Revolution brought so many tangible benefits that most people were
H29 103 prepared to fight to defend it. ^In the process, however, they gave
H29 104 unwitting impetus to greater control from Paris and the decline of
H29 105 Catalan language and culture.
H29 106    |^Today's inhabitants of Collioure showed a lively interest in
H29 107 Peter McPhee's work, though collective memories of their ancestors'
H29 108 experiences have been erased by another, more recent, occupation by a
H29 109 foreign army, in 1944.
H29 110 *<*2DICTIONARY OF {0NZ} ENGLISH NEARS COMPLETION*>
H29 111 |^*0The *1Historical Dictionary of New Zealand English, *0Harry
H29 112 Orsman's longterm project in the English Department has now reached
H29 113 final editing, helped by the University's computer.
H29 114    |^*1The Dictionary *0will define and date about 8,000 separate
H29 115 items of distinctively New Zealand English using over 30,000
H29 116 quotations from written records (1769 to the present), from oral
H29 117 sources (*"polite eavesdropping**") and questionnaires. ^Many people
H29 118 have contributed; indeed it is essentially a *1National Dictionary of
H29 119 New Zealand English *0with completion aimed to coincide with our
H29 120 Pakeha 150th anniversary 1990.
H29 121    |^It will help define local English, first in what
H29 122 **[PLATES**]
H29 123 has been added to the general store, especially from Maori; then in
H29 124 relation to *"overseas**" English *- British, Australian, American.
H29 125    |^That is, it will tell us something about where *1boohai/ boo-eye
H29 126 *0or *1ba(t)ch *0come from and suggest spellings and dates *- even for
H29 127 *1pavlovas!; *0or why in a country that to outsiders may seem one huge
H29 128 scenic sheep-run, Little Bo-peep should never *"take crook and go
H29 129 Home**" (or worse still, *"go butchers**").
H29 130 *<*2ITALIAN OPERA COMPOSERS AND THEIR WORK*>
H29 131 |^*0In collaboration with the small London-based recording-company,
H29 132 Opera Rara, Jeremy Commons is engaged in research into the lives and
H29 133 works of many nineteenth century Italian operatic composers. ^His
H29 134 latest *'discovery**' is Giuseppe Balducci (1796-1845), who, besides
H29 135 six operas composed for public presentation, wrote five works for
H29 136 private performance by his aristocratic lady-pupils in Naples.
H29 137    |^After consulting an unpublished biographical sketch in Bologna,
H29 138 Jeremy Commons in Naples found an even more detailed account of him in
H29 139 a diary kept by one of his pupils. ^In both cities he photographed
H29 140 items of his music, so that since returning to New Zealand he has
H29 141 already on several occasions lectured on him and had his music
H29 142 performed.
H29 143    |^Another long-term project is the reconstruction, from the
H29 144 original vocal and instrumental parts of 1832, of a comic opera, *1Il
H29 145 Convitato di pietra *0(the same subject as Mozart's *1Don Giovanni*0),
H29 146 which Giovanni Pacini (1796-1867) wrote for private performance by
H29 147 members of his own family.
H29 148 *<*2FIRST-HAND STUDIES OF ASIA*>
H29 149 |^*0In addition to teaching and research, the Department of Religious
H29 150 Studies has successfully organised several cultural and educational
H29 151 tours to India, Nepal, Indonesia, Thailand, Sri Lanka and Singapore
H29 152 during the last five years. ^The purpose of the tour is to acquaint
H29 153 the students and public with these multi-cultural societies and give
H29 154 them first-hand knowledge of their culture, art, religion and history.
H29 155    |^Places of interest are selected with great care and the tour
H29 156 cost is kept at the minimum to enable students to join the tour.
H29 157 ^Occasional seminars and lectures are held to cover the various
H29 158 aspects of the cultural life of the Asian people. ^The group departs
H29 159 during the middle of December each year for 35 days.
H29 160    |^The Department is convinced that such low cost tours are
H29 161 necessary for the benefit of students and the general public who are
H29 162 interested in learning about the life styles of these people.
H29 163 *<*2TUATARA RESEARCH PROJECTS*>
H29 164 |^*0{0U.G.C.} Postdoctoral Research Fellow in Zoology \0Dr Michael
H29 165 Thompson, has initiated a major research programme on the physiology
H29 166 and ecology of tuataras on Stephens Island.
H29 167    |^\0Dr Thompson, whose primary objective is the study of nesting
H29 168 ecology and egg physiology, is coordinating a series of collaborative
H29 169 projects involving scientists from the New Zealand Wildlife Service,
H29 170 Ecology Division of {0DSIR}, the Wellington Zoo, {0CSIRO}, and
H29 171 Colorado State University.
H29 172    |^Within the Zoology Department, Sharon Walker, Chris Thorn, and
H29 173 \0Dr Charles Daugherty are using blood protein variation to measure
H29 174 genetic structure of the Stephens Island population, and Jenny Easton
H29 175 is culturing white blood cells to study chromosome variation.
H29 176    |^\0Dr Alison Cree, a second {0U.G.C.} Postdoctoral Fellow, will
H29 177 provide further impetus to the programme when she begins a study of
H29 178 endocrinology and tuatara reproduction in mid-1986.
H29 179    |^The results of the combined research projects are expected to
H29 180 make a major contribution to captive breeding and establishment of new
H29 181 tuatara populations.
H29 182 *<*2SPONTANEOUS IGNITION STUDIES*>
H29 183 |^*0New Zealand has few people involved in theoretical work concerning
H29 184 ignition of stored materials. ^Over the last two years \0Dr Stuart
H29 185 Smedley (Chemistry) and \0Dr Graeme Wake (Mathematics) have teamed up
H29 186 to provide an investigating team to assist the insurance industry.
H29 187    |^Spontaneous combustion of fuels, foods, fabrics \0etc. has long
H29 188 been recognised as a hazard. ^Early work at Victoria University was
H29 189 motivated by the ignition of wet wool. ^The theory which models this
H29 190 phenomenon has recently been developed to the extent that safety
H29 191 limits can be given for the physical parameters of a given practical
H29 192 system.
H29 193    |^In the Chemistry Department \0Dr Smedley has developed
H29 194 procedures to experimentally measure the physical and chemical
H29 195 constants. ^This has enabled \0Dr Wake to provide precise estimates of
H29 196 the critical values of these constants and thereby predict when
H29 197 ignition will occur.
H29 198    |^So far the Victoria team (now to be a Victoria/ Massey team with
H29 199 \0Dr Wake's move to Massey University) has been involved in fires
H29 200 involving fish and chip crumble and woollen cloth.
H29 201 *<*2EVOLUTION OF WORLD SPORTING RECORDS*>
H29 202 |^*0The analysis of the world records in the various track events and
H29 203 the marathon show some remarkable trends and \0Dr {0B.P.} Dawkins of
H29 204 the Mathematics Department, himself an active participant in road and
H29 205 track races at veteran level, has been analysing these trends using
H29 206 various data analytic and statistical tools.
H29 207    |^Amongst the more interesting aspects of this analysis is the
H29 208 clear evidence that women are rapidly closing in on the men in
H29 209 virtually all events. ^Despite the large absolute differences in such
H29 210 events as the 5000\0m and marathon, examination of the rate at which
H29 211 the records are declining gives a clear indication that the
H29 212 performances will eventually be on a par if the trend continues.
H29 213    |^This is most spectacularly evident in the marathon, as can be
H29 214 seen from the accompanying graph, produced using the university
H29 215 {0IBM}4341 driving a laser printer. ^Fitting various possible models
H29 216 indicates that it is likely that women will be running as fast as the
H29 217 men somewhere around the mid 1990's.
H29 218    |^The trend is less dramatic in the shorter events but is still
H29 219 unequivocal. ^Interestingly, there is no clear evidence that records
H29 220 are near the presumed ultimate limits, and we can expect to see
H29 221 records fall regularly over the next few decades.
H29 222 *<*2PHYSICS OF THIN FILMS*>
H29 223 |^*0The glass envelope of a light bulb blackens with age, an effect
H29 224 due to a thin film of tungsten which has vapourised from the hot
H29 225 tungsten filament and condensed on the cold glass.
H29 226 *#
H30 001 **[294 TEXT H30**]
H30 002    |^*0There are few people in Mobil Oil New Zealand who would have
H30 003 ventured to propose that a snail might help the company reach our
H30 004 highest ever gasoline market share figure.
H30 005    |^But just like watching the es-car-got, Mobil's market share has
H30 006 hit an all time high at 29.04%, and there's no doubting that Mobil
H30 007 {0MAX} has been the main contributor.
H30 008    |^The introduction of Mobil {0MAX} was planned and timed with
H30 009 military precision. ^A small team comprising members of the Supply,
H30 010 Sales, Operations, Public Affairs and Technical sections worked on the
H30 011 introduction of the additive, technically named RT 892.
H30 012    |^With its record of success in other markets around the world,
H30 013 and the endorsements from General Motors, Bosch and Renault, the team
H30 014 were acutely aware that {0MONZ} had a potential winner in {0MAX}.
H30 015 ^Therefore to maximise (no pun intended) the introduction of the
H30 016 additive, it was critical that Mobil beat the competition.
H30 017    |^So the announcement of Mobil {0MAX}'s introduction to New
H30 018 Zealand had to be planned quickly and confidentially, to avoid a
H30 019 competitor pre-empting the campaign with one of their own.
H30 020 ^Advertising gasoline in New Zealand had ceased during the oil crises
H30 021 of the 70s, but the Ministry of Energy had given the all clear in 1981
H30 022 for companies to resume campaigns.
H30 023    |^Mobil {0MAX} presented the opportunity to recommence gasoline
H30 024 advertising. ^After initial copyright problems with the *'Break
H30 025 Free**' announcement advertisement, our advertising agency Colenso
H30 026 Communications, came up with the escargot concept.
H30 027    |^The first television commercial was the subject of much
H30 028 discussion both within {0MONZ} and without. ^*'Fancy having a snail
H30 029 advertising a gasoline additive**'. ^However the results of the snail,
H30 030 measured by both gasoline sales and research, showed {0MAX} the
H30 031 escargot to be a winner.
H30 032    |^{0MONZ} commissioned Survey Research Limited to undertake a
H30 033 monitor to gauge consumer awareness of {0MAX}. ^The results were
H30 034 extremely encouraging. ^39.1% of people interviewed were freely aware
H30 035 of the Mobil commercial and this figure increased on prompting (of
H30 036 Mobil {0MAX}, and the snail) to 75%.
H30 037    |^The improvement of car performance was the main message
H30 038 communicated to respondents (31.7%) with a range of comments
H30 039 pertaining to the engine, fuel efficiency, increase in speed and the
H30 040 carburettor.
H30 041    |^Awareness of the snail as a symbol was high *- 68.1% of the
H30 042 sample knew of the snail as a symbol in the commercial.
H30 043    |^The success of the first television commercial prompted the
H30 044 creation of the *'es-car-blow**' advertisement, and more positive
H30 045 feedback and market share improvements.
H30 046    |^Our competitors, of course, have been none too pleased with the
H30 047 success of Mobil {0MAX}, particularly when the media keep reminding
H30 048 them that Mobil were first.
H30 049    |^This has prompted various reactions from them. ^Shell took
H30 050 samples of Mobil Super petrol, analysed it and reckoned there was no
H30 051 additive in it at all. ^A shame they did not realise that not only is
H30 052 the additive blended in very small quantities, but also the service
H30 053 station they chose had only had its tanks topped up with {0MAX} Super,
H30 054 thereby the additive being diluted further by existing stock.
H30 055    |^Caltex ran an advertisement saying they had been adding boron to
H30 056 their petrol for 25 years, a shame engines have changed markedly in
H30 057 that time.
H30 058    |^Service stations themselves were transformed with {0MAX}
H30 059 material to clearly identify to the consumer that only Mobil has this
H30 060 world leading additive.
H30 061    |^And Shell, {0B.P.} and Europa complained to Television New
H30 062 Zealand about our *'es-car-blow**' ad because it might mislead the
H30 063 viewer to thinking their petrols were bad for cars. ^{0TVNZ} allowed
H30 064 us to continue running the commercial.
H30 065    |^Meanwhile Mazda were recommending to their customers that should
H30 066 they experience problems with their fuel injectors, that they consider
H30 067 using Mobil {0MAX}.
H30 068    |^Of course television advertising is just a small part of the
H30 069 Mobil {0MAX} campaign, though obviously the most high profile. ^A
H30 070 nationwide community newspaper advertising and supplement campaign was
H30 071 undertaken, to detail the benefits of Mobil {0MAX} to the consumer.
H30 072 ^The same campaign was adapted to reach over 50 magazines.
H30 073    |^Information packs were sent to journalists throughout the
H30 074 country, and to executives at all of the motor vehicle manufacturing
H30 075 and marketing companies.
H30 076 **[PLATE**]
H30 077 *<*5Marketing Reorganisation*>
H30 078    |^*0The Marketing Department has undergone major changes over the
H30 079 last few months, primarily to ensure greater specialisation in the
H30 080 Commercial and Resale Sales areas.
H30 081    |^Marketing Director, Jim Law, says the previous sales set-up was
H30 082 inadequate because Sales management tended to have a Resales
H30 083 background, resulting in the Commercial side feeling isolated.
H30 084    |^As an example, Jim says Sales Engineers in the field could be
H30 085 reporting through a number of management levels, none of whom really
H30 086 understood the technical lubrication side of the business.
H30 087    |^So the sales organisation was cut down the middle, creating line
H30 088 Resale and line Commercial departments. ^This means little change for
H30 089 the Resale staff, but gives the Commercial staff of 40 (New Zealand
H30 090 wide) greater responsibility for their own department.
H30 091    |^As well as this, the sales department has been divided into only
H30 092 two regional line organisations, instead of the three somewhat
H30 093 autonomous branches which existed before. ^This has allowed each sales
H30 094 department to concentrate on selling, without the worry of
H30 095 *'corporate**' matters that were associated with the branches.
H30 096    |^Other changes include better utilisation of personnel,
H30 097 particularly in the areas of aviation, marine, and special products by
H30 098 giving greater responsibility to staff dealing directly in these
H30 099 areas. ^Sales engineers now report to a specialist in Head Office, and
H30 100 sales chemists report to the Special Products Manager.
H30 101    |^Jim says more qualified and experienced staff have been brought
H30 102 into the commercial department, with excellent results. ^He says this
H30 103 much neglected department is already showing an extremely high
H30 104 standard of professionalism, and relations between field staff and
H30 105 Head Office are much improved.
H30 106    |^Meanwhile, Resale continues to fire on all cylinders following
H30 107 the successful launch of Mobil Max.
H30 108 *<*4National {0MONZ} Golf Tournament 1986*>
H30 109    |^*0This competition is open to all members of the staff including
H30 110 superannuitants, who are current members of an affiliated golf club
H30 111 and who have a current official handicap. ^Each member plays a
H30 112 stableford round on his or her home course on a nominated date. ^The
H30 113 stableford points are adjusted for the course rating (or table for
H30 114 {0LGU}) and the best four from each branch or division compete as a
H30 115 team for the cup over a weekend at the Wairakei International Golf
H30 116 Course.
H30 117    |^This year the final was over the weekend of 27-28 September.
H30 118 ^Saturday's round ended with Head Office in a commanding position on
H30 119 140 points, eight clear of Wellington, and a further four to Auckland.
H30 120 ^South Island on 127, Annuitants 126 and Emoleum embarrassed. ^{0H.O.}
H30 121 result was largely due to Harry Loggy's 93/ 67/ 41 and Noel Clark 85/
H30 122 70/ 33. ^Mark Roughan 87/ 71/ 40 and Keith Smith 76/ 69/ 39 did their
H30 123 best for their sides.
H30 124    |^On Sunday, Auckland really fired. ^Tom Pache and Roger Paul both
H30 125 returned 39s, to give a total of 146 for the day, but the {0H.O.} lead
H30 126 was too much and their 138 points for a total of 278 were enough to
H30 127 hold off the challenge and to take the Wahanui Cup. ^Other scores were
H30 128 Wellington 265, South Island 262, Annuitants 254. ^Emoleum made a
H30 129 brave effort to recover to 250 but still earned the Wooden Spoon.
H30 130    |^Harry Loggy turned in another good round 95/ 69/ 39 to take out
H30 131 the best net, 136 by four strokes from Keith Smith. ^As Harry's
H30 132 handicap is 26 Keith earned a place in the Pro Am. ^Best Stableford
H30 133 was Mark Roughan with 141 net, 78 points.
H30 134 *<*5First Mobil Computerised Truckstop For New Zealand*>
H30 135    |^*0New Zealand has its first Mobil truckstop.
H30 136    |^When Palmerston North Mayor Paul Rieger recently cut the ribbon at
H30 137 the opening of Mobil's first truckstop, he heralded a new era for oil
H30 138 companies and the road transport industry in this country. **[PLATE**]
H30 139    |^Truckstops are unmanned computerised fuel dispensing facilities,
H30 140 designed specifically to handle large vehicles. ^With the simple use
H30 141 of Mobilcard through an electronic *'swiper**' drivers can programme
H30 142 in their diesel requirements and fill their tanks.
H30 143    |^Mobil's new *+$300,000 Palmerston North facility features the
H30 144 latest technology, promoting both driver and environmental safety. ^It
H30 145 is the first in a planned Mobil chain of computerised truckstops which
H30 146 will extend throughout New Zealand.
H30 147    |^Some of the truckstops still to be built will also feature 24
H30 148 hour restaurants and other facilities for drivers.
H30 149    |^*'Truckstops are part of our long-term commitment to the road
H30 150 transport industry**', says Marketing Director Jim Law.
H30 151 |**[LONG QUOTATION**]
H30 152 he says.
H30 153    |^Truckstops also provide significant fuel cost savings for users,
H30 154 including owner drivers. ^Because it is managed as a single profit
H30 155 centre, the high volume allows Mobil to offer attractive pricing to
H30 156 its customers. ^The Palmerston North Truckstop only dispenses diesel
H30 157 at present, but the provision for the distribution of gasoline has
H30 158 also been made.
H30 159    |^Truck drivers at the recent Palmerston North opening were
H30 160 enthusiastic about Truckstop, especially with the convenience of 24
H30 161 hour availability, and the attractive pricing.
H30 162    |^Work is well underway for our next Truckstop at Napier, and
H30 163 development has been started on sites in Invercargill and Tokoroa.
H30 164 **[PLATE**]
H30 165    |^The programme is for further Truckstops to be built in Hamilton,
H30 166 Auckland, Wellington, Christchurch, Dunedin, New Plymouth and Nelson.
H30 167    |^Don Fowler has particular responsibility for Truckstops, and is
H30 168 managing a rapid development plan.
H30 169 |**[LONG QUOTATION**]
H30 170    |^This also applies to the provision of food at some of the
H30 171 Truckstops, where Don is adamant that the standards will be high.
H30 172 |**[LONG QUOTATION**]
H30 173 says Fowler.
H30 174 **[PLATE**]
H30 175 *<*4Canterbury Wins Mobil Export Marketing Award*>
H30 176 **[PLATE**]
H30 177    |^*0Canterbury International are the 1986 Mobil Export Marketing
H30 178 Premier Award winners.
H30 179    |^Canterbury's effort in marketing their active and leisure wear
H30 180 in the United States and Australia produced export sales of *+$26
H30 181 million in 1985. ^This was particularly significant in light of a
H30 182 major slump experienced in sales in 1984, due to changing fashion
H30 183 tastes in North America.
H30 184    |^With this major loss of ground, Canterbury reorientated both
H30 185 their product and marketing strategy, and climbed back into the
H30 186 market. ^As official outfitter for both the Australia *=II crew,
H30 187 winners of the 1984 America's Cup, and the All Blacks, Canterbury's
H30 188 advertising placed a strong emphasis on the sporting connection.
H30 189    |^In accepting the Premier Award, Canterbury managing director
H30 190 \0Mr David Phillipson paid tribute to his staff of *'bright young New
H30 191 Zealanders**', and to their advertising agency Colenso Communications,
H30 192 who are also Mobil's sales advertising agency.
H30 193    |^\0Mr Phillipson said it was apt that as the organisers of the
H30 194 Awards, Mobil Oil New Zealand had chosen a Maori carving depicting the
H30 195 stern post of a canoe. ^Canterbury are clothing all of the crews in
H30 196 the 1986-87 America's Cup competition.
H30 197    |^Mobil Marketing Director Jim Law said in presenting the winners'
H30 198 cheque for *+$3,000, that he hoped New Zealand would get plenty of
H30 199 export orders from the America's Cup exposure, and also secure the
H30 200 biggest coup of the lot *- success in the Cup itself.
H30 201    |^Runnersup to Canterbury were another Christchurch based company,
H30 202 Skope Industries Limited. ^Skope's export activities in selling glass
H30 203 door refrigerators, have yielded significant results particularly in
H30 204 Papua New Guinea. ^Total export returns far exceed *+$3 million and
H30 205 represent a quarter of all sales.
H30 206    |^Merit Award winners in the annual competition were *'The House
H30 207 of Aulsebrooks**' and Hamilton based Trigon Packaging ({0N.Z.}) \0Ltd.
H30 208 **[BEGIN BOX**]
H30 209 *<*4Southerners Flock to *6TE MAORI*>
H30 210    |^*0Despite driving rain and unseasonal temperatures 1000 people
H30 211 gathered in the early dawn for the second New Zealand opening of Te
H30 212 Maori at Dunedin's Otago Museum on 29 November.
H30 213    |^The Dunedin opening was described as one of the warmest and most
H30 214 relaxed by those who'd been lucky enough to attend the United States
H30 215 and Wellington openings.
H30 216    |^The exhibition was officially declared open by the
H30 217 Governor-General, Sir Paul Reeves. ^Brian Fraser, General Manager,
H30 218 Relations, speaking on behalf of Mobil said that Te Maori drew 185,000
H30 219 people to the National Museum in Wellington *- many thousands more
H30 220 than expected, and he was sure that the people of Otago and Southland
H30 221 would attend in proportionately high numbers.
H30 222    |^During the first weeks of Te Maori in Dunedin 2000 people a day
H30 223 had been attending! ^Numbers have certainly been bolstered by the
H30 224 17,000 school children scheduled to see the exhibition in its first
H30 225 few weeks.
H30 226    |^As major sponsor, responsible for promotion and publicity for Te
H30 227 Maori, Mobil can feel justifiably proud of its efforts in attracting
H30 228 so many people to this unique exhibition.
H30 229    |^Once again Mobil's corporate evening, always the first night
H30 230 after the opening, was a stunning success. ^Seventy Dunedin staff,
H30 231 family members and friends and nearly 200 Mobil customers experienced
H30 232 the traditional Marae welcome, a guided tour of Te Maori and a large
H30 233 supper.
H30 234 *#